Download Mercedes-Benz 2003 C 320 Sport Automobile User Manual

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Ê9/tTqÃË
2515845281
Order No. 6515 1809 13 Part No. 251 584 52 81 USA Edition A, 2007
Operator’s Manual R-Class
Operator’s Manual
R-Class
R 320 CDI
R 350
R 500
R 63 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please read this manual carefully,
then return it to your vehicle where it
will be handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty
information .................................... 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 13
Operating your vehicle outside
the USA or Canada......................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 14
Symbols............................................... 15
Operating safety .................................. 16
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17
Reporting safety defects...................... 18
Reporting safety defects ................ 18
Vehicle data recording......................... 19
Information regarding electronic
recording devices........................... 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Exterior view......................................... 22
Cockpit................................................. 24
Instrument cluster ................................ 26
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 30
Center console ..................................... 31
Upper part ...................................... 31
Lower part ...................................... 32
Overhead control panel ........................ 33
Storage compartments......................... 34
Door control panel................................ 36
Getting started ...................................
Unlocking .............................................
Unlocking with the SmartKey .........
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*.........
Starter switch positions..................
Adjusting ..............................................
Seats ..............................................
Steering wheel................................
Mirrors............................................
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belts .................
Starting the engine .........................
Parking brake .................................
Driving off .......................................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals ....................................
Windshield wipers...........................
Rear window wiper/washer............
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off the engine.....................
Releasing seat belts........................
Locking ...........................................
37
38
38
39
39
43
43
46
48
51
51
54
57
58
59
60
60
62
63
65
66
66
67
68
68
Contents
Safety and Security .......................... 71
Occupant safety................................... 72
Air bags .......................................... 74
Seat belts ....................................... 79
Active head restraints .................... 83
Rear head restraints....................... 84
Children in the vehicle.................... 84
Blocking of rear door window
operation........................................ 97
Panic alarm .......................................... 99
Activating ....................................... 99
Deactivating ................................... 99
Driving safety systems....................... 100
ABS .............................................. 100
BAS .............................................. 102
ESP® ............................................. 102
EBP............................................... 105
4-ETS............................................ 106
Anti-theft systems.............................. 107
Immobilizer................................... 107
Anti-theft alarm system ................ 107
Controls in detail .............................
Locking and unlocking .......................
SmartKey .....................................
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ......
Opening the doors from the
inside ...........................................
Opening the tailgate.....................
Closing the tailgate ......................
Automatic central locking ............
Locking and unlocking from the
inside ...........................................
Seats .................................................
Easy-entry/exit feature ................
Lumbar support............................
Multicontour seat*.......................
Front seat active head
restraints......................................
Rear seats ....................................
Seat heating*...............................
Seat ventilation* ..........................
111
112
112
116
122
123
125
130
130
132
132
136
136
137
137
142
143
Memory function* .............................
Storing positions into memory .....
Recalling positions from
memory........................................
Lighting .............................................
Exterior lamp switch ....................
Combination switch .....................
Corner-illuminating front
fog lamps* ...................................
Hazard warning flasher ................
Interior lighting ............................
Door entry lamps .........................
Cargo compartment lamp ............
Instrument cluster .............................
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination ..................................
Resetting the trip odometer.........
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator .....
144
145
145
146
146
150
151
152
153
155
155
156
157
157
157
158
Contents
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AMG menu ...................................
AUDIO menu ................................
Navi* menu..................................
AIRMATIC*/Compass menu ........
Distronic* menu...........................
Vehicle status message
memory menu..............................
Settings menu..............................
Distance warning function* .........
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu* ...................................
Automatic transmission.....................
Gear selector lever.......................
Shifting procedure .......................
Transmission positions.................
Driving tips...................................
Gear ranges .................................
Automatic shift program ..............
159
159
160
162
166
168
171
173
174
174
174
176
191
191
193
197
197
200
201
203
205
206
Steering wheel gearshift control ... 207
Manual shift program
(R 63 AMG only)............................ 209
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) ....................... 211
Good visibility ..................................... 212
Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 212
Rear view mirrors.......................... 212
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors* ........................................ 214
Sun visors ..................................... 215
Rear door window sunshade* ....... 216
Rear window defroster.................. 217
Climate control................................... 218
Deactivating the climate
control system .............................. 222
Operating the climate control
system in automatic mode............ 222
Setting the temperature................ 223
Adjusting air distribution............... 223
Adjusting air volume ..................... 224
Front defroster.............................. 224
Air recirculation mode .................. 226
Air conditioning............................. 228
Residual heat and ventilation........ 229
Rear climate control*.................... 229
3-zone automatic climate control*..... 232
Deactivating the automatic
climate control system ................. 236
Operating the automatic
climate control system in
automatic mode............................ 237
Setting the temperature ............... 237
Adjusting air distribution .............. 238
Adjusting air volume ..................... 239
Front defroster ............................. 239
Maximum cooling MAX COOL....... 240
Air recirculation mode .................. 240
Air conditioning ............................ 243
Using driver-side settings for all
temperature zones........................ 244
Residual heat and ventilation........ 244
Rear automatic climate control
(second row)................................ 245
Rear automatic climate control
(second and third row)*................ 249
Power windows .................................. 251
Opening and closing ..................... 251
Synchronizing the door windows .. 254
Summer opening feature .............. 254
Convenience closing feature......... 256
Contents
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ................
Opening and closing.....................
Synchronizing...............................
Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel* ..............................
Roller sunblinds for the
panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel...........................
Opening and closing the
panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel...........................
Synchronizing the panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding
panel ............................................
Driving systems .................................
Cruise control...............................
Distronic*.....................................
Distance warning function*..........
AIRMATIC* ...................................
Parktronic* (Parking assist) .........
Rear view camera*.......................
258
258
260
261
261
262
264
266
266
271
284
285
291
295
Loading..............................................
Roof rack*....................................
Loading instructions.....................
Cargo tie-down rings ....................
Hooks...........................................
Expanding cargo compartment ....
Cargo compartment cover blind*.
Partition net* ...............................
Useful features ..................................
Storage compartments ................
Parcel nets ...................................
Cup holders..................................
Ashtrays* .....................................
Cigarette lighter* .........................
Power outlets ...............................
Rear center console* ...................
Heated steering wheel* ...............
Telephone* ..................................
Tele Aid* ......................................
Garage door opener* ...................
Compass ......................................
Floormats.....................................
Infrared reflecting windshield*.....
297
297
298
299
300
301
306
308
311
311
315
316
319
321
322
323
326
327
330
337
342
343
344
Operation .........................................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ........
Driving instructions ...........................
Drive sensibly – save fuel.............
Drinking and driving .....................
Pedals ..........................................
Power assistance .........................
Brakes..........................................
Driving off ....................................
Parking.........................................
Tires.............................................
Hydroplaning................................
Tire traction .................................
Tire speed rating ..........................
Winter driving instructions ...........
Standing water.............................
Passenger compartment..............
Driving abroad .............................
Control and operation of radio
transmitters .................................
Catalytic converter
(gasoline engine)..........................
345
346
347
347
347
347
348
348
351
351
352
352
353
353
354
355
356
356
357
357
Contents
Oxidation catalyst
(diesel engine)..............................
Emission control ..........................
Coolant temperature....................
At the gas station ..............................
Refueling......................................
Check regularly and before
a long trip.....................................
Engine compartment .........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil .....................................
Transmission fluid level................
Coolant level ................................
Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp
cleaning* system .........................
Tires and wheels................................
Important guidelines ....................
Tire care and maintenance...........
Direction of rotation.....................
Loading the vehicle ......................
Recommended tire inflation
pressure.......................................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Tire labeling..................................
Load identification .......................
358
358
359
360
360
362
364
364
366
370
370
372
373
373
374
375
376
380
382
391
395
DOT, Tire Identification
Number (TIN) ................................ 396
Maximum tire load ........................ 397
Maximum tire inflation pressure ... 398
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (U.S. vehicles).............. 398
Tire ply material ............................ 400
Tire and loading terminology......... 401
Rotating tires ................................ 404
Winter driving ..................................... 405
Winter tires ................................... 405
Snow chains.................................. 406
Maintenance....................................... 407
Maintenance service indicator
message ....................................... 407
Calling up the maintenance
service indicator display ............... 409
Resetting the maintenance
service indicator ........................... 409
Vehicle care........................................ 410
Cleaning and care of the vehicle... 410
Practical hints .................................. 419
What to do if … ................................... 420
Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 420
Lamp in center console ................ 431
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display .................... 433
Where will I find ...? ............................ 472
First aid kit.................................... 472
Vehicle tool kit.............................. 472
Spare wheel.................................. 475
Unlocking/locking in an emergency.. 478
Unlocking the vehicle ................... 478
Locking the vehicle....................... 479
Fuel filler flap ................................ 479
Opening/closing in an emergency..... 481
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ........... 481
Resetting activated head restraints.... 482
Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 483
Replacing bulbs .................................. 484
Bulbs............................................. 484
Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 487
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 491
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 494
Front wiper blades ........................ 494
Rear wiper blade........................... 495
Contents
Flat tire ..............................................
Preparing the vehicle....................
Mounting the spare wheel ............
Bleeding the fuel system
(diesel engine only) ............................
Battery ...............................................
Disconnecting, removing,
reinstalling and reconnecting
the battery....................................
Charging the battery ....................
Jump starting .....................................
Towing the vehicle .............................
Installing towing eye bolt..............
Stranded vehicle ..........................
Fuses .................................................
Fuse box in engine
compartment................................
Fuse box in cargo compartment...
Fuse box in passenger
compartment................................
Emergency engine shut-down ......
497
497
498
505
506
508
513
514
517
518
519
520
521
521
522
522
Technical data .................................
Parts service ......................................
Warranty coverage.............................
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet .....................
Identification labels ...........................
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................
R 320 CDI ....................................
R 350 ...........................................
R 500 ...........................................
R 63 AMG.....................................
Engine................................................
Rims and tires....................................
Same size tires.............................
Spare wheel (collapsible tire) .......
Electrical system ...............................
Main Dimensions ...............................
Weights..............................................
523
524
525
525
526
528
528
528
528
529
530
532
533
534
535
536
537
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........
Capacities ....................................
Engine oils ...................................
Engine oil additives ......................
Air conditioning refrigerant ..........
Brake fluid....................................
Premium unleaded gasoline
(gasoline engine)..........................
Gasoline additives
(gasoline engine)..........................
Fuel requirements........................
Coolants ......................................
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning* system.........
538
538
540
540
540
541
541
542
542
543
546
Index................................................. 547
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using Genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper
installation will be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will be glad to demonstrate the
proper procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Light Truck Limited Warranty
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, Vermont Emission Control System Warranty (California, Maine, Massachusetts,
and Vermont only)
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center will be glad to inform
you of correct care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calendar days.
Written notification should not be sent to a
dealer, it should be addressed to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for service. The service advisor will
record each service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in accordance with standard program guidelines which include providing service to the
vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a
paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, however, the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center technician or the tow service provider on a
case-by-case basis and may be a factor in
our ability to respond.
12
Additional charges may be applicable for a
breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
determined by our authorized technician
and tow service provider.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program brochure in your vehicle literature
portfolio.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
13
Introduction
Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color.
Controls in detail
Technical data
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed on your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
Getting started
Operation
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
At a glance
Practical hints
Safety and Security
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
14
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Maintenance Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
Trademarks:
앫
앫
ESP® is a registered trademark of
DaimlerChrysler.
®
HomeLink is a registered trademark
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.
*
i Helpful hints or further information you may
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
왘
Page
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
a procedure which is continued
on the next page.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
a warning which is continued on
the next page.
->
This symbol is used to indicate
cross-references to term definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
find useful.
15
Introduction
Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to
electronic components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
16
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance
or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the
matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if
necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
왔 Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid* system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid* subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
19
20
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Exterior view
22
At a glance
Exterior view
Item
Page
1 Tailgate
Item
Page
6 Towing eye bolt
Item
9 Windshield wipers
Page
60
Opening
123
Vehicle tool kit
472
Wiper blades, replacing
494
Closing
125
Installing
517
Wiper blades, cleaning
415
Power tailgate*
123,
125
Cargo compartment
Vehicle tool kit
472
Spare wheel
475
2 Rear window defroster
217
3 Rear lamps
485
4 Fuel filler flap
360
Refueling
360
Fuel
361,
542
5 Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting
49
Auto-dimming rear view
mirrors*
213
Power folding*
214
7 Tires and wheels
373,
532
a Windshield
Cleaning with wiper fluid
62
Checking tire inflation
pressure
382
Run Flat Indicator
(Canada vehicles)
383
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (U.S. vehicles)
385
Advanced Tire Pressure
Monitoring System*
(Canada vehicles)
388
Flat tire
497
Spare wheel
475
d Front lamps
484
364
e Headlamp cleaning system*
212
8 Hood
Engine oil
366
Coolant
370
Cleaning
415
b Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
258
Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel*
261
c Doors
Locking and unlocking
112
Opening and closing
122
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency
478
23
At a glance
Cockpit
24
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
1 Cruise control lever
267
2 Instrument cluster
26
3 Multifunction steering
wheel
30
4 Horn
Item
a Glove box
CD changer*
AUX-socket
Page
311
311
311
b Center console
31
c Starter switch
39
5 Steering wheel gearshift
buttons
207
d Steering wheel adjustment,
manual
46
6 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
54
e Steering wheel adjustment,
electrical*
47
293
Heated steering wheel*
326
7 Front Parktronic* warning
indicators
8 Overhead control panel
9 Glove box release
Glove box lock
f Hood lock release
33
311
312
Item
j Door control panel
Page
36
k Headlamp washer switch*
212
l Exterior lamp switch
146
m Combination switch
앫
Turn signals
60
앫
High beam
59
앫
Windshield wipers
60
앫
Rear window wiper
62
364
g Parking brake release
57
h Parking brake pedal
66
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
1 L Left turn signal
indicator lamp
157
3 Reset button
156
4 To brighten instrument cluster illumination
157
6 Clock
Page
7 Speedometer with:
2 To dim instrument cluster
illumination
5 K Right turn signal
indicator lamp
Item
- Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
indicator lamp
420
’ Variable speed limiter
indicator lamp1
l Distance warning
lamp2
1
Lamp without function. It illuminates when the
ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is
running.
2 Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without
function. It illuminates when the ignition is on.
It should go out when the engine is running.
Item
Page
; Brake warning lamp,
USA only
421
3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
421
v Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®)
warning lamp
425
H Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale,
USA only
428
Low tire pressure
telltale*, Canada only
428
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
Item
8 Multifunction display with:
앫
앫
Trip odometer
Main odometer
A High beam headlamp
indicator
157
< Seat belt telltale
79,
426
1 Supplemental
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp
72,
430
? Engine malfunction indicator lamp,
USA only
423
± Engine malfunction indicator lamp,
Canada only
423
150
Item
앫
Outside temperature
display or digital speedometer (depending on
selected setting in the
control system)
159,
180
앫
Transmission position
indicator
201
앫
Gear range indicator
205
앫
Selected program mode
indicator
206
앫
Distance warning function
indicator*
284
앫
Rear window wiper
indicator
a Fuel gauge with:
1
Fuel tank reserve warning
lamp
430
4 Fuel filler flap indicator: The fuel filler flap
is located on the rear
right-hand side
360
Page
b Multifunction display with:
q Preglow indicator
lamp1
159
9 Tachometer with:
Page
62
Vehicles with diesel engine only.
29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item
1 Multifunction display
Operating the control
system
Page
Item
Page
4 Moving within a menu:
Press button
159
160
j for next display
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
k for previous display
5 Menu systems:
Press button
æ up/to increase
è for next menu
ç down/to decrease
ÿ for previous menu
3 Telephone*:
Press button
6 Voice Control*1
7 Voice Control*1
s to take a call
to dial
to redial
t to end a call
to reject an
incoming call
1
30
Vehicles without Voice Control*: Button without
function.
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
1 COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
2 Climate control
218
3-zone automatic climate
control*
232
Rear window defroster
217
Item
Page
7 Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp
92,
431
8 Hazard warning flasher
152
9 Alarm system indicator
lamp
108
294
3 Seat heating*,
front passenger side
142
a Parking assist (Parktronic
system)* deactivation
switch
104
4 Seat ventilation*,
front passenger side
143
b Electronic Stability Program
(ESP®) switch
143
5 Vehicle level control
switch*
289
c Seat ventilation*,
driver’s side
d Seat heating*, driver’s side
142
6 Program mode selector
switch for automatic
transmission
206
e Adaptive damping system
(ADS)* switch
286
31
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
32
Item
Page
1 Storage compartment
312
2 Armrest storage tray
release
313
3 Armrest storage compartment release
313
4 Storage compartment
Ashtray with cigarette
lighter*
312
5 Cup holders
316
6 Card, ticket holder
Bottle opener
317
317
319
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off
153
a Interior rear view mirror
212
2 Automatic interior lighting
153
b Reading lamps
153
3 Rear interior lighting on/off
153
c Garage door opener*
337
4 Front interior lighting on/off
153
330
5 Right reading lamp on/off
153
6 Front right interior lamp
153
7 Tilt/sliding sunroof* switch
Tilt/sliding panel* switch
258
261
d Vehicles with telephone*
installed:
Hands-free microphone for
TeleAid* (emergency call
system) and telephone*
e Front left interior lamp
153
8 Tele Aid* (emergency call
system) button
332
9 Vehicles without
telephone* installed:
Hands-free microphone for
TeleAid* (emergency call
system)
330
33
At a glance
Storage compartments
34
At a glance
Storage compartments
Item
Page
Item
1 Parcel net in front
passenger footwell
315
c Door pocket
2 Glove box/CD changer*
311
d Parcel net on driver’s seat
backrest
3 Door pocket
4 Parcel net on front
passenger seat backrest
Page
315
e Door pocket
315
5 Door pocket
f Storage compartment in
center console
311
g Storage compartment in
center console
Ashtray*
311
h Cupholders
316
6 Cup holder
316
7 Third-row storage
compartment
311
8 Parcel net in cargo
compartment
315
j Front armrest storage
compartments
311
9 First aid kit, vehicle tool kit,
spare wheel
472
k Cup holders*
316
311
a Third-row storage
compartment
311
l Rear armrest storage
compartment*
b Cup holder
316
m Cup holders
Rear storage compartments
Rear seat ashtray*
316
311
319
319
35
At a glance
Door control panel
Item
36
Page
1 Inside door handle
122
2 Central locking/unlocking
switch
130
3 Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
49
4 Selection buttons for
exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors*
49
214
5 Switches for
opening/closing front and
rear door windows
251
6 Rear door window override
switch
97
7 Hinged quarter window
switch*
253
8 Remote tailgate release
switch, power tailgate*
124,
125
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
37
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will provide you with further
information. The corresponding page
references are located at the end of each
segment.
SmartKey
왘
Press button Πon the SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in
the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
system is disarmed. The locator lighting comes on if the feature is enabled
in the control system (컄 page 184).
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 99)
왘
Enter the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 112).
38
Getting started
Unlocking
왘
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock or unlock the vehicle without using
the remote control buttons on the
SmartKey and start the engine without
inserting the SmartKey into the starter
switch.
i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no
further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away
from the respective door.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in
the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
system is disarmed. The locator lighting comes on if the feature is enabled
in the control system (컄 page 184).
i If the vehicle has been parked for more than
72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle
in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
왘
Warning!
G
Grasp an outside door handle or the
tailgate handle.
Enter the vehicle.
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
For more information, see “SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 116).
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
39
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey
remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 420).
3 Starting position
i When you switch on the ignition, the
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster
40
indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
will go out when the engine is running.
This indicates that the respective systems are
operational.
i When the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch and the automatic transmission is
in a position other than P, the automatic
transmission automatically shifts to P.
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in
the starter switch, the battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
앫
Check the battery and charge it if necessary
(컄 page 506).
앫
Get a jump start (컄 page 514).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
completely discharged battery, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
engine is not in operation.
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button.
not need to be removed from the starter switch
when you leave the vehicle. However, always
take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you
when you leave the vehicle. As long as the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle, the
vehicle’s electrical systems can be switched on
or the engine can be started using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
inserted and the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO present in the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫
without the brake pedal depressed
corresponds to the various starter
switch positions (컄 page 42)
앫
with the brake pedal firmly depressed
will start the engine (컄 page 55)
If you wish or should there be a need to
insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in
the starter switch, the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button can be easily removed
by pulling it out of the starter switch.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
3 USA only
4 Canada only
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
2 Starter switch
왘
Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button 1 into starter switch 2 (if not
inserted already).
왘
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
왘
Do not depress the brake pedal.
41
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 0
Ignition (or Position 2)
i When you switch on the ignition, the
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0 (as with
SmartKey removed).
왘
indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. The indicator and warning
lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
will go out when the engine is running.
This indicates that the respective systems are
operational.
Position 1
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as seat adjustment.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
앫
once more, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
앫
twice more, the power supply is again
switched off
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
consumers.
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster
remains on after starting the engine or
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 420).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once more, the power supply
is again switched off.
42
For information on starting the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 55).
For more information on KEYLESS-GO, see
“SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*”
(컄 page 116).
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as
fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
Warning!
Seats
Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 51).
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and
belts are properly positioned on the body.
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the power seats can be operated when the
respective door is open.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child. For additional information, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 84).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment
! When moving the seat, make sure there are
왘
The seat adjustment switch is located on
the entry side of each front seat base.
no items in the footwell or behind the seat.
Otherwise you could damage the seat.
or
! When the second-row seats are folded
forward, e.g. for cargo compartment expansion
(컄 page 301), the front seats may not be moved
to the rearmost position. Otherwise you could
damage the front and second-row seats.
! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and
head restraint height, make sure the sun visor is
folded up (컄 page 215). If the head restraint is in
the uppermost position, it could hit and damage
the sun visor.
1 Head restraint height (vehicles with
memory function)*
2 Seat cushion tilt
3 Seat height
4 Seat backrest tilt
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
44
i The memory function* (컄 page 144) lets
you store the settings for the seat position together with the settings for the steering wheel
and the exterior rear view mirrors.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
Open the respective door (vehicles
with memory function*).
The seat can be adjusted with the respective door opened.
or
왘
Open a front door (vehicles without
memory function*).
The seat can be adjusted within
3 minutes after either front door has
been opened.
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat fore and aft adjustment
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 5.
Adjust the seat to a comfortable
seating position that still allows you to
reach the accelerator/brake pedal
safely. The position should be as far to
the rear as possible, consistent with
ability to properly operate controls.
Seat height
왘
Press the switch up or down in
direction of arrow 3.
Seat cushion tilt
왘
Press the switch up or down in
direction of arrow 2 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in direction of arrow 4 until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
Head restraint height
Warning!
G
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
With a third-row seat occupied, make sure
to move the respective head restraint up
from the lowest non-use position and have
the occupant adjust the head restraint
properly.
! Do not attempt to remove front seat head
restraints. They can only be removed by qualified
technicians. We recommend that you have this
work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Vehicles with memory function*:
왘
Press switch (컄 page 44) up or down in
direction of arrow 1.
Vehicles without memory function:
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned and engaged head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level. This will
reduce the potential for injury to the head
and neck in the event of an accident or
similar situation.
1 Head restraint
2 Release button
컄컄
45
Getting started
Adjusting
컄컄Raising:
왘
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
Manually adjust the height of head
restraint 1 by pulling it upward.
Steering wheel adjustment, manual
If head restraint 1 is fully retracted,
push release button 2 in direction of
arrow and pull head restraint 1
upward.
Warning!
To lower head restraint 1, press
release button 2 in direction of arrow
and push down on head restraint 1.
Manually adjust the angle of the head
restraint.
왘
While seated, reach behind you with
both hands and find lower edge of the
head restraint.
왘
Adjust the head restraint to the desired
position by pushing or pulling on the
lower edge of the head restraint
cushion.
For more information, see “Seats”
(컄 page 132).
46
G
Only adjust the steering wheel with the
vehicle at a standstill and make sure the
steering wheel is securely locked in place
before driving off.
Lowering:
왘
Steering wheel
Driving without the steering wheel adjustment locked may cause an unexpected
steering wheel movement which could
cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle. Make sure the steering wheel is
securely locked by trying to move it up and
down, and in and out before driving off.
Getting started
Adjusting
Make sure that
앫
you can reach the steering wheel with
your arms slightly bent at the elbows
앫
you can move your legs freely
앫
all displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument
cluster are clearly visible
The steering wheel adjustment release
handle is located on the lower left of the
steering column.
1 Release handle
왘
To unlock the steering wheel, pull
release handle 1 out to its stop limit.
왘
Move steering wheel to the desired
position.
Warning!
왘
Push release handle 1 back to its
original position to relock the steering
wheel.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
driving could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
The steering wheel is locked into position again.
왘
Make sure the steering wheel is
securely locked by trying to move it up
and down as well as in and out before
driving off.
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the steering
wheel adjustment feature can be operated
when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
47
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors
i The memory function* (컄 page 144) lets
you store the settings for the steering wheel
together with the settings for seat positions and
the exterior rear view mirrors.
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have
a good view of the road and traffic
conditions.
Make sure that
앫
you can reach the steering wheel with
your arms slightly bent at the elbows
앫
you can move your legs freely
앫
all displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument
cluster are clearly visible
The steering wheel adjustment stalk is
located on the lower left of the steering
column.
Warning!
1 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out
2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
or
왘
Open the driver’s door.
Adjusting steering wheel in or out
왘
Move stalk forward or back in direction
of arrow 1.
Adjusting steering wheel up or down
왘
48
Move stalk up or down in direction of
arrow 2.
G
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can only be completely
removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.
Getting started
Adjusting
Interior rear view mirror
왘
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
The buttons are located on the driver’s
door control panel.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 212).
Exterior rear view mirrors
i If you do not make adjustments to the
selected exterior rear view mirror within
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. You will
then have to select the desired exterior rear view
mirror again before any adjustments can be
made. Adjustments can only be made with the
indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear
view mirror button illuminated.
왘
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.
The mirror surface is convex (outwardly
curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear.
Check your interior rear view mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Adjustment button
3 Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror button
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘
Press button 1 for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or
button 3 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
Push adjustment button 2 up, down,
left, or right according to the desired
setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
place. The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in the
usual manner.
컄컄
The indicator lamp on the respective
button comes on for approximately
15 seconds.
49
Getting started
Adjusting
컄컄! Vehicles with power folding exterior rear
view mirrors*:
If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly
pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front) press fold
button 1 (컄 page 214) to fold mirrors in, then
press fold button 1 (컄 page 214) again to fold
mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly positioned
and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.
i The memory function* (컄 page 144) lets
you store the settings for the exterior rear view
mirrors together with the setting for the steering
wheel column and the seat positions.
At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear
view mirrors will be heated automatically.
For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (컄 page 212).
50
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedal’s range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
and injury.
Fastening the seat belts
Warning!
G
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
the occupants are using their seat belts
(컄 page 79).
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats.
Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
For additional information, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 84).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
51
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is
correctly restrained with a separate seat
belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 76) and (컄 page 79).
1 Seat belt outlet
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
52
Getting started
Driving
왘
With a smooth motion, pull the belt out
of seat belt outlet 1.
왘
Place the shoulder portion of the seat
belt across the top of your shoulder
and the lap portion across your hips.
왘
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3
(컄 page 52) until it clicks.
왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion of
the seat belt to a snug fit by pulling
shoulder portion up.
왘
Press release button 1 and move the
seat belt height adjuster upward or
downward.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time. When using a seat belt to secure
infant or toddler restraints or children
in booster seats, always follow the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
앫
Check your seat belt periodically
during travel to make sure that it is
properly positioned.
앫
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
Proper use of seat belts
앫
Do not twist the seat belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck). Never pass the
shoulder portion of the seat belt under
your arm. For this purpose, you can
adjust the height of the seat belt outlet
(컄 page 53).
Seat belt height adjustment
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly
upright position.
1 Release button
53
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Warning!
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
54
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For information on how to operate the gear
selector lever, see “Automatic transmission” (컄 page 197).
Getting started
Driving
Starting with the SmartKey
Diesel engine:
For information on turning off the engine
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off the engine” (컄 page 67).
왘
The transmission position indicator in
the multifunction display should be
on P.
Gasoline engine:
왘
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
The transmission position indicator in
the multifunction display should be
on P.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 (컄 page 40) and hold until
the engine starts.
i You can also use the “touch-start” function.
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it
again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 (컄 page 40).
Preglow indicator lamp q in the instrument cluster comes on.
왘
As soon as preglow indicator lamp
q goes out, turn the SmartKey in
the starter switch to position 3
(컄 page 40) and release it.
The engine starts automatically.
i If the engine is at operating temperature,
preglow indicator lamp q may not stay on
and you can start the engine without preglowing.
Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning!
G
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
Therefore, never leave children unattended
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise
accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle.
You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the
starter switch.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
55
Getting started
Driving
Gasoline engine
Diesel engine
왘
왘
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
The transmission position indicator in
the multifunction display should be
on P.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
왘
Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button is inserted in the starter
switch (컄 page 41).
i If you wish to start the engine using the
SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO feature,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from
the starter switch (컄 page 41).
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 67).
56
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
The transmission position indicator in
the multifunction display should be
on P.
왘
Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure.
왘
Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once.
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once.
The engine starts if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.
The engine preglows and starts if the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the
vehicle.
i If the engine is at operating temperature,
the time the engine needs to preglow is reduced.
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting
procedure.
왘
If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that
may be open to allow for better
detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Parking brake
Remove KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from starter switch.
왘
Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
왘
Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 55). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 514).
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Children could release
the parking brake, which could result in an
accident and/or serious injury.
왘
or
왘
Warning!
Release the parking brake by pulling on
release handle 2.
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
1 Parking brake pedal
2 Release handle
57
Getting started
Driving
Driving off
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be
used.
왘
Shift automatic transmission to D or R
(컄 page 199).
i Wait for the gear selection process to
complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
i Shifting from gear position P to position R,
N, or D is only possible with the brake pedal
depressed. Without the brake pedal depressed,
the gear selector lever can be moved, but the
parking pawl remains engaged, not allowing
shifting to occur.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator
pedal.
58
! If you hear a warning signal and the
message Release parking brake appears in
the multifunction display when driving off, you
have forgotten to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic
central locking system engages and the locking
knobs drop down.
The automatic door lock feature can be
deactivated (컄 page 189).
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher engine revolution.
This allows the catalytic converter
(gasoline engine) or the oxidation catalyst
(diesel engine) to reach its operating temperature earlier.
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Getting started
Driving
! Shift the automatic transmission to
position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped
in order to avoid damaging the transmission.
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine
speeds may shorten the service life of the
engine.
R 63 AMG:
At engine temperatures below 68°F (20°C), the
engine’s maximum speed is restricted in order to
protect it from damage. Avoid driving your
vehicle at full speed when the engine is cold to
prevent premature engine wear and/or
diminished comfort.
Switching on headlamps
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 146).
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Low beam headlamps
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
Combination switch
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
For more information, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 347).
High beam
왘
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
The low beam headlamps come on.
Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1.
The high beam headlamps and the
highbeam indicator lamp A in the
instrument cluster come on
(컄 page 26).
For more information on headlamps, see
“Combination switch” (컄 page 150).
59
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
The combination switch resets automatically after major steering wheel movement.
i If the combination switch is pressed to the
point of resistance and released, the corresponding turn signals flash three times.
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
a windshield might scratch the glass and/or
damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on
a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
windshield wipers in dry weather conditions,
always operate the windshield wipers with
windshield washer fluid (컄 page 62).
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
앫
Combination switch
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and
앫
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
or
왘
앫
Press the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument
cluster flashes.
60
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with SmartKey
removed from starter switch)
before attempting to remove any blockage.
앫
Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on again.
Getting started
Driving
If the windshield wipers fail to function at all in
combination switch position U or V,
앫
set the combination switch to the next
higher wiper speed
앫
have the windshield wipers checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center
Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Turn the combination switch to the
desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
M Windshield wipers off
U Slow intermittent wiping
Rain sensor operation with low
sensitivity.
V Fast intermittent wiping
Rain sensor operation with high
sensitivity.
u Slow continuous wiping
t Fast continuous wiping
Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
wet weather conditions or in the presence
of precipitation.
When you select intermittent wiping, the
rain sensor is activated. The rain sensor
automatically sets a suitable wiping
interval depending on the wetness of the
sensor surface.
! Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning.
Wipers will operate in the presence of water
sprayed on the windshield, and windshield
wipers may be damaged as a result.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows.
You should therefore switch off the windshield
wipers when weather conditions are dry.
왘
Turn the combination switch to
position U or V.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.
i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or out
of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when
앫
all doors are closed
and
앫
the automatic transmission is set to
position D or R
or
앫
the wiper setting is changed using the
combination switch
Single wipe
왘
Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
61
Getting started
Driving
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Press the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 past the resistance point.
Rear window wiper/washer
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
6 Rear window wiper indicator
i To prevent smears on the windshield, wipe
왘
with windshield washer fluid every now and then
even when it is raining.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning*
system” (컄 page 372).
62
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
i The rear window wiper engages automatically when the automatic transmission is shifted to
position R with the windshield wipers switched
on.
Combination switch
Activating intermittent wipe
1 Rear window wiper switch
2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
3 Intermittent wiping
4 Rear window wiper off
5 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
왘
Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to
position 3 (컄 page 62).
In the lower multifunction display you
will see indicator 6, indicating that
the rear window wiper is activated.
Getting started
Driving
Deactivating intermittent wipe
왘
Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to
position 4 (컄 page 62).
Indicator 6 for the rear window wiper
is cleared from the lower multifunction
display, indicating that the rear window
wiper is deactivated.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Turn and hold rear window wiper
switch 1 in position 2 or 5
(컄 page 62) until the rear window is
clean.
The rear window wiper operates with
washer fluid.
Problems while driving
The coolant temperature is above
248°F (120°C)
The engine runs erratically and misfires
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged
(gasoline engine only).
앫
The engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it
(gasoline engine only).
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
Have the problem repaired by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
soon as possible and turn off the
engine. Allow engine and coolant to
cool.
왘
Check the coolant level and add
coolant if necessary (컄 page 370).
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning*
system” (컄 page 372).
63
Getting started
Driving
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
왘
Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount:
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
64
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and the
steering system. In this case, it is important
to keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press the
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a
result of vehicle movement, before turning
off the engine and leaving the vehicle
always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Shift the automatic transmission to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
65
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘
Parking brake
Warning!
G
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle
and cause an accident. In addition, the
vehicle’s brake lights do not light up when
the parking brake is engaged. Make sure not
to endanger any other road users when you
engage the parking brake.
1 Parking brake pedal
2 Release handle
66
Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1.
When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
comes on.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access
to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
release the parking brake and/or shift the
automatic transmission out of position P,
either of which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
Getting out of your vehicle with the automatic transmission not fully engaged in
position P is dangerous. Also, when parked
on an incline, position P alone may not
prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 199).
When parked on an incline, also turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
Switching off headlamps
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M.
For more information, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 146).
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off the engine
i If the engine cannot be turned off as
described, see “Emergency engine shut-down”
(컄 page 522).
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to
position P (컄 page 199).
Warning!
G
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
has come to a complete stop. With the
engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In
this case, it is important to keep in mind that
a considerably higher degree of effort is
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
i Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 199).
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel
towards the road curb.
Turning off with the SmartKey
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 (컄 page 40).
왘
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
i If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey
and remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch with the transmission in a position other
than P, the transmission will automatically shift
to P.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the
SmartKey alone will not automatically shift the
transmission to P. Only when the SmartKey is
removed from the starter switch will the transmission automatically shift to P.
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 41) to turn off the
engine.
With the driver’s door closed, the
starter switch is now in position 1. With
the driver’s door opened, the starter
switch is set to position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from starter switch
(컄 page 39).
i You can turn off the engine while driving by
pressing and holding the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button for approximately 3 seconds.
i If you turn off the engine using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the
driver’s door with the transmission in a position
other than P, the transmission will automatically
shift to P.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone will not
automatically shift the transmission to P. Only
when the driver’s door is opened will the transmission automatically shift to P.
67
Getting started
Parking and locking
Releasing seat belts
왘
Press the seat belt release button
(컄 page 52).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim panel. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
68
Locking
Warning!
i If you hear a warning signal, you have
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors.
Be especially careful when small children
are around.
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a
door during closing.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
forgotten to switch off the exterior lamps before
opening the driver’s door.
In addition the message Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the exterior lamps.
왘
Exit the vehicle and close all doors and
the tailgate.
Locking with the SmartKey
왘
Press button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 38).
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 112).
Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking with KEYLESS-GO*
1 Lock button on the outside door handle
왘
Press lock button 1 on an outside
door handle.
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 112).
69
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most
important facts about the restraint
systems of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫
Seat belts (컄 page 79)
앫
Child restraints (컄 page 95)
앫
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 93)
Additional protection provide
앫
앫
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
with
앫
Air bags (컄 page 74)
앫
Air bag control unit (with crash
sensors)
앫
Emergency Tensioning Device
(ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 82)
Active head restraints (컄 page 83)
72
Air bag system components with
앫
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp (컄 page 92)
앫
Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 88)
Although independent systems, their
protective functions work in conjunction
with each other.
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
systems for infants and children, see “Children
in the vehicle” (컄 page 84).
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates early detection of malfunctions.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 26) comes on when the
ignition is switched on and goes out no
later than a few seconds after the engine
was started.
The SRS components are in operational
readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
lit when the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
fails to go out no later than approximately 4 seconds after the engine was
started
앫
does not come on at all
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Modifications to or work improperly
conducted on restraint systems (such as
seat belts and anchors, emergency tensioning devices, seat belt force limiters or air
bags) or their wiring, as well as tampering
with interconnected electronic systems, can
lead to the restraint systems no longer functioning as intended.
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or
fail to deploy in accidents although the
deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never modify
the restraint systems. Do not tamper with
electronic components or their software.
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise
the SRS may not deploy when needed in an
accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result in
injury.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact a local authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center or call our Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
In addition, improper work on the SRS
creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Warning!
Warning!
G
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal
impacts (front air bags), side impacts (side
impact air bags and head protection window
curtain air bags) or rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). However, no
system available today can totally eliminate
injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the air
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
74
G
앫
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover
on the steering wheel must be at least
10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any
problems, please see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
Do not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms
inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver’s front air bag inflates.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear their
respective seat belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the seat backrest.
Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
properly positioned on your body
(컄 page 51).
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the air bag.
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position
or too close to the air bag can be seriously
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
G
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
follow these guidelines:
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat.
(1) Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and for children 12 years
old and under, use an appropriately
sized infant or toddler restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size
and weight of the child.
Warning!
It should be noted that with respect to both,
front side impact air bags or the rear side
impact air bags*, there is a possibility for a
side impact air bag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly
seated or restrained when next to a side impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in
a side impact in order to do its job.
(2) Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
rear seat occupants to have the rear seat
mounted side impact air bags* deactivated,
then deactivation can be accomplished
upon your written request to do so at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center at an additional cost.
Please contact your local authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call
our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
for details.
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags), side impacts
(side impact and head protection window curtain
air bags) which exceed preset thresholds, and in
certain rollovers (head protection window curtain air bags). Only during these events will they
provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passengers should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
air bags to provide their supplemental protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts below air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be
protected to the extent possible by a properly
fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt
is also needed to provide the best possible protection in a rollover.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
air bag
Warning!
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or
removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
cover, outboard sides of the front seat
backrests, door trim panels, or door
frame trims, and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between air bags and occupants
free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
앫
Do not hang items such as coat hangers
from the coat hooks or handles over the
door. These items may turn into projectiles and cause head and other injuries
when window curtain air bag is deployed.
앫
Air bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not
touch.
G
앫
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency
tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed
to function on a one-time-only basis. An
air bag or ETD that is deployed must be
replaced.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
It is important to your safety and that of your
passengers that you replace deployed air bags
and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make
sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate protection.
76
앫
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
앫
Given the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and
the textile structure of the air bags,
there is the possibility of abrasions or
potentially more serious injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
Warning!
G
Front air bags
Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
the front side impact air bags or the rear
side impact air bags*. Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
availability.
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
1 Driver air bag
2 Passenger air bag
Driver and front passenger air bags are
deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the side impact air
bags
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
based on the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as assessed by the air bag control unit.
On the front passenger-side, the front air bag
deployment is additionally influenced by the
passenger’s weight category as identified by the
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 88).
The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
for the second stage inflation of the air bag.
78
The air bags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if:
앫
the system, based on OCS weight sensor readings, senses that the front
passenger seat is occupied
앫
the 59 indicator lamp in
the center console is not lit
(컄 page 92)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
Side impact air bags, window curtain
air bags
Warning!
G
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
control are located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the doors or door
trim panels including, for example, the addition of door speakers.
Improper repair work on the doors or the
modification or addition of components to
the doors creates a risk of rendering the
side impact air bags inoperative or causing
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the
doors must therefore only be performed by
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In addition, the window curtain air bags 2
are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers.
1 Front side impact air bag
2 Window curtain air bag
3 Rear side impact air bag*
The side impact air bags and window
curtain air bags are deployed:
앫
on the impacted side of the vehicle
앫
in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
앫
independently of the front air bags
The front passenger side impact air bag
will not deploy if the OCS senses that the
front passenger seat is empty and the front
passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch
plate is not inserted into the buckle). With
an empty front passenger seat and the
seat belt fastened (latch plate properly inserted into buckle) the front passenger
side impact air bag will deploy independently of the empty seat.
The side impact air bags and window curtain air bags are not deployed in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
Seat belts
Always wear your seat belt. All vehicle
occupants always need to have their seat
belts fastened and wear them properly.
In addition, applicable motor vehicle safety
laws require you to wear seat belts. Even
where this is not the case, we strongly
recommend that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened and wear
them properly.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belts” (컄 page 51).
i For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 84).
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure all of your passengers
are properly restrained, even those sitting in
the rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
80
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
of the ETDs or to failure.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
앫
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags
and ETD).
앫
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver air bag, passenger front air bag, side impact air
bags, head protection window curtain
air bags for side windows) and ETD (seat
belt emergency tensioning device), and
front seat knee bolsters. The system is
designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front air bags and ETD)
and side (side impact, window curtain
air bags and ETD) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds and in
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body would
move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys, etc., as
these might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to distribute impact forces.
The twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
앫
When using a seat belt to secure infant
or toddler restraints or children in
booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale < will always illuminate
for 6 seconds to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
when the engine is started, an additional
warning chime will also sound for a maximum of 6 seconds or until the driver’s seat
belt is fastened.
If after these 6 seconds, the driver’s or the
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
passenger seat occupied) are not fastened
with all doors closed,
앫
the seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened
82
앫
and if the vehicle speed exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing
intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds
or until the driver’s and the front
passenger’s seat belt are fastened
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s
seat belt remains unfastened after
60 seconds, the the warning chime
stops sounding and the seat belt
telltale < stops flashing but
continues to be illuminated.
The seat belt telltale < will only go out
if both the driver’s and the front passenger’s seat belt (with the front passenger
seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
is standing still and a front door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 426).
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear seats
are equipped with emergency tensioning
devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the
following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts
exceeding the system deployment
threshold
앫
in certain vehicle rollovers
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 430)
i The ETDs for the front seats will only activate if the respective front seat belt is fastened
(latch plate properly inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear seats will activate with or
without the respective seat belt fastened.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In an impact, emergency tensioning
devices remove slack from the belts in
such a way that the seat belts fit more
snugly against the body. Belt force limiters,
when activated, are employed to help
reduce the peak force exerted by the seat
belts on occupants during a crash.
Warning!
G
A pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device
(ETD) that was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Active head restraints
The active head restraints are intended to
offer the driver and front passenger
increased protection from whiplash type
injuries. In the event of a rear-end collision,
the active head restraints on the driver’s
and front passenger’s seats are designed
to move forward in the direction of travel,
providing the head with increased support
earlier on in the collision sequence. The
active head restraints move forward
whether the seat is occupied or not.
Warning!
G
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraint. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for availability.
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
the head restraints posts. Otherwise, the
active head restraints may not be able to
function properly or offer the intended
degree of protection in the event of an
accident.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
You cannot remove the active head
restraint on the driver’s and front passenger’s seats.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
For information on resetting the activated
active head restraints, see “Resetting activated head restraints” (컄 page 482).
Rear head restraints
Warning!
Children in the vehicle
G
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints installed when the rear seats
are occupied. Head restraints are intended
to help reduce injuries during an accident.
With a third-row seat occupied, make sure
to move the respective head restraint up
from the lowest non-use position and have
the occupant adjust the head restraint
properly.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible and the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
84
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child.
앫
Make sure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle
is in motion.
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system. The children could
앫
injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
앫
be seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become very
hot, and the child could be burned on these
parts.
If children open a door, they could
앫
앫
injure other persons
get out of the car and injure themselves
or be injured by following traffic
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless
they are firmly secured in place. For more information, please refer to the “Loading”
(컄 page 297) and “Useful features”
(컄 page 311) sections in the “Controls in
detail” chapter.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of:
앫
strong braking maneuvers
앫
sudden changes of direction
앫
an accident
Infant and child restraint systems
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
seat belt have special seat belt retractors
for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then
pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
that the special seat belt retractor is activated. The belt is now locked. Push down
on child restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. To deactivate the special seat belt retractor for the
front passenger seat, the front passenger
seat must be in the most backward position. The seat belt can again be used in the
usual manner.
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
i For information on child seats with mounting
fittings for tether anchorages, see “Installation
of infant and child restraint system”
(컄 page 95).
For information on LATCH type child seat
mounts, see “Child seat anchors – LATCH type”
(컄 page 93).
The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the District
of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canadian provinces.
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the child restraint, that
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with these standards can be found on the instruction label
on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant or child restraint
system, make sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or
child restraints.
86
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Always sit nearly upright, properly use the
seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or toddler restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information when circumstances
require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the OCS senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision
which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only
means to completely eliminate this risk
is to never place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat.
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure that the
59 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should
the 59 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 59 indicator lamp while driving to make sure
the lamp is illuminated. If the
59 indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the front passenger seat until the
system has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the front
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the front passenger front
air bag inflates.
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and
secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be
activated (컄 page 88).
Warning!
G
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
컄컄
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
for children over 41 lbs until they reach a
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use
vehicle equipment and may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.
88
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the front passenger
front air bag on or off based on the classified occupant weight category determined
by weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
i The system does not deactivate the front
passenger side impact air bag, the window curtain air bag, and the emergency tensioning device.
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
nearly upright position with their back
against the seat backrest and feet on the
floor to be correctly classified. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to another
object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on
armrests), the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
Furthermore, the occupant weight may
appear to increase or decrease due to
objects hanging on the seat, other passengers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
underneath the seat or stuffed between
seat and middle console or between seat
and door or due to objects applying pressure on the back of the seat. Always make
sure the seat has clearance in all directions at all times.
i If your seat, including your trim cover and
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Both, driver and the front passenger
should always use the 59 indicator lamp as an indication of whether or
not the front passenger is properly positioned.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than
a small individual is in the front passenger
seat, have the front passenger reposition
himself or herself in the seat until the
59 indicator lamp goes out, or
check whether objects are caught under or
around the seat.
More information about air bag display
messages (컄 page 445).
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air
bag deployment when the OCS classified
the front passenger seat occupant as being
up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or if the front passenger seat is
sensed as being empty.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being up
to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 59 indicator
lamp will illuminate when the engine is
started and remain illuminated, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat is classified as being empty, the
59 indicator lamp will illuminate when the engine is started and remain
illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as being
heavier than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint or as being a small individual
(such as a young teenager or a small adult),
the 59 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when
the engine is started and then, depending on
occupant weight sensor readings from the
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the
59 indicator lamp illuminated,
the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. With the 59 indicator
lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is
activated.
When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
59 indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the
engine is started and then go out, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is activated.
컄컄
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
If the 59 indicator lamp is illuminated, the front passenger front air bag is
deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 59 indicator lamp is not
illuminated, the front passenger front air
bag is activated and will be deployed:
앫
in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫
independently of the side impact air
bags.
If the front passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be influenced by
앫
the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
앫
the front passenger’s weight category
as identified by the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
90
Warning!
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
must be seated and properly secured in an
appropriate infant or child restraint recommended for the size and weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
and top tether strap, fully in accordance
with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
an inflating air bag. Note the following important information when circumstances require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
앫
Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to turn off the front
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate child restraint on the front passenger seat.
앫
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates in a collision
which could occur under some circumstances, even with the air bag technology installed in your vehicle. The only
means to completely eliminate this risk
is to never place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
If you must install a rear-facing child
restraint on the front passenger seat
because circumstances require you to
do so, make sure that the
59 indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. Should
the 59 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. Periodically check the 59 indicator lamp while driving to make sure
the 59 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the 59 indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do not
transport a child on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front passenger front air bag inflates.
앫
If you have to place a child in a
forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible, use the proper
child restraint recommended for the
age, size and weight of the child, and secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the front passenger
front air bag may or may not be activated (컄 page 88).
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the front passenger front air bag
also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 88)
may have determined:
앫
that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both instances where the
system suppresses deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient
severity to deploy the driver front air bag
앫
that the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small
adult) or a child weighing more than the
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint – instances where
the system may suppress deployment of the
front passenger front air bag even though
the impact met the criteria and was of sufficient severity to deploy the driver front air
bag
91
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The 59 indicator lamp is located in the center console.
1 59 indicator lamp
The 59 indicator lamp 1 will
be illuminated, except with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch or with
the starter switch in position 0
(컄 page 39).
G
앫
Do not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats.
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
59 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
Occupant Classification System. The front
passenger front air bag will be deactivated
in this case. Have the system checked as
soon as possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
앫
Do not stuff objects such as books between the middle console and the front
passenger seat.
앫
Do not move the front passenger seat
backwards against stiff objects.
앫
Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
앫
Do not lean on the armrests or lift yourself from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS
to be unable to correctly approximate
the occupant weight category.
앫
Only have the seat repaired or replaced
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
앫
Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Warning!
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS:
앫
앫
92
Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg)
into the parcel net on the back of the
front passenger seat. Otherwise, the
OCS may not be able to properly approximate the occupant weight category.
Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Self-test Occupant Classification System
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice, the 59 indicator lamp
(컄 page 92) located in the center console
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
sitting on the front passenger seat and the
system senses the occupant as being an
adult, the 59 indicator lamp
will illuminate and go out after approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
senses the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 59 indicator lamp
will illuminate and not go out.
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp should
not illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center before seating any child
on the front passenger seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 431).
Warning!
G
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the Occupant
Classification System. The bottom of the
child seat must make full contact with the
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly
mounted child seat could cause injuries to
the child in case of an accident, instead of
increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
Child seat anchors – LATCH type
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
type anchors (at each of the second and
third-row seats) for the installation of a
LATCH child seat with matching mounting
fittings.
Warning!
G
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper belt positioning for children over
41 lbs until they reach a height where a
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to the
right and left side anchors.
컄컄
93
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result
in serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
왘
Move the respective second-row seat
backrest to an upright position
(컄 page 138).
왘
Push the upholstery blend to the side.
왘
Install a LATCH type child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
The LATCH anchors on the third-row seats
are blended with covers.
4 Anchors third-row seats
The LATCH anchors on the second-row
seats are covered with upholstery blends.
왘
Install a LATCH type child seat according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be
used and can be installed using the vehicle’s
seat belt system. Install child seat according to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
3 Anchorage ring covers, third-row seats
왘
1 Anchors second-row seats
2 Indicates the position of the anchors
94
Remove anchorage ring cover 3 from
third-row seat on which a child seat is
to be installed.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint
system
This vehicle is equipped with tether anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
the rear seat backrests.
2 Anchorage rings
3 Hook
왘
1 Anchorage ring cover
왘
Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from
seat backrest of the seat on which a
child seat is to be installed.
왘
Move the respective head restraint to
its uppermost position (컄 page 139).
Release the respective seat backrest
(컄 page 133).
The seat backrest folds down.
2 Anchorage ring
3 Hook
4 Top tether strap
왘
Guide top tether strap 4 between
head restraint and top of seat backrest.
i For safety, make sure hook 3 has attached
to anchorage ring 2 beyond the safety catch, as
illustrated (컄 page 95).
컄컄
95
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄왘
Securely fasten hook 3, which is part
of top tether strap 4, to anchorage
ring 2.
Make sure
앫
the top tether strap is not twisted
앫
the head restraint is installed and
positioned such that the top tether
strap* can pass freely between the
head restraint and top of seat backrest
앫
앫
96
top tether strap is positioned between the seat backrest and the
cargo compartment cover blind*
(if installed)
the top tether strap is positioned
between the seat backrest and the
partition net* (if installed)
Warning!
G
When installing a child seat on a third-row
seat, do not fasten hook 3 to the strap
below anchorage ring 2. Otherwise, the
child seat will not be securely fastened.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child seat is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
왘
Fold seat backrest up and push backwards until it audibly engages.
A second-row seat is properly locked
only when lock status indicator 1 is in
hinged position and red marking 2 is
barely visible (컄 page 135).
Warning!
G
After installing top tether straps, make sure
앫
the seats are properly locked
앫
the seat backrests are in an upright position and are properly locked
A second-row seat is properly locked only
when lock status indicator 1 is in hinged
position and red marking 2 is barely visible
(컄 page 135).
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
locked, the seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. The child seat
would no longer be properly supported or
positioned to provide its intended benefit.
That could cause serious or even fatal
injuries.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘
Lower the head restraint if necessary
(컄 page 139).
Make sure the top tether strap can
pass freely between the head restraint
and top of seat backrest.
왘
Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Blocking of rear door window operation
The override switch is located on the
driver’s door control panel.
With the override switch you can disable
the rear side window switches in the rear
door panels.
Warning!
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children could otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the
window opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
1 Override switch
For more information on power windows,
see “Power windows” (컄 page 251).
97
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Disabling
왘
Press override switch 1 until it
engages.
The switch engages in the recessed
position.
The rear door windows can no longer
be operated using the switches located
in the rear doors.
i Operating the rear door windows using the
switches located on the door control panel of the
driver’s door is still possible.
Enabling
왘
Press override switch 1 once more.
The switch disengages from its recessed position back to its original position.
The rear door windows can again be
operated using the switches located in
the rear doors.
98
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
i USA only:
Activating
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
왘
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Deactivating
왘
왘
SmartKey
i Canada only:
or
1 Â button
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
왘
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Press button 1 again.
or
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
Press and hold button 1 for at least
1 second.
Insert SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 41).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
be in the vehicle.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
99
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
Warning!
G
ABS
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
Warning!
앫
앫
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
the ABS and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
앫
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)
The ABS, BAS, ESP® and 4-ETS cannot reduce this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
i In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, the EBP, and
the 4-ETS is only achieved with winter tires
(컄 page 405) or snow chains as required.
G
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do
not lock during braking. This allows you to
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 26) comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.
100
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Braking
Emergency brake maneuver
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
왘
왘
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and ability to steer
the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions
and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
Warning!
G
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS,
the ESP®, and the 4-ETS are also switched
off. The basic driving and braking functions
are still available.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing
steering capability and extending the braking distance.
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another
vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
For more information, see the “Practical
Hints” section (컄 page 420).
101
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing braking distance.
왘
Apply continuous full braking pressure
until the emergency braking situation is
over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
Warning!
G
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning, but without the additional brake boost available that BAS would
normally provide in an emergency braking
maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance
may increase.
102
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
ESP®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction
(force of adhesive friction between the
tires and the road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
and by limiting engine output, the ESP®
helps stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is
especially useful while driving off and on
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking
maneuvers.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster (컄 page 26) flashes when the
ESP® is engaged.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on when you switch on
the ignition. It goes out when the engine is
running.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case, proceed as
follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP® cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
Warning!
G
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
! Operational or performance test must only
be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If
such tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or
the transfer case which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when testing the brakes on a
brake test dynamometer and such testing should
be no longer than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i The ESP® will only function properly if you
use wheels of the recommended tire size
(컄 page 532).
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 425) and
(컄 page 441).
103
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Switching off the ESP®
Warning!
! Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
G
®
When you switch off the ESP®
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
앫
the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
앫
the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and
thus cut into surfaces for better grip
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
앫
the 4-ETS will still apply the brake to a
spinning wheel
앫
the ESP® continues to operate when
you are braking
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch
off the ESP® in driving situations where it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
앫
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore.
when driving with snow chains
앫
in deep snow
앫
in sand or gravel
104
The ESP® switch is located on the upper
part of the center console.
앫
you cannot activate the cruise control
or the Distronic* system
앫
the cruise control or the Distronic*
system switch off if currently activated
is switched off and one or
i When the
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.
However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the
vehicle.
ESP®
1 ESP® switch
왘
With the engine running, press ESP®
switch 1.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP® is deactivated.
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Warning!
G
When the ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period of time with the ESP® switched
off. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Switching on the ESP®
왘
Press ESP® switch 1.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP® switched on.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 420).
EBP
The EBP enhances braking effectiveness
by allowing the rear brakes to supply a
greater proportion of the braking effort
without a loss of vehicle stability.
Warning!
G
If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning. However, the rear
wheels may lock during hard braking, causing you to lose control over the vehicle and
possibly causing an accident. Adjust your
driving style to the non-operating status of
the EBP.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 422) and
(컄 page 453).
105
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
4-ETS
Warning!
The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
available traction, especially under slippery road conditions. The brakes are applied to the spinning wheel and power is
transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument cluster starts to flash at any vehicle
speed, as soon as a tire loses traction and
the wheel begins to spin.
G
When you see the ESP® warning lamp v
flashing in the instrument cluster, then proceed as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
! Operational or performance test must only
be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If
such tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or
the transfer case which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
106
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when testing the brakes on a
brake test dynamometer and such testing should
be no longer than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v
comes on while driving, the 4-ETS is being
switched off temporarily to prevent overheating
of the drive wheel brakes. In addition, the
message ABS, ESP unavailable See
Operator’s Manual appears in the
multifunction display.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 420) and
(컄 page 433).
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Deactivating
Anti-theft alarm system
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
With the SmartKey
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
왘
Activating
With the SmartKey
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 (컄 page 39).
앫
a door
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫
the tailgate
왘
앫
the hood
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
i Starting the engine will also deactivate the
immobilizer.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 41) once.
The engine is turned off.
왘
Open the driver’s door.
In case the engine cannot be started (yet the
vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not
operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key, see “Unlocking the vehicle”
(컄 page 478)
앫
a door is opened from the inside, see
“Opening the doors from the inside”
(컄 page 122)
107
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is
initiated automatically by the Tele Aid* system
(컄 page 330) provided that the Tele Aid* service
was subscribed to and properly activated, and
that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available.
왘
Make sure all doors and the tailgate are
closed.
왘
Lock the vehicle (컄 page 68).
The turn signal lamps flash three times
to indicate that the vehicle is locked.
The alarm system is armed within approximately 10 seconds. Alarm system
indicator lamp 1 flashes.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after you have
locked the vehicle with the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
The alarm system indicator lamp is located
to the lower left of the hazard warning
flasher.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, one of the following elements may not be
properly closed:
앫
a door
앫
the tailgate
Close the respective element and lock the
vehicle again.
1 Alarm system indicator lamp
108
Disarming the alarm system
왘
Unlock the vehicle (컄 page 38).
The turn signal lamps flash once to
indicate that the vehicle is disarmed.
Alarm system indicator lamp 1 goes
out.
i The alarm system will rearm automatically
again after approximately 40 seconds if neither a
door nor the tailgate is opened.
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm:
With the SmartKey
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
or
왘
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 41).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
109
110
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control*
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will
be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are
given at the beginning of each segment.
For more information on locking and unlocking, see the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 38) and (컄 page 68).
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each
SmartKey unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
112
앫
the doors
앫
the tailgate
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate
3 Locking tab for mechanical key
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 99)
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible
for children to open a locked door from the
inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
i USA only:
i You can also open and close the power win-
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
dows, the tilt/sliding sunroof*, or the tilt/sliding
panel* using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 254) and “Convenience
closing feature” (컄 page 256).
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Factory setting
Global unlocking
왘
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Press button Œ.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if
앫
neither door nor tailgate is opened
앫
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
앫
the central locking switch is not
activated
113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global locking
왘
Press button ‹.
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s door moves
up. The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
Global unlocking
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing button Πonly unlocks the
driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.
왘
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 112) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
114
Press button Πtwice.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
Global locking
왘
왘
Press button Πonce.
Selective setting
왘
Restoring to factory setting
Press button ‹.
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 112) flashes twice.
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey are
discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning, or
the vehicle battery is drained.
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey and
replace them if necessary (컄 page 483).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door (컄 page 478).
앫
Lock the vehicle as described in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 479).
앫
Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked (컄 page 506).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Checking the batteries
왘
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 112)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey batteries are in order.
i If battery check lamp 5 does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries are
discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 483).
You can obtain the required batteries at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the
vehicle accordingly.
Unlocking and opening the tailgate
(Vehicles with power tailgate*)
You can unlock and open the tailgate separately.
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Press and hold button Š on the
SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and
begins to open.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
! The tailgate swings open upwards automat-
왘
If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced.
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
왘
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey. The tailgate stops
moving.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center will be glad to supply you
with a replacement.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey, the tailgate will lock automatically when closed. The turn signals will flash
three times to confirm locking.
115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Warning!
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO,
each with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked when you grasp an outside door
handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
앫
the doors
앫
the tailgate
앫
the fuel filler flap
G
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate
3 Locking tab for mechanical key
4 ΠUnlock button
5 Battery check lamp
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 99)
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
116
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i Canada only:
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO*
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
앫
You can also use the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(컄 page 112).
앫
You can combine KEYLESS-GO functions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
locking with the ‹ button).
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i You can also open and close the power windows, the tilt/sliding sunroof*, or the tilt/sliding
panel* (컄 page 261) using the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO, see “Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 254) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 256).
앫
앫
앫
To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located outside the vehicle within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the respective door or the tailgate.
앫
In order to start the engine with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
Always carry the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
앫
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
must be located in the vehicle.
앫
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
must be inserted in the starter
switch (컄 page 41).
앫
The brake pedal must be firmly depressed. Do not depress the accelerator.
Never store the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO together with
앫
electronic items such as a cellular
phone or another SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO
앫
metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.
앫
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
positioned farther away from the vehicle, the system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
The vehicle then cannot be locked or
the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
앫
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
removed from the vehicle (e.g. if a
passenger exits the vehicle with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO)
앫
앫
when pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button or trying to lock
the vehicle with the lock button on
an outside door handle, the message Key not detected appears in
the multifunction display
with the engine running, the message Key not detected appears in
the multifunction display while
driving off
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediately (e.g. place it on the front passenger
seat or insert it in shirt pocket).
118
앫
If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 55), you can turn it off again
with
앫
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 67)
앫
the SmartKey inserted in the starter
switch when the automatic transmission is in position P
앫
Remember that the engine can be
started by anyone with a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
vehicle.
Possibility 1: (One SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle):
If you leave the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
locking the vehicle, no message
appears in the multifunction display.
Possibility 2: (One SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle):
When exiting and trying to lock the
vehicle, the message Key detected in
vehicle will appear in the multifunction
display. The vehicle will not be locked.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Factory setting
i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked
Selective setting
Global unlocking
if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the vehicle and
왘
앫
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the driver’s door handle only the driver’s door and
the fuel filler flap unlocks.
Grasp an outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
i If the vehicle has been parked for more than
72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle
in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of
unlocking if
앫
neither door nor tailgate is opened
앫
the central locking switch is not
activated
an outside door handle is splashed
with water
or
앫
you attempt to clean an outside door handle
왘
Global locking
왘
Press the lock button on an outside
door handle (컄 page 69).
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs on the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 116) flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
then function as follows:
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
Grasp the driver’s outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knob in the driver’s door moves
up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Global unlocking
Restoring to factory setting
Checking the batteries
왘
왘
왘
Grasp any outside door handle other
than the driver’s outside door handle.
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
Global locking
왘
Press the lock button on an outside
door handle (컄 page 69).
All turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
(컄 page 116) flashes twice.
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 116)
comes on briefly to indicate that the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries
are in order.
! If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, the
batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are
discharged, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is drained.
i If battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 116) does
not come on briefly during check, the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.
앫
Replace the batteries (컄 page 483).
Check the batteries in the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 120) and replace
them if necessary (컄 page 483).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock the
drivers’ door (컄 page 478).
앫
Lock the vehicle as described in the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 479).
앫
Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle battery connections checked (컄 page 506).
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
120
Press button ‹ or Œ.
You can obtain the required batteries at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the
vehicle accordingly.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Unlocking and opening the tailgate
(Vehicles with power tailgate*)
You can unlock and open the tailgate separately.
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate.
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
왘
왘
Pull on the handle.
Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
or
If you lose your SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you
should do the following:
Press and hold button Š on the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO until the
tailgate unlocks and opens.
! The tailgate swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
왘
Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
deactivated by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key
immediately to your car insurance
company.
왘
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey. The tailgate stops
moving.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the tailgate
will lock automatically when closed
(컄 page 125). The turn signals will flash three
times to confirm locking.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center will be glad to supply you
with a replacement.
121
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
Front doors
from the outside with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
왘
If the door was locked, locking knob 1
will move up.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
With the SmartKey
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
앫
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
Rear doors
왘
Pull up locking knob 1 on the respective rear door to unlock door.
왘
Pull on inside door handle 2 on the respective rear door to open door.
With KEYLESS-GO*
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
122
앫
Grasp an outside door handle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 41).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
Pull on inside door handle 2 on the
respective front door to open door.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the tailgate
왘
Pull on the handle.
The tailgate opens slightly.
Opening the tailgate from the outside
왘
Pull tailgate upwards to open.
A minimum height clearance of
7.2 ft (2.20 m) is required to open the
tailgate.
! The tailgate swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
The handle is located above the rear
license plate recess.
Vehicles with power tailgate*:
To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey. The tailgate stops
moving.
Opening the tailgate from the inside
manually
You can unlock the tailgate from the
third-row seats and then open it manually.
The handle is located on the right-hand
side of the tailgate’s window trim.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after
closing it (컄 page 125). The turn signals will
flash three times to confirm locking.
i The tailgate can also be opened using
the Š button on the SmartKey (컄 page 115)
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 121).
i Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*:
The vehicle must be unlocked (컄 page 39).
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
When opening the tailgate, the vehicle is globally
unlocked.
1 Handle
2 Push
3 Lift
왘
Push handle 1 in direction of arrow 2
and hold it there.
컄컄
123
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
컄컄왘
Lift handle 1 in direction of arrow 3.
The tailgate is released and can be
opened manually.
i If you do not open the tailgate within a few
seconds, the tailgate lock will automatically engage again. Additionally, the tailgate will relock
automatically, if the vehicle was locked when the
tailgate was released from the inside.
If the tailgate lock does not engage automatically
and, if applicable, the tailgate does not relock
after a few seconds, you have to close the
tailgate manually (컄 page 125).
Warning!
Opening the tailgate from the inside
electrically*
In vehicles with power tailgate* you can
open the tailgate from the inside if the
vehicle is stationary.
A minimum height clearance of
7.2 ft (2.20 m) is required to open the
tailgate.
The switch is located on the door control
panel.
G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as blocked
visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the
vehicle interior.
1 Remote tailgate switch with indicator
lamp
124
왘
Pull remote tailgate switch 1 until
tailgate begins to open.
The tailgate opens. The indicator lamp
in the remote tailgate switch comes on
and remains lit until the tailgate is
closed. While the tailgate is opening, an
acoustic signal sounds.
Warning!
G
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or
with the Š button on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Monitor the
opening procedure carefully to make sure
no one is in danger of being injured.
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate
switch or press the Š button on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
! The tailgate swings open upwards automat-
Closing the tailgate
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance. To stop the opening procedure,
press or pull remote tailgate switch 1 or press
the Š button on the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*. The tailgate stops moving.
Closing the tailgate from the inside
electrically*
i The tailgate can also be opened using
the Š button on the SmartKey (컄 page 115)
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 121).
Warning!
In vehicles with power tailgate* you can
close the tailgate from the inside using the
remote tailgate switch.
왘
Limiting opening height of tailgate*
Vehicles with power tailgate*:
The tailgate opening height can be limited
when transporting goods on a roof rack*
(e.g. presence of an MB sport luggage container*). When activated, the tailgate
opens to approximately 6.4 ft (1.95 m).
왘
Activate the limiting opening height of
tailgate using the control system
(컄 page 189).
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
the door mounted switch. Monitor the
closing procedure carefully to make sure no
one is in danger of being injured.
Press remote tailgate switch 1
(컄 page 124) until tailgate begins to
close.
To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
pull the door mounted remote tailgate
switch.
The tailgate closes. The indicator lamp
in the remote tailgate switch goes out.
While the tailgate is closing an acoustic
signal sounds.
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the remote tailgate switch can be operated.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
컄컄
To interrupt the closing procedure:
왘
G
Press or pull remote tailgate switch 1
(컄 page 124).
125
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
컄컄
Warning!
G
Closing the tailgate from the outside
manually
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as blocked
visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the
vehicle interior.
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high) the closing procedure
is stopped and the tailgate reopens.
1 Handle
왘
Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on
handle 1.
왘
Close tailgate with hands placed flat
on it.
Once the tailgate touches the latch,
the tailgate will pull itself shut automatically.
126
Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as blocked
visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the
vehicle interior.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do not
place the SmartKey in the cargo compartment.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a
possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will
open automatically if a SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle.
Closing the tailgate from the outside
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with power tailgate* you can
close the tailgate from the outside using
the tailgate closing switch or the
Š button on the SmartKey.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the tailgate reopens.
Warning!
i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, the tailgate
will lock automatically after closing it. The turn
signals flash three times to confirm locking.
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when
small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:
1 Tailgate closing switch
왘
Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly.
The tailgate closes and an acoustic
warning sounds.
앫
Press tailgate closing switch 1.
앫
Press the Š button on the SmartKey.
앫
Press or pull the remote tailgate switch
컄컄
(on the driver’s door).
i You can also close the tailgate manually
(컄 page 126).
127
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
컄컄
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch, the tailgate closing switch
can be operated. Therefore, do not leave
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning!
G
Closing the tailgate and locking the
vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*)
In vehicles with power tailgate* and
KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the tailgate
and lock the vehicle simultaneously from
the outside using the KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch or the Š button on
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as blocked
visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open cargo compartment. You may lock yourself out.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after
closing it. The turn signals will flash three times
to confirm locking.
128
1 Tailgate closing switch
2 KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch
Warning!
G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from
the cargo compartment opening when closing the tailgate. Be especially careful when
small children are around. To stop the closing procedure, do one of the following:
앫
Press tailgate closing switch 1.
앫
Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing
switch* 2.
앫
Press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 116).
앫
Press or pull the remote tailgate switch
on the driver’s door (컄 page 125).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle, the tailgate
closing switch can be operated. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
among other dangers such as blocked
visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.
Closing the tailgate
Closing and locking the tailgate
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you.
왘
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you.
왘
Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly.
왘
Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing
switch 2 briefly.
The tailgate closes and an acoustic
warning sounds.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the tailgate reopens.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after
closing it. The turn signals will flash three times
to confirm locking.
The tailgate closes automatically and
an acoustic warning sounds. Once the
tailgate is closed, the vehicle locks if
doors are closed. The turn signals flash
three times to confirm locking. The
locking knobs in the doors move down.
The anti-theft alarm system is armed.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high), the closing procedure
is stopped and the tailgate reopens.
i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout,
the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized inside the
vehicle.
129
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Automatic central locking
Locking and unlocking from the inside
The doors and the tailgate lock automatically when the ignition is switched on and
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
You can lock or unlock the doors and the
tailgate from inside using the central locking or unlocking switch. This can be useful,
for example, if you want to lock the vehicle
before starting to drive.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
i The doors unlock automatically after an
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore
lock yourself out when the vehicle
앫
is pushed or towed
앫
is on a test stand
For information on towing the vehicle, see
“Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 517).
You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system
(컄 page 189).
130
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
1 Central unlocking switch
2 Central locking switch
Locking
왘
Press central locking switch 2.
If all doors and the tailgate are closed,
the vehicle locks.
Unlocking
왘
Press central unlocking switch 1.
The vehicle unlocks.
The switches are located in the front-door
control panels.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, it will not unlock using the central
unlocking switch 1.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 2:
앫
While in the selective remote control mode,
only the front door opened from the inside is
unlocked.
앫
While in the global remote control mode, the
vehicle is unlocked completely when a front
door is opened from the inside.
i With the passenger-side door opened, you
cannot lock the vehicle with the central locking
switch.
131
Controls in detail
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see
the “Getting started” section (컄 page 44).
For more information on folding the seats,
see “Loading” (컄 page 297).
Easy-entry/exit feature
Easy-entry/exit feature for driver’s
seat*
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in
its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be
activated or deactivated in the Comfort
submenu of the control system
(컄 page 190).
132
Warning!
G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
the following:
앫
Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
(컄 page 47).
앫
Press one of the memory position
buttons or memory button M*
(컄 page 145).
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to the last set
position when you
앫
close the driver’s door with the ignition
switched on
or
앫
insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (컄 page 41) once
with the driver’s door closed
i The last set
steering wheel position is
stored when
앫
the ignition is switched off(컄 page 39)
앫
the position is stored into memory
(컄 page 145)
Controls in detail
Seats
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
앫
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or
앫
open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position
0 or 1 (컄 page 39) or the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
position 1 (컄 page 41)
i If the current position for the steering wheel
is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
wheel will no longer be able to move upward
when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted,
when the engine is started.
Warning!
G
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in motion. All steering wheel adjustments must be
completed before setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with the steering wheel still
adjusting could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Easy-entry feature for third-row seats
The releases for the easy-entry feature are
located on the entry side and the back of
each second-row seat.
Easy-entry/exit feature for third-row
seats
This feature allows for easier access to and
exit from the vehicle’s third-row seats.
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury, the second-row seat backrests must be properly
locked either in the upright position or,
when using the expanded cargo compartment, in the fully folded position while the
vehicle is in motion.
1 Easy-entry lever
왘
Pull and hold easy-entry lever 1 in direction of arrow at resistance point.
컄컄
The seat backrest folds forward.
133
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄왘
Push the seat forward as far as it will
go.
You should now have sufficient space
to access the vehicle’s third-row seat.
Easy-exit feature for third-row seats
The easy-exit strap is located on the rear of
the second-row seat base.
Easy-entry/exit position
왘
1 Easy-exit strap
Easy-entry/exit position
왘
Enter the vehicle.
왘
For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see “Folding
second-row seats” (컄 page 303).
The second-row seat backrest folds
forward.
왘
134
To exit the vehicle when seated on a
third-row seat, pull up and hold
easy-exit strap 1.
Push second-row seat forward a far as
it will go.
Exit the vehicle.
For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see “Folding
second-row seats” (컄 page 303).
Controls in detail
Seats
Returning second-row seats to their
original position
Warning
G
When occupants have entered or exited the
vehicle using the easy-entry/exit feature,
before driving off make sure
앫
the seats are properly locked
앫
the seat backrests are in an upright position and are properly locked
A second-row seat is properly locked only
when lock status indicator 1 is in hinged
position and red marking 2 is barely visible.
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
locked, the seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide under the seat belt during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide under
it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen
or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
Seat unlocked
Seat locked
1 Lock status indicator
2 Red marking
1 Lock status indicator
2 Red marking
When the seat is unlocked
When the seat is locked
앫
lock status indicator 1 is extended
앫
앫
red marking 2 is clearly visible
lock status indicator 1 is in hinged position
왘
When the seat is unlocked, push seat
backrest back until the seat audibly engages.
앫
red marking 2 is barely visible
135
Controls in detail
Seats
Lumbar support
Multicontour seat*
왘
The curvature of the driver’s seat can be
adjusted to help enhance lower back support and seating comfort.
The multicontour seat has an extendable
seat cushion and inflatable air chambers
built into the backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
Seat cushion depth
The lever for lumbar support adjustment is
located on the right hand side of the
driver’s seat backrest.
The seat cushion depth, seat backrest
cushion-height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the inside of each front seat base after the
ignition is switched on (컄 page 39).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg with
switch 1.
Backrest contour
왘
Adjust the contour of the seat backrest
to the desired position with switch
æ or ç.
왘
Move the seat backrest support to the
bottom with button 4 or to the center
with button 3.
Backrest side bolsters
왘
1 Adjustment lever
왘
Move adjustment lever 1 in direction
of arrows until you have reached a
comfortable seating position.
136
1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest side bolsters
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest bottom
Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support with
switch 2.
Controls in detail
Seats
Front seat active head restraints
Warning!
Rear seats
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
You cannot remove the active head
restraints on the driver’s and front passenger’s seat.
For removal of the active head restraints
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Warning!
Rear seat adjustment
G
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats. Regardless of seating position, children 12
years old and under must be seated and
properly secured in an appropriate infant or
toddler restraint, or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child.
For additional information, see “Children in
the vehicle” (컄 page 84).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat
belts provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and
belts are properly positioned on the body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 51).
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 83).
137
컄컄
Controls in detail
Seats
컄컄
After adjusting rear seats, make sure
앫
the seats are properly locked
앫
the seat backrests are in an upright position and are properly locked
Fore and aft adjustment
(second-row seats only)
The handles for adjusting the seats are
located on the front of each seat base.
Seat backrest tilt (second-row seats)
The handles for adjusting the seats are
located on the rear of each seat base.
A second-row seat is properly locked only
when lock status indicator 1 is in hinged
position and red marking 2 is barely visible
(컄 page 135).
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
locked, the seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide under the seat belt during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide under
it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen
or neck. That could cause serious or even
fatal injuries.
1 Adjustment handle
1 Adjustment handle
왘
Pull up handle 1 in direction of arrow
and hold it there.
왘
Move seat to the desired position.
왘
Release handle 1.
The seat must audibly engage.
138
왘
While seated, pull handle 1 in direction of arrow to resistance point and
hold it there.
Controls in detail
Seats
왘
To move seat backrest back, lean lightly against backrest.
왘
To move seat backrest forward, lean
forward with handle 1 pulled and held
at resistance point.
Seat backrest tilt (third-row seats)
The handles for adjusting the seats are
located on the outer side of each seat
backrest.
To move seat backrest forward, lean
forward with handle 1 pulled.
The seat backrest will move forward
against your back.
왘
The seat backrest will move forward
against your back.
왘
왘
Release handle 1 when the seat backrest has reached the desired position.
To make sure the seat backrest has engaged, lean firmly against the backrest.
Release handle 1 when the seat backrest has reached the desired position.
Head restraint height
To make sure the seat backrest has
engaged, lean firmly against the backrest.
Warning!
1 Adjustment handle
왘
왘
While seated, pull handle 1 in
direction of arrow and hold it there.
To move seat backrest back, lean
lightly against backrest.
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar
situation.
139
Controls in detail
Seats
i The third-row seat head restraints are adjusted in the same manner.
i The tilt of the second-row head restraints is
adjusted in the same manner as the front-seat
head restraints, see “Head restraint fore and aft
adjustment” (컄 page 46).
The tilt of the third-row head restraints cannot be
adjusted.
Head restraints
Second-row seat head restraint
1 Head restraint
2 Release button
Raising:
왘
Manually adjust the height of head
restraint 1 by pulling it upward to the
desired position.
Lowering:
왘
To lower head restraint 1, press
release button 2 and push down on
head restraint 1.
140
Warning!
G
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints installed when the rear seats
are occupied. Head restraints are intended
to help reduce injuries during an accident.
With a third-row seat occupied, make sure
to move the respective head restraint up
from the lowest non-use position and have
the occupant adjust the head restraint
properly.
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible and the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
i When removing or installing the head restraint of a second-row seat, adjust the seat to
the rear as far as possible (컄 page 138) and fold
the seat backrest (컄 page 133) forward.
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing head restraints
Installing head restraints
Armrests
왘
The second-row seat armrests can be
folded up, when loading for example, and
adjusted.
Insert head restraint 1 into openings
on the seat backrest.
i On the second-row seats, the guide bar with
the detent must be on the left.
Seat position for removal of head restraints
from second-row seats
1 Head restraint
2 Release button
왘
To remove head restraint 1, pull head
restraint 1 to its uppermost position.
왘
Press release button 2 and pull out
head restraint 1.
i The third-row seat head restraints are removed in the same manner.
Folding up
왘
Push head restraint 1 down until it
audibly engages.
왘
왘
Push release button 2 and adjust
head restraint 1 to the desired
position (컄 page 139).
Adjusting
Move the armrest into a vertical position until it engages.
왘
With the armrest folded up, disengage
the armrest by pushing it towards the
rear slightly.
왘
Fold the armrest down to the lowest
and then to the desired position until it
engages.
왘
To readjust the armrest to a higher
position, move armrest up to the
desired position until it engages.
i The third-row seat head restraints are
installed in the same manner.
i To readjust the armrest to a lower position,
you must first fold up the armrest again and repeat the steps above.
141
Controls in detail
Seats
Seat heating*
The red indicator lamps in the switch come
on to show which heating level you have
selected.
The switches for front-seat heating are located in the center console.
Level
3
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level)
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
1 Seat heating switch, second-row seats
2 Indicator lamps
2
Two indicator lamps on
The seat heating automatically
switches to level 1 after approximately 10 minutes.
1 Seat heating switch, front seats
2 Indicator lamps
1
The switches for the second-row seats are
located in the rear center console.
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level)
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately
20 minutes.
off
왘
142
No indicator lamp on.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching on
왘
Press switch 1.
Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
switch come on.
왘
Seat ventilation*
The switches for the seat ventilation are
located in the center console.
The blue indicator lamps in the switch
come on to show which ventilation level
you have selected.
Level
Continue pressing switch 1 until
desired seat heating level is reached.
Switching off
왘
Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
indicator lamps 2 go out.
3
Three indicator lamps on
(highest level)
2
Two indicator lamps on
1
One indicator lamp on
(lowest level)
off
No indicator lamp on
i If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 on
seat heating switch 1 (컄 page 142) are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many
electrical consumers being switched on. The
seat heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
1 Seat ventilation switch, front seats
2 Indicator lamps
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Switching on
왘
Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
desired ventilation level is set.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat is
automatically set to the highest level if activated
via summer opening feature (컄 page 254).
Switching off
왘
Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
indicator lamps 2 go out.
143
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver
should check and adjust the seat height,
seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate
control, reach and comfort. The head
restraint should also be adjusted for
proper height. See also the section on air
bags (컄 page 74) for proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
144
With the memory function you can store up
to three different settings for each front
seat.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position on the entry side of the
front passenger seat:
The following settings are saved for each
stored position on the entry side of the
driver’s seat:
앫
앫
Driver’s seat, head restraint height and
backrest position
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
position
앫
Passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror position
Front passenger seat, head restraint
height and backrest position
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Memory function*
The memory button and stored position
buttons are located on the entry side of
each front seat base.
M
Memory button
1, 2, 3
Stored positions
왘
Storing positions into memory
Recalling positions from memory
왘
Adjust the seats (컄 page 44).
왘
On the driver’s side, additionally adjust
the steering wheel (컄 page 46) and
exterior rear view mirrors (컄 page 48)
to the desired positions.
! Do not operate the power seats using memory button M if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause
damage to front or rear seats.
왘
Press memory button M.
왘
Release memory button M and press
stored position 1, 2 or 3 within
3 seconds.
All settings are stored to the selected
position.
Move seat backrest to an upright position first.
왘
Press and hold stored position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
have fully moved to the stored positions.
i Releasing the stored position button stops
movement to the stored positions immediately.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
or
왘
Open the respective door.
145
Controls in detail
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the
headlamps and use the turn signals, see
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 59)
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 60).
Exterior lamp switch
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive
on the other side of the road than the country in
which the vehicle is registered, you must have
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
i Vehicles with active Bi-Xenon* headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps monitor the
vehicle’s steering angle and speed, then automatically shift their beams to either side to
better follow the curvature of the road ahead, increasing usable illumination over conventional
headlamps.
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps*
† Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
M Off
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 148)
U Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 147)
C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
B Low beam headlamps or high beam
headlamps when the combination
switch is pushed forward. The tail
lamps, license plate lamps, side
146
marker lamps, parking lamps and
instrument panel lamps also come
on.
i If you hear a warning signal when exiting the
vehicle, you have forgotten to switch off the exterior lamps.
In addition the message Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the exterior lamps.
i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, the low beam headlamps cannot be switched off manually.
For information on how to activate the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Daytime running lamp
mode” (컄 page 148).
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and the parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light:
앫
Low beam headlamps
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
Warning!
G
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫
앫
the headlamps may switch off
unexpectedly when the system senses
bright ambient light, for example light
from oncoming traffic
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions
To minimize risk to you and to others,
activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
times.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button pressed once, only
the parking lamps and the side marker
lamps will switch on and off automatically.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
side marker lamps will switch on and
off automatically.
147
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode
i With the exterior lamp switch in
왘
position M or U, you cannot switch on the
high beam headlamps.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps are switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Tail and parking lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
i With the daytime running lamp mode activat-
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving, turn the exterior lamp
switch in position B to permit activation of
the high beam headlamps.
When the engine is running and you shift
from a driving position to position N or P,
the low beam headlamps will switch off
with a three-minute delay.
When the engine is running and you
앫
ed and the engine running, you cannot switch off
the low beam headlamps manually.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
앫
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C, the parking lamps and
the side marker lamps switch on
additionally
turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B, the manual headlamp
mode has priority over the daytime
running lamp mode
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 59).
148
USA only
By default, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated. Activate the daytime
running lamp mode using the control
system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)” (컄 page 183).
i With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position M,
you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps.
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving, turn the exterior lamp
switch in position B or U to permit
activation of the high beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you turn
the exterior lamp switch to position C
or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps switch
on (컄 page 146).
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security
illumination
The locator lighting and the night security
illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see “Setting locator lighting” (컄 page 184) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 185).
Fog lamps
Warning!
Front fog lamps*
G
왘
Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 59).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.
The front fog lamps switch on.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 146).
i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position U. To switch
on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
position B first.
왘
Push in the exterior lamp switch.
The front fog lamps switch off.
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
149
Controls in detail
Lighting
Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
왘
Switch on the low beam headlamps
(컄 page 59).
왘
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
second stop.
Combination switch
왘
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch comes on
(컄 page 146).
switch on.
왘
High beam
The rear fog lamp switches off.
왘
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
or
The front fog lamps* remain lit.
왘
Canada only: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B (컄 page 146).
USA only: Turn the exterior lamp switch
to position B or U
(컄 page 146).
Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to
switch off the high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
goes out.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
150
Push the combination switch in
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam.
The high beam headlamp indicator
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 26).
The rear fog lamp switches on.
i If so equipped, the front fog lamps* will also
왘
High beam flasher
왘
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
improve illumination of the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
operate with the engine running and with
앫
the exterior lamp switch in
position B (컄 page 146)
i If you are driving faster than
i If you have switched on the turn signal for
25 mph (40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps
switched on, the corner-illuminating function is
not available.
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
opposite direction, the corner-illuminating front
fog lamp comes on for the side indicated by the
turn signal.
Driving forward
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp remains lit
for a maximum of three minutes. Afterwards, it
goes out even if the turn signal is still switched
on.
왘
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps tem-
or
앫
the exterior lamp switch in
position U (컄 page 146)
The respective front fog lamp comes on
and illuminates the area in the
direction into which you are turning.
or
앫
the daytime running lamp mode
activated (컄 page 148)
i With the automatic headlamp mode
activated, the corner-illuminating front fog lamps
will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
Switch on the left or right turn signal
(컄 page 60), depending on whether
you are turning left or right.
or
왘
Turn steering wheel in desired direction.
porarily come on both sides of the vehicle if you
turn the steering wheel in one direction and then
again in the other direction shortly thereafter.
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the steering angle, even if you did not switch on either
turn signal. If the corner-illuminating front fog
lamps came on automatically, they will also go
out automatically depending on the steering
angle.
The front fog lamp on the side of your
steering direction comes on.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
function is not available at a vehicle speed
above 25 mph (40 km/h).
151
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The combination switch for the turn signal
resets automatically after major steering
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
were activated by switching on the left or
right turn signal.
If the turn signal should stay on after
making the turn, the turn signal and
corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be
switched off by returning the combination
switch to its original position.
i There may be a brief delay before the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
Driving rearward
Hazard warning flasher
Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
The hazard warning flasher can be
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle.
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to
reverse gear R (컄 page 199).
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
opposite to your steering direction
comes on.
Switching off corner-illuminating front
fog lamps
왘
The hazard warning flasher switches on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is
located on the upper part of the center
console.
Shift the automatic transmission
to a gear other than reverse
gear R (컄 page 197).
The respective front fog lamp goes out.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
152
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on hazard warning flasher
왘
Interior lighting
Press hazard warning flasher
switch 1.
! An interior lamp switched on manually does
not go out automatically.
All turn signals are flashing.
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON
position for extended periods of time with the
engine turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either left or
right turn, only the respective left or right turn
signals will operate when the ignition is
switched on.
Deactivating automatic control
i The interior lighting is factory-set to
Switching off hazard warning flasher
왘
automatic mode.
Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
왘
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard warning
flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.
The controls are located in the overhead
control panel.
1 Front left reading lamp, on/off
2 Rear interior lighting, on/off
3 Automatic interior lighting
4 Front interior lighting, on/off
5 Front right reading lamp, on/off
6 Front right interior lamp
7 Reading lamps
8 Front left interior lamp
Press switch 3.
The interior lighting and the locator
lighting (컄 page 184) remain switched
off even when you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
앫
open the tailgate
153
Controls in detail
Lighting
Activating automatic control
왘
Press switch 3.
The interior lighting and the locator
lighting (컄 page 184) come on when
you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
앫
open a door
앫
open the tailgate
The interior lighting switches off after
10 seconds see “Setting interior lighting
delayed shut-off” (컄 page 186).
i If a door remains open, the interior lighting
Manual control
Switching front/rear interior lighting on
and off
왘
Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 4 or 2 (컄 page 153) to switch
on the desired interior light.
왘
Press front/rear interior lighting
switch 4 or 2 again to switch off the
respective interior light.
The second row reading lamps are located
above the side windows.
Switching front reading lamps on and off
The front reading lamps are located in the
lower edge of the interior rear view mirror.
1 Second-row reading lamp
왘
왘
switches off automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
왘
154
Switching second-row reading lamps on
and off
Press front reading lamp
switch 1 or 5 (컄 page 153) to
switch on the desired front reading
lamp.
Press front reading lamp
switch 1 or 5 again to switch off the
respective front reading lamp.
Press on reading lamp 1 in direction
of arrow.
The reading lamp comes on.
왘
Press on reading lamp 1 in direction
of arrow once more.
The reading lamp goes out.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching third-row reading lamps* on
and off
The switches for the third-row reading
lamps are located in the rear overhead
control panel.
왘
왘
Press rear reading lamp
switch 1 or 2 to switch on the
respective rear reading lamp.
Press rear reading lamp
switch 1 or 2 again to switch off the
respective rear reading lamp.
i The rear interior lighting is switched on and
off using the switch on the front overhead control panel (컄 page 153).
Door entry lamps
For better orientation in the dark, the
corresponding door entry lamps will switch
on in darkness when you open a door and
the automatic control is activated.
The door entry lamps will switch off when
the corresponding door is closed.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the
headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit
for approximately 5 minutes.
Cargo compartment lamp
1 Rear right reading lamp, on/off
2 Rear left reading lamp, on/off
3 Rear left reading lamp
4 Rear interior lamp
5 Rear right reading lamp
The cargo compartment lamp comes on
when the tailgate is opened.
If you leave the tailgate open for an
extended period of time, the cargo
compartment lamp will switch off
automatically after approximately
10 minutes.
155
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
(컄 page 26).
The instrument cluster is activated when
you
앫
open a door
앫
switch on the ignition (컄 page 39)
앫
press reset button 2
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
(컄 page 146)
You can change the instrument cluster
settings in the instrument cluster submenu
of the control system (컄 page 179).
1 To dim instrument cluster illumination
2 Reset button
3 To brighten instrument cluster
illumination
156
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with
added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination
Use button 1 or 3 to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.
Resetting the trip odometer
Tachometer
Make sure you are viewing the trip odometer display (컄 page 159).
The red marking on the tachometer
(컄 page 26) denotes excessive engine
speed.
왘
i The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will also be
adjusted automatically when you switch on the
vehicle’s exterior lamps.
To brighten illumination
왘
왘
If it is not displayed, press button è
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel (컄 page 160) repeatedly until
the trip odometer appears in the multifunction display.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Press and hold reset button 2
(컄 page 156) until the trip odometer is
reset.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
Press and hold button 3 until the
desired level of illumination is reached.
To dim illumination
왘
Press and hold button 1 until the
desired level of illumination is reached.
157
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is indicated in the
multifunction display (컄 page 159).
158
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder
ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving
your garage), you will notice a delay before
the lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate
temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1 (컄 page 40) or as
soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button* is in position 1 (컄 page 41). The
control system enables you to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control
system to find out when your vehicle is
next due for maintenance service, to set
the language for messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.
i The displays for the audio systems (radio,
CD player) will appear in English, regardless of
the language selected.
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions
permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just
30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your
vehicle is covering a distance of
44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
3 Transmission position indicator
4 Current transmission program mode
5 Status indicator (outside temperature
or digital speedometer)
For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 162).
159
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 Multifunction display
5 Menu systems:
Press button
Operating the control system
è for next menu
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume:
Press button
ÿ for previous menu
6 Voice Control*1
æ up/to increase
ç down/to decrease
3 Telephone*:
Press button
s to take a call
to dial
to redial
t to end a call
to reject an incoming call
4 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display
160
7 Voice Control*1
1
Vehicles without Voice Control*: Button without
function.
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or
CD operations under AUDIO, for example).
These functions serve to call up relevant
information or to customize the settings
for your vehicle.
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions, you will find a number of submenus
for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see
“Settings menu” (컄 page 176).
The menus are described on the following
pages.
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
161
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
162
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus 1 to 5.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Commands/submenus
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Menu 5
Audio
Navi*
Airmatic*/Compass
(컄 page 171)
(컄 page 173)
(컄 page 174)
Trip- and main odometer Engine oil temperature
Selecting radio station
Route guidance
instructions, current
direction traveled
AIRMATIC*
Checking tire inflation
pressure
Vehicle supply voltage
Selecting satellite radio
station* (USA only)
Checking coolant
temperature
RACETIMER
Operating CD player
1
Standard display
AMG
(컄 page 166)
(컄 page 168)
Compass
Calling up digital
Overall analysis
speedometer or outside
temperature
Calling up maintenance Lap analysis
service indicator
Checking engine oil level
1
AMG vehicles only.
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to those
shown in the control system displays.
The first function displayed in each menu will
show you which part of the system you are in.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus 6 to b.
164
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Commands/submenus
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 6
Menu 7
DISTRONIC*
(컄 page 271)
Menu 8
Menu 9
Menu a
Menu b
Vehicle status
Settings
message memory
Distance warning
function*
Trip computer
Telephone*
(컄 page 174)
(컄 page 191)
(컄 page 191)
(컄 page 193)
(컄 page 176)
Status and settings Calling up
Resetting to factory Distance warning
malfunction messettings
function* on/off
sages, warning messages, and system
status messages
stored in memory
Fuel consumption Loading phone book
statistics after start
Instrument cluster
submenu
Fuel consumption
statistics since the
last reset
Time/Date
submenu
Distance to empty
Searching for name
in phone book
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Comfort submenu*
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those
shown in the control system displays. The first
function displayed in each menu will show you
which part of the system you are in.
165
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu
The following functions are available:
In the standard display, the main odometer
and the trip odometer appear in the multifunction display.
Function
Page
Checking tire inflation pressure
382
Checking coolant temperature
166
Checking coolant temperature
Warning!
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Calling up digital speedometer or 167
outside temperature
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
왘
If you see another display, press
button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the standard display appears.
왘
Press button k or j to select
the functions in the standard display
menu.
166
Calling up maintenance service
indicator
409
Checking engine oil level
(R 500 only)
366
G
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the coolant temperature appears
in the multifunction display.
Calling up digital speedometer or
outside temperature
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the digital speedometer or the
outside temperature appears in the
multifunction display.
i You can select whether the digital speedometer or the outside temperature is to be
displayed.
You can change the setting in the submenu
Instr. cluster via the function Status line
display, see “Selecting display (digital speedometer or outside temperature) for status
indicator” (컄 page 180).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers
a warning message in the multifunction
display (컄 page 455).
The engine should not be operated with a
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Digital speedometer
i During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature
may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Outside temperature
167
Controls in detail
Control system
AMG menu
i This function is only available in AMG
vehicles.
The main screen of the AMG menu shows
you the gear currently engaged as well as
the engine oil temperature.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
Use buttons k or j to select the following functions in the AMG menu:
Function
Page
Vehicle supply voltage
168
RACETIMER
169
Overall analysis
170
Lap analysis
171
Vehicle supply voltage
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the vehicle supply voltage.
i If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program (컄 page 209), the
menu will be shown in red. In addition, you will
see UP next to gear indicator 1 as a reminder to
upshift.
1 Gear indicator
2 Engine oil temperature
i The engine oil temperature symbol
flashes if the engine oil temperature has not yet
reached 80°C. During this time, avoid driving at
full engine speed.
168
1 Gear indicator
2 Vehicle supply voltage
Controls in detail
Control system
RACETIMER
Warning!
G
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the RACETIMER.
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads
is prohibited under any circumstances and
the driver is and must always remain responsible for following posted speed limits.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and
save driving stretches in hours, minutes
and seconds.
Starting the RACETIMER
왘
Press button æ.
The timer starts.
Displaying intermediate time
왘
Press button ç while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time is shown for
5 seconds.
1 Gear indicator
2 RACETIMER
3 Lap number
i You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (컄 page 39).
i While the RACETIMER is being displayed,
you cannot adjust the audio volume using
buttons æ or ç.
Stopping the RACETIMER
왘
Press button æ.
The timer stops.
i When you stop the vehicle and turn the
SmartKey to position 1 (컄 page 39) or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and
do not open the driver’s door, the RACETIMER
stops timing. Timing is resumed when you
switch the ignition back on (컄 page 39) or
restart the engine (컄 page 54) and then press
the æ button.
169
Controls in detail
Control system
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
Resetting current lap
Overall analysis
i You can save up to nine laps.
왘
i These functions are only available if you
왘
Press button ç while the timer is
running.
The intermediate time will be shown for
5 seconds.
왘
Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘
Press button ç.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
Press button ç within 5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be
saved as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as
soon as the intermediate time is called
up.
Deleting all laps
170
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
왘
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the overall analysis.
i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
왘
Press button æ while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
왘
Press the reset button twice
(컄 page 26).
왘
Press button æ.
The timer starts. The saved laps are deleted.
1 Gear indicator
2 RACETIMER
3 Best lap time
4 Lap number
have saved at least one lap and have stopped
the RACETIMER.
i When you turn off the engine, the
RACETIMER will be reset to“0” after 30 seconds.
All laps are deleted.
1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
2 Overall driving time
3 Maximum speed
4 Overall distance driven
5 Average speed
Controls in detail
Control system
Lap analysis
i These functions are only available if you
have saved at least two laps and have stopped
the RACETIMER.
왘
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the AMG menu.
Press button j repeatedly until you
see the lap analysis.
Selecting radio station
AUDIO menu
The functions in the Audio menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message Audio off appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Turn on the COMAND system and
select radio. Refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the currently tuned station
appears in the multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Selecting radio station
171
Selecting satellite radio station* 172
(USA only)
1 Lap number
2 Lap time
3 Maximum speed
4 Lap length
5 Average speed during lap
왘
Operating CD player
172
1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
컄컄
Press button j or k to see other
lap analyses.
i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.
171
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
The station search depends on the
selected setting in the Vehicle
submenu of the control system
(컄 page 188).
Pressing button k or j will
either start a frequency scan or select
the next stored radio station.
i You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions. You can also operate the radio in
the usual manner.
Selecting satellite radio station*
(USA only)
The satellite radio is treated as a radio
application.
왘
Select satellite radio with the
corresponding soft key on the
COMAND system.
Operating the CD player
Selecting CD track
1 SAT mode
2 Channel name or number
왘
왘
Turn on the COMAND system and
select CD. Refer to separate COMAND
system operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played appear in the multifunction display.
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired channel is found.
i Additional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to satellite radio service
provider are required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for details and availability for
your vehicle.
For more information, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
1 Current CD (for CD changer*)
2 Current track
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i Vehicles with CD changer*: To select a CD
from the magazine, press a number on the
COMAND system key pad located in the center
console.
172
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting MP3-CD track
왘
Turn on the COMAND system and
select MP3. Refer to separate COMAND system operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the MP3-CD currently being played appear in the multifunction display.
1 MP3 mode
2 Current track
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
Navi* menu
The Nav menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the message Navi appears in the
multifunction display.
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the navigation system:
앫
With the COMAND system switched
off, the message Navi off appears in
the multifunction display.
앫
With the COMAND system switched on
but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the
name of the street currently traveled
on appear in the multifunction display.
앫
With the COMAND system switched on
and route guidance activated, the
direction of travel and maneuver instructions appear in the multifunction
display.
Please refer to the COMAND system
manual for instructions on how to activate
the route guidance system.
173
Controls in detail
Control system
AIRMATIC*/Compass menu
Distronic* menu
Vehicle status message memory menu
The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the
AIRMATIC* messages and the direction
into which you are currently driving.
Use the DISTRONIC menu (컄 page 276) to
display the current settings for your
Distronic system. The information shown
in the multifunction display depends on
whether the Distronic system is activated
or deactivated.
Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the
system. Such messages appear in the
multifunction display and are based on
conditions or system status the vehicle’s
system has recorded.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AIRMATIC/Compass menu
appears in the multifunction display.
Please refer to the “Driving systems”
section of this manual (컄 page 271) for
instructions on how to activate Distronic.
왘
For information on AIRMATIC*, see
“AIRMATIC*” (컄 page 285).
For information on the compass, see
“Vehicle submenu” (컄 page 186) and
“Compass” (컄 page 342).
174
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
to select the Distronic menu in the
multifunction display.
The vehicle status message memory menu
only appears, if messages have been
stored.
Controls in detail
Control system
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (컄 page 433).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the vehicle status message
memory appears in the multifunction
display.
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction
display:
Should the vehicle’s system record any
conditions while driving, the number of
messages will reappear in the multifunction display
앫
when the SmartKey in the starter
switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch
or
앫
왘
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be
displayed in the order in which they
have occurred. For malfunctions and
warning messages, see “Vehicle status
messages in the multifunction display”
(컄 page 433).
i After you have scrolled through all recorded
status messages, the first recorded message
appears again.
when you turn off the engine by
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 67) in the starter
switch once and open the driver’s door
(this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch)
i The vehicle status message memory will
be cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 1 or 2, or when you
press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once
or twice without depressing the brake pedal. You
will then only see high priority messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 433).
175
Controls in detail
Control system
Settings menu
In the Settings menu there are two
functions:
앫
앫
왘
The function Reset to factory
settings?, with which you can reset all
the settings to the original factory
settings.
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display.
The following settings and submenus are
available in the Settings menu:
Resetting all settings
Function
Page
You can reset the functions of all
submenus to the factory settings.
Resetting all settings
176
왘
Submenus in the Settings menu 177
Instrument cluster submenu
179
Time/date submenu
181
Lighting submenu
183
Vehicle submenu
186
Comfort submenu*
189
Press the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 156) for
approximately 3 seconds.
The request to press the reset button
once more to confirm appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press the reset button once more.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
176
Controls in detail
Control system
i The settings you have changed will not be
Submenus in the Settings menu
reset unless you confirm the action by pressing
the reset button a second time.
왘
Press button j.
The collection of the submenus
appears in the multifunction display.
After approximately 5 seconds, the Settings
menu reappears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 176).
i For safety reasons, the function
Light circuit headlamp in the Lighting
submenu cannot be reset while driving.
The following message appears in the multifunction display:
Settings
Cannot be
completely reset
to factory settings
while driving
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use the j button to access
the individual functions within that submenu. Once within that submenu, you can
use the j button to move to the next
function or the k button to move to the
previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
왘
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
with button æ.
177
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following
pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
TIME/DATE
LIGHTING
VEHICLE
COMFORT*
(컄 page 179)
(컄 page 181)
(컄 page 183)
(컄 page 186)
(컄 page 189)
Selecting speedometer display
mode
Setting the time
(hour)
Setting daytime running Calling up the compass Activating
lamp mode (USA only)
easy-entry/exit feature*
Selecting language
Setting the time
(minutes)
Setting locator lighting
Compass adjustment
Setting night security
illumination
Compass calibration
Selecting display (digital
Setting the date
speedometer or outside
(month)
temperature) for status indicator
Setting the date
(day)
Setting the date
(year)
Setting interior lighting Audio search function
delayed shut-off
Setting automatic
locking
Limiting opening height
of tailgate*
178
Setting fold-in function
for exterior rear view
mirrors*
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting speedometer display mode
Selecting language
Access the Instr. cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Instr.
cluster submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Display unit
Digital speedometer appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Language appears in
the multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Selecting speedometer display
mode
179
Selecting language
179
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Selecting display (digital
180
speedometer or outside
temperature) for status indicator
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to set
speedometer unit to km or miles.
Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the
multifunction display messages.
179
Controls in detail
Control system
Available languages:
앫
German
앫
English
앫
French
앫
Italian
앫
Spanish
앫
Dutch
앫
Danish
앫
Swedish
앫
Portuguese
앫
Turkish
앫
Russian (Canada only)
180
Selecting display (digital speedometer
or outside temperature) for status
indicator
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Instr.
cluster submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Status line
display appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
the desired setting.
The selected display is then shown
continuously in the status indicator
(lower display).
The other display now appears in the
menu of the standard display
(컄 page 167):
앫
Digital speedometer
or
앫
Outside temperature
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu
Setting the time (hour)
Setting the time (minutes)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
submenu to change the time and date
settings.
This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module*.
This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module*.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Clock Set hour
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message
Clock Set minute(s) appears in the
multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting the time (hours)
181
Setting the time (minutes)
181
Setting the date (month)
182
Setting the date (day)
182
Setting the date (year)
182
The selection marker is on the hour
setting.
The selection marker is on the minute
setting.
i If your vehicle is equipped with the
COMAND system and navigation module*, see
separate COMAND operating instructions for
information on how to set the date and time.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
hour.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.
181
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the date (month)
Setting the date (day)
Setting the date (year)
This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module*.
This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module*.
This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module*.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Date Set month
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Date Set day
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Date Set year
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the month
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
month.
182
The selection marker is on the day
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
day.
The selection marker is on the year
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to set the
year.
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
Access the Lighting submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lighting
submenu to change the lamp and lighting
settings on your vehicle.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Setting daytime running lamp
mode (USA only)
183
Setting locator lighting
184
Setting night security
illumination
185
Setting interior lighting delayed 186
shut-off
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
i This function is not available in countries
where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Lamp circuit
headlamp appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to select
manual operation (Manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (Constant).
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
183
Controls in detail
Control system
In low ambient light conditions the
following lamps will switch on additionally:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
For more information on the daytime
running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
(컄 page 146).
i For safety reasons, changing the setting for
the daytime running lamp mode is not possible
while the vehicle is in motion. The following
message appears in the multifunction display:
Settings
only possible
at standstill
For safety reasons, resetting to factory settings
(컄 page 176) while driving will not deactivate the
daytime running lamp mode.
184
Setting locator lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated,
the exterior lamp switch in position U
(컄 page 147) and the interior lighting in
automatic mode (컄 page 153), the
following lamps will switch on during darkness when the vehicle is unlocked using
button Πon the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps*
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
will switch off automatically after approximately 40 seconds.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Function Surround
lighting appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the locator lighting function On or Off.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is
activated.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting
the vehicle and closing all doors.
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Headlamp delayed
shut-off appears in the multifunction
display.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off
feature activated and the exterior lamp
switch in position U before the engine
is turned off, the following lamps will
switch on when the engine is turned off:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
앫
License plate lamps
앫
Side marker lamps
앫
Front fog lamps*
If after turning off the engine you do not
open a door or do not close an opened
door, the lamps will automatically switch
off after 60 seconds.
You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
왘
Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
왘
Then turn it to position 2 and back to
position 0.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The headlamps delayed shut-off
feature is deactivated. It will reactivate
as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
On or Off.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the
engine.
Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button (컄 page 41).
The headlamps delayed shut-off
feature is activated.
185
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Vehicle submenu
Compass adjustment
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system with
navigation module*.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Lighting
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Int. light.
delayed shut-off appears in the
multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
to make general vehicle settings.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Compass adjustment
186
Compass calibration
187
Audio search function
188
Setting automatic locking
189
Limiting opening height of
tailgate*
189
Determine your location on the basis of the
following zone maps.
Zone map North America
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the interior lighting delayed shut-off
feature On or Off.
186
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Compass setting
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Compass calibration
i Make sure you are in an area where you can
drive a full circle with your vehicle without disturbing traffic in order to calibrate your compass.
This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system with
navigation module*.
In order to calibrate the compass properly,
mind the following:
왘
Zone map South America
왘
Press button æ or ç to move
the selection marker to the Vehicle
submenu.
앫
Calibrate the compass in open terrain.
Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines
and large antenna masts, for example,
could impair compass calibration.
앫
Switch off electrical consumers (e.g.
climate control, windshield wipers, or
rear window defroster).
앫
Close all doors and the tailgate.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 54).
왘
Press button æ or ç to move
the selection marker to the Vehicle
submenu.
Press button æ or ç to set the
respective compass zone.
For information on how to call up the
compass, see “Compass” (컄 page 342).
187
컄컄
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Compass Calibration appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on setting
switched off.
왘
Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed
of between 3 mph and 6 mph
(5 km/h and 10 km/h).
When calibration was successful, the
following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Compass calibration
Completed successfully
Audio search function
Use of the Audio search function to
select a radio station (컄 page 171) will
enable you to start a frequency scan
(Freq.) or select a radio station stored in
memory (Memory).
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Audio Search
function appears in the multifunction
display.
i If the message Compass
calibration
Completed successfully does not appear in
the multifunction display, drive another full
circle.
왘
Press button æ to set the selection
marker to Start.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Compass Calibration active
Please drive in a full circle
If calibration does not succeed within 3 minutes,
the message Compass Calibration appears
in the multifunction display again. Calibrating the
compass has failed due to outside influences.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Repeat compass calibration in a different
location.
왘
188
Press button æ or ç to select
Freq. or Memory.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting automatic locking
Limiting opening height of tailgate*
Comfort submenu*
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the
automatic central locking system
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked
at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h).
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the limiting opening height of the tailgate.
Access the Comfort submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Comfort submenu
왘
to change the settings for a number of convenience features.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Automatic door
lock appears in the multifunction
display.
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Opening limiter
Tailgate appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The following functions are available:
Function
Page
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature*
190
Setting fold-in function for
exterior rear view mirrors*
190
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the limiting opening height of the
tailgate On or Off.
Press button æ or ç to switch
the automatic central locking On or Off.
189
Controls in detail
Control system
Activating easy-entry/exit feature*
왘
Use this function to activate and
deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
(컄 page 132).
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Comfort
submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Easy-entry feature
appears in the multifunction display.
Warning!
G
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
the following:
앫
앫
Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
(컄 page 47).
Press one of the memory position
buttons or memory button M*
(컄 page 145).
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
190
Setting fold-in function for exterior rear
view mirrors*
Using this function, you can set the
exterior rear view mirrors to be automatically folded in when you lock your vehicle.
i With this function set to On and the exterior
rear view mirrors folded in using the button on
the door control panel (컄 page 214), the exterior
rear view mirrors will not fold out when you
switch on the ignition. You will then have to fold
out the exterior rear view mirrors using the
button on the door control panel (컄 page 214).
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
folded out completely before driving off.
왘
Press button æ or ç to switch
the easy-entry/exit feature On or Off.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Comfort
submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Fold in mirrors
when locking appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Distance warning function*
Trip computer menu
In vehicles equipped with Distronic*, you
can determine whether the distance warning function* is to be enabled or disabled.
With this function set to On, the system will
alert you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle moving in your
vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision
exists, even when the Distronic* is
switched off.
Use the trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle.
왘
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the message Distance warning
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press button æ or ç to switch
the function On or Off.
왘
The following information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics
from start
192
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
192
Distance to empty
193
i When you enter the trip computer menu, you
will always see the fuel consumption statistics
from start first.
Press button æ or ç to switch
the distance warning function On or
Off.
191
Controls in detail
Control system
Fuel consumption statistics from start
i All statistics stored since the last engine
왘
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message From start appears
in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message From start appears
in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message After reset appears
in the multifunction display.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
1 Distance driven since start
2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message From start appears
in the multifunction display.
왘
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 156) until
the value is reset to 0.
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Time elapsed since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
192
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
manually
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message After reset appears
in the multifunction display.
왘
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 156) until
the value is reset to 0.
i The fuel consumption statistics reset automatically to 0 when either of the following values
is exceeded:
앫
distance covered:100000 miles
앫
time elapsed: 10000 hours
Distance to empty
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message From start appears
in the multifunction display.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Range: appears in
the multifunction display.
The calculated remaining driving range
based on the current fuel tank level
appears in the multifunction display.
TEL menu*
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic
conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a
vehicle.
193
컄컄
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and COMAND
system.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the message Tel appears in
the multifunction display.
194
Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your
telephone is switched on or off:
앫
If the telephone is off, the message
Phone off appears in the multifunction
display.
앫
If the telephone is on:
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the multifunction display you will then see
the message:
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the multifunction display is empty.
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, the message Ready appears in
the multifunction display.
왘
Press button s.
You have answered the call. The
duration of the call appears in the
multifunction display.
i If you do not wish to accept a call, press
button t.
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can
operate it using the control system.
Controls in detail
Control system
Ending a call
왘
Press button t.
You have ended the call. The standby
message appears in the multifunction
display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
The stored names are displayed in
ascending or descending alphabetical
order.
왘
Press button s.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫
If the connection is successful and
this feature is supported by your
network provider, the name of the
party you are calling (if stored in
your phone book) and the duration
of the call will appear in the multifunction display.
앫
If no connection is made, the
control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message Tel appears in the
multifunction display.
Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take several minutes. The
message Please wait appears in the
multifunction display.
1 Name from the phone book
i If you press and hold j or k for
longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly
through the list of names until you release the
button again.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing
button t.
When the message Please wait
disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
195
Controls in detail
Control system
Redialing
The control system stores the most
recently dialed phone numbers. This
eliminates the need to search through your
entire phone book.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until the message Tel appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button s.
The first number in the redial memory
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
multifunction display.
왘
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
196
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
For information on driving with an
automatic transmission see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 54).
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current
operating and driving conditions.
If the operating conditions change, the
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic
converter (gasoline engine) or the oxidation
catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up more quickly
to operating temperature.
Warning!
G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
Gear selector lever
The gear selector lever is located on the
right of the steering column.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
injury.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
197
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
i The current transmission position P, R, N
Shifting from P to N
Shifting from N to R or from N to D
or D appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 201).
Moving the gear selector lever up or down
shifts the automatic transmission out of
park position P:
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
Move gear selector lever up past the
resistance point to select reverse
gear R.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
198
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
Move gear selector lever up or down to
resistance point to select neutral
position N.
or
왘
i The gear selector lever returns to its original
position.
Move gear selector down past the
resistance point to select drive
position D.
i The gear selector lever returns to its original
position.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Shifting from P to R
Shifting from P to D
Shifting from D, R, or N to P
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
Move gear selector lever up past the
resistance point to select reverse
gear R.
왘
Move gear selector lever down past the
resistance point to select drive
position D.
If you want to select park position P with
the transmission being in drive position D,
reverse gear R or neutral position N:
i The gear selector lever returns to its original
position.
i The gear selector lever returns to its original
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
Step firmly on parking brake pedal
(컄 page 66).
왘
Press button on gear selector lever in
direction of arrow (컄 page 197) to
select park position P.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
position.
! Shift the automatic transmission directly
from drive position D to reverse gear R, from
reverse gear R to drive position D or directly to
park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.
Otherwise the automatic transmission could be
damaged.
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle” (컄 page 204).
199
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Shifting from D or R to N
Shifting procedure
If you want to select neutral position N
with the transmission being in drive
position D or reverse gear R:
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:
왘
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
왘
Step firmly on parking brake pedal
(컄 page 66).
앫
앫
drive position D (컄 page 201) with
gear ranges (컄 page 205)
the selected program mode:
(C/S) (컄 page 206)
i When the vehicle needs to be moved with
or
the engine switched off and the transmission set
to neutral position N (컄 page 201), e.g. in an
automatic car wash, do not depress the parking
brake pedal.
(M/C/S) (R 63 AMG only)
(컄 page 209)
왘
왘
Move gear selector lever up to resistance point when in drive position D or
down to resistance point when in
reverse gear R to select neutral
position N.
Release the brake pedal.
200
앫
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 203)
the vehicle speed
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
With drive position D selected, you can use
the steering wheel gearshift control
buttons (컄 page 207) to influence transmission shifting by:
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Transmission positions
The current transmission position appears
in the multifunction display.
1 Current transmission position
! If the current transmission position does not
appear in the multifunction display due to a
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
automatic transmission is in the desired position
by carefully driving off with the transmission in
drive position D and program mode S
(컄 page 206) selected. Do not limit the gear
range.
Effect
ì Park position
Shift into park position P only
when vehicle is stopped. The
park position is not intended to
serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver
should always set the parking
brake in addition to shifting into
park position P to secure the
vehicle.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the automatic
transmission could remain
locked in park position P.
왘
Have the vehicle checked as
soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
! SmartKey:
If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch,
the transmission will shift to park position P
automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the
engine with the SmartKey alone will not automatically shift the transmission to park position P.
Only when the SmartKey is removed from the
starter switch, will the transmission automatically shift to park position P.
KEYLESS-GO*:
If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button and open the driver’s door, the
transmission will shift to park position P automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the
engine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
alone will not automatically shift the transmission to park position P. Only when the
driver’s door is opened, will the transmission
automatically shift to park position P.
Even though this is possible, make it a practice
to always shift into park position P before turning
off the engine and remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch, or when using KEYLESS-GO*,
before turning off the engine with the start/stop
button and opening the driver’s door.
201
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
! If you want the gear position to remain in
neutral position N (for example when the vehicle
is pulled through a car wash)
앫
do not remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or, when using KEYLESS-GO*
앫
do not turn off the engine using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* and open
the driver’s door
Otherwise, the transmission will shift to park
position P and lock the wheels, preventing the
vehicle from being pulled through a car wash.
Effect
í Reverse gear
Shift into reverse gear R only
when the vehicle is stopped.
ë Neutral
Warning!
G
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
Getting out of your vehicle without shifting
into park position P is dangerous. Also, park
position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving,
possibly hitting people or objects.
To avoid damage to the transmission, never shift into neutral
position N while driving.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to park position P (컄 page 66).
If the ESP® is deactivated or
malfunctioning:
Shift into neutral position N only
if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
202
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason in neutral position N can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could shift the
automatic transmission out of park
position P, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
Stopping
Driving tips
When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
Accelerator position
왘
Leave the transmission in gear.
Your driving style influences the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
왘
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
When you stop for a longer period of time
with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
More throttle
Later upshifting
왘
Set the parking brake.
Kickdown
왘
Shift into park position P.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
Maneuvering
왘
When you maneuver in tight areas,
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
왘
Control the vehicle speed by gradually
releasing the brakes.
왘
Accelerate gently.
왘
Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
The transmission shifts up again.
203
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Hill start assist system
Rocking the vehicle
Rocking the vehicle by shifting between
drive position D and reverse gear R can
help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow.
The engine control system of this vehicle
electronically limits shifting between drive
position D and reverse gear R to very low
speeds, i.e. approx. 5 mph (9 km/h). To
shift between drive position D and reverse
gear R, move the gear selector lever past
the resistance point up or down.
Working on the vehicle
Warning!
G
When working on the vehicle, set the
parking brake and shift to park position P.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away.
204
Warning!
The hill start assist system is inactive
G
The hill start assist system is not designed
to function as a parking brake and does not
prevent the vehicle from moving when
parked on an incline.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to park position P.
On uphill grades with a gradient angle of
more than 5°, the hill start assist system
maintains the pressure in the brake system for approximately 1 second after you
have released the brake pedal. Therefore,
you can start off smoothly without the
vehicle moving immediately after releasing
the brake pedal.
앫
when starting off on a level road or
downhill grades
앫
with the transmission in neutral
position N
앫
with the parking brake set
앫
if the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can select a gear range for
the automatic transmission to operate
within.
You can limit the gear range by pressing
the left gearshift button on the steering
wheel gearshift control, and reverse the
gear range limit by pressing the right gearshift button on the steering wheel gearshift
control (컄 page 207).
The selected gear range appears in the
multifunction display.
Effect
ï The transmission shifts through
sixth gear only.
î The transmission shifts through
fifth gear only.
é The transmission shifts through
fourth gear only.
è The transmission shifts through
third gear only.
With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine.
Effect
ç The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving:
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
æ The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
1 Current gear range
205
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic shift program
The selected program mode appears in the
multifunction display.
The program mode selector switch is
located on the upper part of the center
console.
1 Current program mode
Program mode selector switch
(R 63 AMG only)
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
206
M Manual
For manual gear shifting
(컄 page 209)
C Comfort
For standard driving
S Sport
For sporty driving
! Never change the program mode when the
automatic transmission is out of park position P.
This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared.
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is
switched on when the engine is restarted.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왘
Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the
desired program mode appears in the
multifunction display.
Select C for comfort driving
(R 63 AMG: standard driving):
앫
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
full throttle is applied or gear
range 1 is selected.
앫
Traction and driving stability are
improved on icy roads.
앫
Upshifts occur earlier even when
you give more gas. The engine then
operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
Select S for standard driving
(R 63 AMG: sporty driving):
앫
The vehicle starts out in first gear.
앫
Upshifts occur later.
Steering wheel gearshift control
With drive position D selected and driving
in program mode C or S, you can limit or
extend the gear range.
If your vehicle is equipped with manual
shift program M, you can use the steering
wheel gearshift control to manually shift
the gears.
i R 63 AMG:
For information on using the steering wheel gearshift control in program mode M, see “Manual
shift program (R 63 AMG only)” (컄 page 209).
1 Left shift button: limiting gear range or
downshift (in program mode M)
2 Right shift button: extending gear
range or upshift (in program mode M)
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
gearshift control buttons when the transmission
in position P, N or R.
The following instructions describe operation of the steering wheel gearshift control
when driving in program mode C or S.
207
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Limiting gear range
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
Briefly press left shift button 1.
The transmission will shift to the next
lower gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the transmission (컄 page 205).
i To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
exceeded.
208
Extending gear range
Canceling gear range limit
왘
왘
Briefly press right shift button 2.
The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the transmission.
The transmission will shift from the
current gear range directly to gear
range D.
i If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
Press and hold right shift button 2
until the cipher for the current gear
range disappears from the multifunction display (컄 page 205).
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Press and hold left shift button 1.
The transmission will automatically
select the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more
gears.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Activating manual shift program
Manual shift program (R 63 AMG only)
왘
In addition to the automatic shift
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped
with the manual shift program M.
In the manual program mode M,
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
gears by manually upshifting or downshifting using the steering wheel gearshift
control buttons to the left and right of the
steering wheel (컄 page 207).
The transmission switches to the
manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range
is not limited.
Program mode selector switch
M Manual
For manual gear shifting
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
C Comfort
For standard driving
Do not place full load on the engine until the
operating temperature has been reached.
S Sport
For sporty driving
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the M for manual program mode M appears in the multifunction display.
The selected program mode appears in the
multifunction display (컄 page 206).
i For information on automatic program
modes C or S, see “Automatic shift program”
(컄 page 206) and “Steering wheel gearshift control” (컄 page 207).
You can change the gears manually with
drive position D selected. You can upshift
or downshift through the gears in succession.
i The manual program mode M will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with the
manual program mode M selected, the transmission will go to the automatic program mode
(C or S) when the engine is restarted.
209
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Upshifting
! In the manual program mode M, the transmission will not upshift, even if the engine has
reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the
next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range. Make absolutely certain that the
engine speed does not reach the red marking on
the tachometer (컄 page 157). Otherwise the
engine could be damaged which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
If you have selected the AMG menu in the
control system (컄 page 168) and you are
driving in the manual program mode M,
upshift indicator 2 in the multifunction
display advises you to upshift before the
engine reaches the overspeed range. Thus
you can drive at the maximum engine
speed for each gear without overrevving
the engine.
Briefly press right shift button 2
(컄 page 207).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
왘
The transmission shifts to the next
higher gear.
Briefly press left shift button 1
(컄 page 207).
The transmission shifts to the next
lower gear.
1 Gear indicator
2 Upshift indicator
왘
Shift to the next higher gear.
The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving.
210
Downshifting
i When you brake or stop, the transmission
shifts down to a gear from which you can easily
accelerate or drive off.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Kickdown
Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M is not possible.
Deactivating manual shift program
왘
Press the program mode selector
switch (컄 page 209) repeatedly until
C or S appears in the multifunction
display.
or
왘
Restart the engine.
Emergency operation (Limp-Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the transmission
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
likely operating in limp-home (emergency
operation) mode. In this mode only second
gear and reverse gear can be selected.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
왘
Shift to park position P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
The transmission will go to the
automatic program mode (C or S).
왘
Wait at least 10 seconds before
restarting.
The manual program mode M is not
stored.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Shift to drive position D (for second
gear) or reverse gear R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
211
Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers,
see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 60).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
Headlamp cleaning system*
The button is located on the left side of the
dashboard.
i The headlamps will automatically be
cleaned when you have
앫
Rear view mirrors
For more information on setting the rear
view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 48).
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
position
switched on the headlamps
and
앫
operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the counter
resets.
1 Headlamp washer button
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning*
system” (컄 page 372).
1 Lever
왘
Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position
by moving lever 1 towards the windshield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
212
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and
the interior rear view mirror will respond
automatically to glare when
앫
the ignition is switched on
and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror
The rear view mirror will not react if
앫
the automatic transmission is set to
position R
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
Warning!
G
The auto-dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, when transporting cargo
which covers the rear window.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe the traffic
conditions and could cause an accident.
Warning!
G
In case of an accident liquid electrolyte may
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can be completely
removed only while in the liquid state and by
applying plenty of water.
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your
interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
213
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Power folding exterior rear view
mirrors*
! Before you drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior rear view mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged.
Folding the exterior rear view mirrors
in and out automatically
When the corresponding function in the
control system is activated (컄 page 190):
앫
앫
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold in as soon as the vehicle is
locked from the outside.
The exterior rear view mirrors automatically fold out as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger door are subsequently opened.
214
Synchronizing exterior rear view
mirrors
Folding the exterior rear view mirrors
in and out manually
The power folding rear view mirrors may
have to be synchronized after the vehicle
battery has been disconnected or discharged. If the exterior rear view mirrors
do not fold properly upon locking or unlocking the vehicle although the corresponding function in the control system is
activated (컄 page 190), do the following:
i The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
왘
Fold each exterior rear view mirror in
completely (컄 page 215).
왘
Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
completely (컄 page 215).
When the exterior rear view mirrors fold
properly upon locking the vehicle, the exterior mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise
repeat the above steps.
they are not folded out completely.
The button is located on the door control
panel.
1 Button for folding exterior rear view
mirrors in and out
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Folding in
왘
Briefly press button 1.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
i If you are driving at more than approximately
30 mph (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold
the exterior mirrors in.
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Folding out
왘
Briefly press button 1 again.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or
forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front)
press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press
button 1 again to fold mirrors out. Do not force
mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly positioned
and you can adjust the mirror in the usual manner.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
1 Sun visor
2 Additional sun visor*
3 Mirror lamp
4 Vanity mirror cover
5 Vanity mirror
6 Holder for gas cards
7 Mounting
Glare through the windshield
왘
Swing sun visor 1 down.
왘
Make sure sun visor 1 is properly engaged in mounting 7.
왘
When you do not experience glare anymore, swing sun visor 1 up.
215
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Vanity mirror
왘
Swing sun visor 1 down.
왘
Swing sun visor 1 down.
왘
왘
Flip up cover 4 to access vanity
mirror 5.
Disengage sun visor 1 from
mounting 7 (컄 page 215).
왘
Pivot sun visor 1 to the side.
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on.
! To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover 4
왘
After using vanity mirror 5, flip down
cover 4.
왘
Swing sun visor 1 up.
Glare through a side window
Rear door window sunshade*
(컄 page 215), make sure it is closed before
pivoting sun visor 1 to the side.
왘
Swing down additional sun visor* 2
when you experience additional glare
through the windshield.
1 Holder
2 Tab
왘
To raise sunshade, pull on tab 2 and
engage it in holder 1.
왘
To lower sunshade, disengage tab 2
from holder 1 and guide retraction.
! Always guide the sunshade. Do not let it
snap back abruptly, as the retractor could be
damaged.
1 Sun visor
2 Additional sun visor*
216
Controls in detail
Good visibility
! With the sunshade raised and the respective
door window open, the sunshade could disengage and snap back when driving at high vehicle
speeds, e.g. on highways, and damage the
retractor. You should therefore always either
close the door window or lower the sunshade
when driving at high speed.
Rear window defroster
Activating
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep battery drain to
a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The defroster is automatically deactivated after
approximately 6 to 17 minutes of
operation depending on the outside temperature.
왘
Press button 1 on the climate control panel (컄 page 220) or the automatic climate control* panel (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button 1 once more.
G
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
! If the rear window defroster switches off too
soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, too
many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the
battery. The system responds automatically by
switching the rear window defroster off.
Warning!
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
rear window defroster switches back on automatically.
217
Controls in detail
Climate control
218
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side and door air vent
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.
3 Left center air vent, adjustable
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side and door air vent
8 Right side air vent, adjustable
9 Front passenger door air vent, fixed
a Climate control panel
b Driver’s door air vent, fixed
219
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Temperature control, left
2 Air distribution and air volume
(automatic, manual)
3 Front defroster
0 USA only
P Canada only
4 Increasing air volume
5 Air distribution (directs air through
the windshield and side air vents)
6 Rear climate control* on/off
Air supply for rear passenger
compartment on/off
9 Air distribution (directs air through
center and side air vents)
a Air distribution (directs air through
the footwells and side air vents)
b Air volume display
c Decreasing air volume
d Rear window defroster
1 USA only
F Canada only
e Air recirculation
: USA only
f Interior temperature sensor
< Canada only
g Climate control on/off
7 Temperature control, right
220
8 AC cooling on/off
Residual heat/ventilation
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate
the climate control system in either the
automatic or manual mode. The system
cools or heats the interior depending on
the selected interior temperature and the
current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature).
This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 228).
Warning!
G
i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before its
scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
the air volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
before driving off, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 254). The climate control will then
adjust the interior temperature to the set value
much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
controls (컄 page 220) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in
the immediate area of unprotected skin.
221
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control
system
Warning!
G
When the climate control system is
switched off, the outside air supply and circulation are also switched off. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility
and endangering you and others.
Reactivating
Activating
왘
왘
Press button U (컄 page 220).
i You can also press button ´
(컄 page 220) on the climate control panel.
If you press button 0 (컄 page 220) to reactivate the climate control system, the defrosting
mode is activated.
Operating the climate control system
in automatic mode
i When operating the climate control system
Deactivating
왘
Press button ´ (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
222
in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off if
necessary (컄 page 228).
Press button U (컄 page 220) while
the engine is running.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
왘
Use temperature controls 1 and 7
(컄 page 220) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the
passenger compartment.
The interior air temperature is adjusted
automatically.
i The settings for the passenger side are also
used for the rear passenger compartment.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating
왘
Press button or Q
(컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out. The automatic operation of
air volume switches off. The selected
blower speed is shown in the air
volume display b (컄 page 220).
or
왘
Press air distribution button 5, 9,
or a (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out. The automatic operation of
air distribution switches off.
Setting the temperature
Adjusting air distribution
Use temperature controls 1 and 7
(컄 page 220) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.
Press air distribution button 5, 9, or a
(컄 page 220) to adjust the air distribution.
The following symbols are found on the
buttons:
Symbol
Function
a
Directs air through the center
and side air vents
Z
Directs air to the windshield
and side air vents
Y
Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
Increasing
왘
Turn temperature control 1 and/or
7 (컄 page 220) slightly clockwise.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air
temperature.
Decreasing
왘
Turn temperature control 1 and/or
7 (컄 page 220) slightly counterclockwise.
왘
Press the desired air distribution
button 5, 9, or a (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air
temperature.
223
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air volume
Five blower speeds are available.
왘
왘
Press button to decrease or
button Q to increase air volume
(컄 page 220) to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button U
(컄 page 220) goes out. The automatic
operation of air volume switches off.
The selected blower speed is
shown in the air volume display b
(컄 page 220).
Adjusting air volume for the center and
side air vents
Opening the center air vents
왘
Closing the center air vents
Turn thumbwheels 5 and 6
(컄 page 218) upward.
The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are open.
224
Turn thumbwheels 5 and 6
(컄 page 218) downward.
The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are closed.
Opening the side air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2 and 7
(컄 page 218) upward.
The corresponding side air vents on the
left and right are open.
Closing the side air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2 and 7
(컄 page 218) downward.
The corresponding side air vents on the
left and right are closed.
Front defroster
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, for example if it is iced up. You
can also use it to defog the windshield and
side windows.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
When the defrost setting has been selected, only
the rear window defroster can be switched on.
No other settings are possible.
Activating
왘
Press button 0 (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control switches to the following functions automatically:
Windshield fogged on the outside
앫
maximum blower speed and heating
power
windshield is clear again.
앫
air flows onto the windshield and the
front side windows (side air vents must
be open)
앫
the air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
air-drying
Deactivating
왘
Press button 0 (컄 page 220) once
more.
i Keep this setting selected only until the
왘
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 60).
The climate control switches automatically
to the following functions:
앫
maximum blower speed and heating
power
앫
air flows onto the windshield and the
front side windows (side air vents must
be open)
앫
the air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
air-drying
Press button 0 (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
If the automatic air distribution is switched
off:
왘
Press air distribution button 9 or a
(컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are in effect
again. The air conditioning compressor
remains switched on.
i To switch off, you can also press
button ´ or U (컄 page 220).
225
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 228) is activated, or
press button 0.
226
Activating
Deactivating
왘
왘
Press button : (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Press button :.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The air recirculation mode is deactivated
matically at high outside temperatures.
automatically
The indicator lamp on button : is not lit when
the air recirculation mode is switched on automatically.
앫
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
air-drying are turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
(컄 page 228) or the outside temperature is
below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will
not switch on automatically.
i To cool the interior as fast as possible, the
climate control automatically switches to air
recirculation. The indicator lamp on button :
is not lit when the air recirculation mode has
been switched on automatically.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air recirculation mode with
convenience closing and opening
feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof* or tilt/sliding panel* if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger:
Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sunroof*: The closing of the windows can be immediately halted by pressing or pulling the
respective window switch. The closing of the
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately
halted by moving the switch for the
tilt/sliding sunroof* in any direction.
The closing of the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the : button.
Vehicles with panorama roof*: The closing
of the windows and tilt/sliding panel* can
be immediately halted by releasing
the : button.
Convenience opening:
왘
The windows and/or tilt/sliding sunroof will return to their previous positions. You can release button :
once the opening procedure has
begun. The windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof continue opening until they
have reached their previous positions.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air recirculation mode is
deactivated.
i A window, the tilt/sliding sunroof*, or the
tilt/sliding panel* will only return to its previous
position if it has not been moved to another
position using the respective window switch or
tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding panel*)
switch after it was closed with button :.
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof*
Convenience closing:
왘
Press button : for approximately
2 seconds.
Press button : for approximately
2 seconds.
Vehicles with panorama roof*
The windows and/or tilt/sliding sunroof will close. You can release
button : once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing
until they are fully closed. The indicator
lamp on the button comes on. The air
recirculation mode is activated.
왘
Convenience closing:
Press and hold button : until the
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are
closed or have reached the desired
position. The indicator lamp on the
button comes on. The air recirculation
mode is activated.
컄컄
227
Controls in detail
Climate control
컄컄Convenience
왘
opening:
Press and hold button : until the
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are
opened or have reached the desired
position. The indicator lamp on the
button goes out. The air recirculation
mode is deactivated.
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
In addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies the interior air at outside temperatures
above 41°F (5° C) and helps prevent
window fogging.
i Condensation may drip out from underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
228
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the interior air is not dried. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
왘
Press button 9 (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press button 9 (컄 page 220) again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned
off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on
앫
the coolant temperature
앫
the battery voltage
Regardless of the temperature and air volume
set on the climate control panel, an interior temperature is aimed at by 72°F (22°C) and the
blower runs on low speed to protect the vehicle
battery.
Activating
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press button 9 (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Rear climate control*
The control panel for the rear climate
control is only available if your vehicle is
equipped with seat heating for the
second-row seats*.
The control panel is located on the rear of
the front center console.
Press button 9 (컄 page 220) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The residual heat is automatically turned off:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the coolant temperature is too low
앫
if the battery voltage drops
229
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Rear climate control on
(automatic mode)
Activating rear climate control
2 Air distribution (directs air through
the center air vents)
(컄 page 231).
i The climate control must be switched on
왘
3 Rear air conditioning off
Press button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
4 Air distribution (directs air through
the footwells and side air vents)
5 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
i The temperature is adjusted according to
6 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
the settings for the front passenger side made
on the front climate control panel (컄 page 223).
Deactivating rear climate control
왘
Press button ´.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
Rear climate control panel
The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
i Switch off the rear climate control for
improved cooling or heating output in the front
passenger compartment.
You can also switch off the rear climate control
from the front passenger compartment
(컄 page 231).
230
Controls in detail
Climate control
Operating from the front
Adjusting air distribution
Adjusting automatically
Deactivating
Use the air distribution controls 2 or 4
to adjust the air distribution for the rear
passenger compartment.
왘
왘
Press button : on the front climate
control panel (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Adjusting air volume
Reactivating
Press button : on the front climate
control panel (컄 page 220).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The rear climate control is
adjusted automatically.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air distribution is
adjusted automatically.
The symbols on the controls represent the
following functions:
Symbol
왘
Press button U.
Function
Z
Directs air to the center air
vents
Y
Directs air to the footwells and
the side air vents
Adjusting manually
왘
Press the desired air distribution
control 2 or 4.
The air volume for the rear zone corresponds to the air volume settings for the
front passenger side. You can switch off
the air supply for the rear zone.
You can switch off the supplied amount of
air volume.
왘
Press button ´.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
231
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
232
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
1 Left side air vent, adjustable
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side and door air vent
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.
3 Left center air vent, adjustable
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
5 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left center air vent
6 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right center air vent
7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for right side and door air vent
8 Right side air vent, adjustable
9 Front passenger door air vent, fixed
a Automatic climate control panel
b Driver’s door air vent, fixed
233
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
1 Temperature control, driver’s side
9 Temperature control, passenger side
2 Air distribution and air volume
(automatic, manual)
a Automatic climate control on/off
3 Air distribution, driver’s side
c Air distribution, passenger side
4 Front defroster
0 USA only
d AC cooling on/off
Residual heat/ventilation
P Canada only
e Display
5 Increasing air volume
f Decreasing air volume
6 Rear window defroster
g Air recirculation
1 USA only
h Air distribution, driver’s side
F Canada only
j Air distribution, driver’s side
7 Air distribution, passenger side
k Interior temperature sensor
8 Rear automatic climate control
on/off
l Adopting driver’s side settings for all
zones
> USA only
™ Canada only
234
b Air distribution, passenger side
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate
control, the air that enters the passenger
compartment through the air vents can be
very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate
area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
controls (컄 page 234) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in
the immediate area of unprotected skin.
The automatic climate control is a 3-zone
intelligent automatic climate control
system. Your vehicle interior is divided
into 3 zones.
With the help of a sun sensor, the
automatic climate control determines the
relation of the sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts the inside temperature
for each individual zone.
The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. It
cools the vehicle’s interior according to the
angle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the
outside temperature and the selected temperature. You can operate the automatic
climate control in either the automatic or
manual mode.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air
enters the passenger compartment
through the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 243).
235
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before its
scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
the air volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
before driving off, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 254). The automatic climate
control will then adjust the interior temperature
to the set value much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.
236
Deactivating the automatic climate
control system
Warning!
G
When the automatic climate control system
is switched off, the outside air supply and
circulation are also switched off. Only
choose this setting for a short time.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
Deactivating
왘
Press button ´ (컄 page 234) until
the display e (컄 page 234) is cleared.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Reactivating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 234).
i You can also press button ´
(컄 page 234) on the automatic climate control
panel.
If you press button 0 (컄 page 234) to reactivate the automatic climate control system, the
defrosting mode is activated.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Operating the automatic climate
control system in automatic mode
왘
You can switch the automatic climate
control system on and off separately for
each zone as needed.
i When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode, you will only
rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume
and air distribution.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off if
necessary.
Activating
왘
Press button U (컄 page 234) while
the engine is running.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. AUTO appears in the
display e (컄 page 234). Air volume
and air distribution are controlled
separately for each zone.
Use temperature controls 1 and 9
(컄 page 234) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the
passenger compartment.
The temperature of the interior is
adjusted automatically.
Deactivating
왘
Press one button of the air distribution
(컄 page 234) or press button or Q (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button U
goes out and AUTO disappears in the
display e (컄 page 234).
Depending on which button you press –
the air distribution button or the air volume button or Q – automatic
control of either the air distribution or
air volume is switched off.
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 1 and 9
(컄 page 234) to separately adjust the air
temperature on each side of the passenger
compartment. You should raise or lower
the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
The automatic climate control will adjust
to the set temperature as fast as possible.
Increasing
왘
Turn temperature control
1 and/or 9 slightly clockwise.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
Decreasing
왘
Turn temperature control
1 and/or 9 slightly counterclockwise.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
237
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
왘
Adjusting air distribution
Use the air distribution buttons 3, h,
or j for the driver’s side, or 7, b, or c
(컄 page 234) for the passenger side to
separately adjust the air distribution on
each side of the passenger compartment.
The following symbols are found on the
buttons:
Symbol
Driver’s
side
Passenger side
6
Z
7
8
238
a
Y
Function
Directs air to the
windshield and
side air vents
Directs air through
the center, side
and rear passenger compartment
air vents
Directs air to the
footwells and side
air vents
Press the desired air distribution
button (컄 page 234).
Opening the side air vents
왘
The indicator lamp on the desired
button comes on.
Adjusting the air distribution for the
center and side air vents
Opening the center air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheels 5 and 6
(컄 page 232) upward.
The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are open.
Closing the center air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheels 5 and 6
(컄 page 232) downward.
The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are closed.
Turn thumbwheels 2 and 7
(컄 page 232) upward.
The corresponding side air vents on the
left and right are open.
Closing the side air vents
왘
Turn thumbwheels 2 and 7
(컄 page 232) downward.
The corresponding side air vents on the
left and right are closed.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Adjusting air volume
Front defroster
Five blower speeds are available.
You can use this setting to defrost the
windshield, such as when it is iced up. You
can also use it to defog the windshield and
side windows.
왘
Press button to decrease or
button Q to increase air volume
(컄 page 234) to the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
The AUTO display disappears in the
display e (컄 page 234) and the
automatic mode is switched off. The
selected blower speed appears in the
display e (컄 page 234).
The automatic climate control switches to
the following functions automatically:
앫
maximum blower speed and heating
power
앫
air flows onto the windshield and the
front side windows (side air vents must
be open)
앫
the air conditioning compressor
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
air-drying
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
When the defrost setting has been selected, only
the rear window defroster can be switched on.
No other settings are possible.
Activating
왘
Press button 0 (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button 0 (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
i To switch off, you can also press
button ´ or U (컄 page 234).
239
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Windshield fogged on the outside
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on
(컄 page 60).
왘
Press button U (컄 page 234).
AUTO appears in the display e
(컄 page 234). Air volume and air
distribution are controlled separately
for each zone.
If the automatic air distribution and air
volume are switched off:
왘
Press buttons 8 and Y
(컄 page 234).
240
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
Air recirculation mode
If the air distribution control as well as the
airflow volume control are set to U and
there is a high need for cooling, the
MAX COOL function is activated.
“MAX COOL” appears in the front and rear
display.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e.g. before driving
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
This provides the fastest possible cooling
of the vehicle interior (when windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof* or tilt/sliding panel*
are closed).
Warning!
G
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin to
fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should clear
interior window fogging. If interior window
fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 243) is activated, or
press button 0.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Activating
왘
Press button : (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temperatures.
The indicator lamp on button : is not lit
when the air recirculation mode is switched on
automatically.
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
(컄 page 243) or the outside temperature is
below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will
not switch on automatically.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof* or tilt/sliding panel* if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential
danger:
Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding
sunroof*: The closing of the windows can be
immediately halted by pressing or pulling
the respective window switch. The closing of
the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately
halted by moving the switch for the
tilt/sliding sunroof* in any direction.
The closing of the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the : button.
Vehicles with panorama roof*: The closing
of the windows and tilt/sliding panel* can
be immediately halted by releasing
the : button.
i To cool the interior as fast as possible,
the automatic climate control automatically
switches to air recirculation. The indicator lamp
on button : is not lit when the system
switches to air recirculation automatically.
Deactivating
왘
Press button : (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically
앫
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
below approximately 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
air-drying is turned off
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
At outside temperatures above
79°F (26°C) the system will not automatically switch back to outside air. A quantity
of outside air is added after approximately
30 minutes.
241
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Air recirculation mode with
convenience closing and opening
feature
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof* or tilt/sliding panel* if there is the
possibility of anyone being harmed by the
opening or closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential
danger:
Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding
sunroof*: The closing of the windows can be
immediately halted by pressing or pulling
the respective window switch. The closing of
the tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately
halted by moving the switch for the
tilt/sliding sunroof* in any direction.
The closing of the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the : button.
242
Vehicles with panorama roof*: The closing
of the windows and tilt/sliding panel* can
be immediately halted by releasing
the : button.
Convenience opening:
왘
The windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will return to their previous
positions. You can release button :
once the opening procedure has
begun. The windows and tilt/sliding
sunroof continue opening until they
have reached their previous positions.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The air recirculation mode is
deactivated.
i A window, the tilt/sliding sunroof*, or the
tilt/sliding panel* will only return to its previous
position if it has not been moved to another
position using the respective window switch or
tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding panel*)
switch after it was closed with button :.
Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof*
Convenience closing:
왘
Press button : for approximately
2 seconds.
Press button : for approximately
2 seconds.
Vehicles with panorama roof*
The windows and/or tilt/sliding
sunroof will close. You can release
button : once the closing procedure has begun. The windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof continue closing
until they are fully closed. The indicator
lamp on the button comes on. The air
recirculation mode is activated.
왘
Convenience closing:
Press and hold button : until the
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are
closed or have reached the desired position. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air recirculation mode is
activated.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Convenience opening:
왘
Press and hold button : until the
windows and the tilt/sliding panel are
opened or have reached the desired
position. The indicator lamp on the
button goes out. The air recirculation
mode is deactivated.
Air conditioning
Warning!
G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
interior air is not dried. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
Deactivating
The cooling function, only operational
when the engine is running, cools the
vehicle down to the selected interior
temperature. The cooling function also
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thereby preventing the windows from
fogging up.
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic
climate control system. The air in the
vehicle will then no longer be cooled or
dehumidified.
i Condensation may drip out from underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The cooling function switches off
after a short delay.
왘
Press button 9 (컄 page 234).
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.
왘
Press button 9 again.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R-134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned
off.
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
243
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Using driver-side settings for all
temperature zones
You can use the settings of the driver’s
side, such as temperature, air volume and
air distribution, for all temperature zones.
These settings only need to be made once
and the automatic climate control system
will automatically regulate the settings for
all temperature zones quickly and comfortably.
Activating
왘
Adjust the temperature, air volume and
air distribution (컄 page 234).
왘
Press button ; (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The driver-side settings are used for all
temperature zones.
244
Deactivating
왘
Press button ; (컄 page 234) again.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
i If you manually set the temperature, air
volume or air distribution for the passenger side
or the rear passenger compartment when the
MONO setting is active, the MONO setting will
be switched off.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
use of the residual heat produced by the
engine.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on
앫
the coolant temperature
앫
the battery voltage
Regardless of the temperature and air volume
set on the automatic climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72°F (22°C)
and the blower runs on low speed to protect the
vehicle battery.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Activating
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press button 9 (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
Rear automatic climate control
(second row)
The control panel is located at the rear of
the front center console.
1 Increasing air volume
2 Air distribution and air volume
(automatic, manual)
3 Air distribution (directs air through
the side air vents
4 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
Deactivating
왘
Press button 9.
5 Air distribution (directs air through
the footwells and side air vents)
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
6 Rear automatic climate control
on/off
i The residual heat is automatically turned off:
7 Decreasing air volume
앫
when the ignition is switched on
8 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the coolant temperature is too low
9 Indicator lamps for air volume
settings
앫
if the battery voltage drops
a Temperature control
Rear automatic climate control panel
245
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Activating rear automatic climate
control
i The automatic climate control must be
switched on (컄 page 236).
왘
Operating from the front
Deactivating
왘
Press button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The temperature, air
volume, and air distribution are adjusted automatically.
Deactivating rear automatic climate
control
왘
Press button ´.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
i Switch off the rear automatic climate
control for improved cooling or heating output in
the front passenger compartment.
You can also switch off the rear automatic
climate control from the front passenger compartment (컄 page 246).
246
Press button > (컄 page 234).
In display e (컄 page 234), you will see
the > symbol followed by MODE for
approximately 3 seconds.
왘
Press button ´ (컄 page 234).
In display e (컄 page 234), you will see
the > symbol followed by OFF.
The rear automatic climate control is
switched off.
Reactivating
왘
Press button > (컄 page 234).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
In display e (컄 page 234), you will see
the > symbol followed by ON and
MODE. The MODE display is cleared and
the indicator lamp on button >
goes out after approximately
3 seconds.
The rear automatic climate control
switches on.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Setting the temperature
Adjusting air distribution
Adjusting manually
왘
Make sure the front automatic climate
control is switched on (컄 page 236).
왘
왘
Press button > (컄 page 234).
Use the air distribution controls 3 or 5
to adjust the air distribution for the rear
passenger compartment.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
In display e (컄 page 234), you will see
the > symbol followed by MODE.
왘
Set the desired temperature for the
rear passenger compartment using
temperature control 9 (컄 page 234).
Press the desired air distribution control.
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
The symbols on the controls represent the
following functions:
Adjusting automatically
Symbol
Function
Z
Directs air to the center air
vents
Y
Directs air to the footwells and
the side air vents
왘
Press button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air distribution is adjusted automatically.
After approximately 3 seconds after
the last adjustment, the display switches back to its standard display and the
indicator lamp on button > goes
out.
i You can also press the > button once
more to switch back to the standard display.
247
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Setting the temperature
Increasing the temperature
Use temperature control a (컄 page 245)
to separately adjust the air temperature of
the rear passenger compartment.
왘
Turn temperature control a
(컄 page 245) slightly clockwise.
The rear automatic climate control will
correspondingly adjust the interior air
temperature for the rear passenger
compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic
climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible.
Decreasing the temperature
i The rear automatic climate control will not
왘
cool the air when the air conditioning is switched
off (컄 page 243).
Adjusting manually
Five blower speeds are available.
왘
Press button to decrease or
button Q to increase air volume to
the desired level.
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out. The selected blower speed is
shown by the indicator lamps for air
volume settings 9 (컄 page 245).
Turn temperature control a
(컄 page 245) slightly counterclockwise.
The rear automatic climate control will
correspondingly adjust the interior air
temperature for the rear passenger
compartment.
248
Adjusting air volume
Adjusting automatically
왘
Press button U.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume is adjusted
automatically.
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
B-pillar air vents
Adjusting air distribution
Air vents are located in both B-pillars.
왘
Move air vent slider 1 to the left, right,
up, or down to direct the air in the desired direction.
Air vents are located in the left and right
side trim below the rear quarter windows.
Rear automatic climate control
(second and third row)*
1 Air vent, adjustable
2 Thumbwheel for air volume control
Adjusting air volume
왘
The rear automatic climate control for the
second and third row* is operated in the
same manner as the rear automatic
climate control for the second row
(컄 page 245).
1 Defrost air vent for rear quarter
window, fixed
2 Air vent, adjustable
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
Turn thumbwheel 2 to the left to
increase the air volume.
or
왘
Turn thumbwheel 2 to the right to
decrease the air volume.
249
Controls in detail
3-zone automatic climate control*
Adjusting air volume
왘
Turn thumbwheel 3 downwards to
increase the air volume.
or
왘
Turn thumbwheel 3 upwards to
decrease the air volume.
Adjusting air distribution
왘
Move air vent slider 2 to the left, right,
up, or down.
The air is directed in the desired
direction.
250
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing
Warning!
The door windows and the hinged quarter
windows* are opened and closed electrically. The switches for all door windows
and the hinged quarter windows* are
located on the driver’s door control panel
(컄 page 36). The switches for the respective door windows are located on the
control panels of the front passenger door
and the rear doors. The hinged quarter
windows* can be operated from the
driver’s seat only.
G
When closing the windows, make sure that
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
1 Left front door window
2 Right front door window
3 Right rear door window
4 Hinged quarter windows*
5 Override switch (컄 page 97)
6 Left rear door window
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Activate the override switch (컄 page 97)
when children are riding in the back seats of
the vehicle. The children could otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped
in the window opening.
The closing of a door window can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if
switch was pulled past the resistance point
and released, by either pressing or pulling
the respective switch.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the door window, the automatic reversal function will
stop the door window and open it slightly. 컄컄
251
Controls in detail
Power windows
컄컄
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you are closing a door window by pulling and
holding the switch, or by pressing and holding button ‹ on the SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO*) on the door handle, the
automatic reversal function will not operate.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i You can also open or close the windows us-
Opening the door windows
ing the SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature” (컄 page 254) and “Convenience closing
feature” (컄 page 256).
왘
Depending on the current position, the power
windows may also open or close when the air
recirculation button :on the control panel of
the climate control (컄 page 220) or automatic
climate control (컄 page 234) is pressed and
held.
i With the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or removed from the starter switch,
the windows can be operated
앫
until you open the driver’s or front passenger
door
앫
for at least 5 minutes
Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
(컄 page 251) to the resistance point.
The corresponding door window moves
downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the door windows
왘
Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
(컄 page 251) to the resistance point.
The corresponding door window moves
upwards until you release the switch.
Warning!
G
If you pull and hold the switch up when closing the door window, and upward movement
of the door window is blocked by some
obstruction including but not limited to
arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic
reversal will not operate.
252
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully opening the door windows
(Express-open)
왘
Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
(컄 page 251) past the resistance point
and release.
The corresponding door window opens
completely.
Fully closing the door windows
(Express-close)
왘
If the upward movement of a door window
is blocked during the closing procedure,
the door window will stop and open
slightly.
왘
Remove the obstruction.
왘
Pull the respective power window
switch past the resistance point again
and release.
The switches for opening and closing the
hinged quarter windows are located on the
door control panel of the driver’s door
(컄 page 36).
i If the door window still does not close when
Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 6
(컄 page 251) past the resistance point
and release.
there is no obstruction, pull and hold the respective power window switch. The door window will
then close without the obstruction sensor
function.
The corresponding door window closes
completely.
Stopping door windows during
Express-operation
Warning!
Hinged quarter windows*
G
왘
1 Hinged quarter windows: opening
2 Hinged quarter windows: closing
Press or pull the respective door
window switch again.
Driver’s door only:
If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled
past the resistance point and released, the
automatic reversal will not function.
253
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening
왘
Press and release switch 1.
To stop the hinged quarter window:
왘
Press and release switch 1 once
more.
Synchronizing the door windows
Summer opening feature
The door windows must be synchronized
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate
the vehicle before driving off by simultaneously
앫
after the battery was disconnected
앫
if the door windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
(Express-close)
Closing
왘
Press and release switch 2.
To stop the hinged quarter window:
왘
Press and release switch 2 once
more.
i When the obstruction sensor detects the
hinged quarter window is blocked during the
closing process, it will stop and open slightly.
i Each door window must be synchronized
opening the door windows
앫
opening the hinged quarter windows*
앫
opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(or tilt/sliding panel*)
앫
switching on the seat ventilation* for
the driver’s seat
separately.
왘
Close all doors.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Pull and hold door window switch 1,
2, 3, or 6 (컄 page 251).
Once a door window is closed
completely, hold the respective switch
for approximately 3 seconds.
The door window is synchronized.
254
앫
Controls in detail
Power windows
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle.
Vehicles with tilt/sliding panel*
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
왘
If roller sunblinds are closed:
왘
왘
Press and hold button Πon the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and
the tilt/sliding sunroof* have reached
the desired position.
왘
Release button Πon the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to
interrupt the opening procedure.
왘
With the windows and roller sunblinds
fully opened, press and hold
button Πon the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* once
more.
Release button Πon the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to
interrupt the opening procedure.
왘
Press and hold button Πon the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
The windows and roller sunblinds begin
to open after approximately 1 second.
Vehicles without tilt/sliding panel
If roller sunblinds are open:
Press and hold button Πon the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
The windows and the tilt/sliding panel
begin to open after approximately
1 second.
왘
Release button Πon the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to interrupt the opening procedure.
The tilt/sliding panel opens.
왘
Release button Πon the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to
interrupt the opening procedure.
255
Controls in detail
Power windows
Convenience closing feature
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
When locking the vehicle, you can close
the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(or tilt/sliding panel*) simultaneously.
Warning!
If potential danger exists, proceed as
follows:
Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹.
256
Release the lock button (컄 page 69) on
the driver’s outside door handle to stop
the closing procedure.
앫
Immediately pull on the same outside
door handle and hold firmly. The
windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(or tilt/sliding panel*) will open for as
long as the door handle is held but the
door is not opened.
G
When closing the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* (or tilt/sliding panel*),
make sure that there is no danger of anyone
being harmed by the closing procedure.
앫
앫
왘
Press and hold button ‹ on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and
the tilt/sliding sunroof* are completely
closed.
왘
Release button ‹ on the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to
interrupt the closing procedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (컄 page 69) until
the windows and the tilt/sliding
sunroof* are completely closed.
왘
Release the lock button on the outside
door handle to interrupt the closing
procedure.
Vehicles without tilt/sliding panel
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle
(컄 page 255).
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close
proximity to the driver’s door handle.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Vehicles with tilt/sliding panel*
If tilt/sliding panel is closed:
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle
(컄 page 255).
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close
proximity to the driver’s door handle.
왘
Press and hold button ‹ on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and
the roller sunblinds are completely
closed.
왘
Release button ‹ on the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to
interrupt the closing procedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
왘
Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (컄 page 69) until
the windows and the roller sunblinds
are completely closed.
왘
Release button ‹ on the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to
interrupt the closing procedure.
왘
With the windows and the tilt/sliding
panel completely closed, press and
hold button ‹ on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* once
more.
Release the lock button on the outside
door handle to interrupt the closing
procedure.
The roller sunblinds close.
If tilt/sliding panel is open:
왘
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
driver’s outside door handle
(컄 page 255).
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close
proximity to the driver’s door handle.
왘
Press and hold button ‹ on the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and
the tilt/sliding panel* are completely
closed.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Press and hold the lock button on an
outside door handle (컄 page 69) until
the windows and the tilt/sliding panel*
are completely closed.
왘
Release the lock button on the outside
door handle to interrupt the closing
procedure.
왘
With the windows and the tilt/sliding
panel completely closed, press and
hold the lock button on an outside door
handle (컄 page 69) once more.
The roller sunblinds close.
257
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Opening and closing
Warning!
G
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
sure that there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof
switch past the resistance point, or by
pressing and holding button ‹ on the
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the
door handle, the automatic reversal function
will not operate.
The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or, if the
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the switch in any
direction.
258
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury
for occupants wearing their seat belts properly as entire body parts or portions of them
may protrude from the passenger compartment.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment can cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed
manually should an electrical malfunction occur
(컄 page 481).
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,
resonance noises may result in addition to the
usual wind noises. They are caused by minimal
pressure changes in the passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate theses noises,
change the position of the tilt/sliding sunroof or
open a door window slightly.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof using the SmartKey or the
KEYLESS-GO* function, see “Summer opening
feature” (컄 page 254) and “Convenience closing feature” (컄 page 256). Depending on the
current position, the tilt/sliding sunroofs may
also open or close when the air recirculation
button : on the control panel of the climate
control (컄 page 220) or automatic climate
control (컄 page 234) is pressed and held.
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Fully opening (Express-open) and
closing (Express-close)
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the
tilt/sliding sunroof is located on the
overhead control panel.
왘
To fully open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof, move the sunroof switch past
the resistance point in the required
direction 1 or 2 (컄 page 259) and
release.
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
completely.
왘
Sunroof switch
1 Push back to slide sunroof open
2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Opening and closing
Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof
during Express-open
왘
To open, close, raise, or lower the
tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
switch to the resistance point in the
required direction of arrows 1 to 4
(컄 page 259).
왘
Release the sunroof switch when the
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
desired position.
blocked during the closing procedure, the
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
왘
Move the sunroof switch in any
direction.
The movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof stops.
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
259
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Warning!
G
If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an
obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof
switch past the resistance point, or by
pressing and holding button ‹ on the
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the
door handle, the automatic reversal function
will not operate.
The opening/closing procedure of the
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or, if the
switch was moved past the resistance point
and released, by moving the switch in any
direction.
260
Synchronizing
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
synchronized
앫
after the battery has been
disconnected or discharged
앫
after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
closed manually (컄 page 481)
앫
after a malfunction
앫
if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
smoothly
왘
Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding
sunroof from the fuse box
(컄 page 520).
i For information on which fuse box contains
the fuse for the power tilt/sliding sunroof, see
the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 473).
왘
Reinsert the fuse in the main box.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press and hold the sunroof switch in
the direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 259)
until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
raised at the rear.
왘
Hold the sunroof switch in direction of
arrow 3 for approximately 1 second.
왘
Open the tilt/sliding sunroof using the
Express-open feature (컄 page 259).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens completely, it is synchronized.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
completely:
왘
Repeat the above steps.
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
왔 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Roller sunblinds for the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel
The tilt/sliding panel and the front and
rear roller sunblinds are opened and
closed electrically. The switch for the
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds is
located on the overhead control panel.
The roller sunblinds only operate with the
tilt/sliding panel closed. The front and rear
roller sunblind cannot be operated individually.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
To open or close the roller sunblinds,
move the roof panel switch to the resistance point in the required direction of
arrow 1 or 2.
Release the roof panel switch when
the roller sunblinds have reached the
desired position.
Warning!
G
Fully opening the roller sunblinds
(Express-open)
왘
Move the roof panel switch past the resistance point in direction of arrow 1
and release.
The roller sunblinds opens completely.
Stopping the roller sunblinds during
Express-operation
왘
Move the roof panel switch in any
direction.
When closing the roller sunblinds, make
sure that no one is in danger of being injured
by the closing procedure. The closing of the
roller sunblinds can be immediately halted
by releasing the switch.
Roof panel switch
1 Open roller sunblinds
2 Close roller sunblinds
261
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Opening and closing the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel
Warning!
G
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
panel, make sure that there is no danger of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
The opening procedure of the tilt/sliding
panel can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was moved
past the resistance point and released, by
moving the switch in any direction.
The closing procedure of the tilt/sliding
panel can be immediately halted by releasing the switch.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is made out of glass. In the event of
an accident, the glass may shatter. This may
result in an opening in the roof.
262
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury
for occupants wearing their seat belts
properly as entire body parts or portions of
them may protrude from the passenger
compartment.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not transport any objects with sharp edges which can
stick out of the tilt/sliding panel.
Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
i When the tilt/sliding panel is open,
resonance noises may result in addition to the
usual wind noises. They are caused by minimal
pressure changes in the passenger compartment. To reduce or eliminate theses noises,
change the position of the tilt/sliding panel or
open a door window slightly.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
panel using the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO*
function, see “Summer opening feature”
(컄 page 254) and “Convenience closing
feature” (컄 page 256).
i The tilt/sliding panel may also open when
using the air recirculation button :on the
control panel of the climate control
(컄 page 220) or automatic climate control
(컄 page 234).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
The tilt/sliding panel is opened and closed
electrically. The switch for the tilt/sliding
panel is on the overhead control panel.
The tilt/sliding panel only operates with
the roller sunblinds opened.
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Closing
왘
Press and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 263).
Fully opening (Express-open) the
panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel
왘
Release the roof panel switch when the
tilt/sliding panel has reached the
desired position.
Pull the roof panel switch past the
resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 263) and release.
The tilt/sliding panel opens completely.
Raising
Roof panel switch
1 Push back to slide roof panel open
2 Push forward to slide roof panel closed
3 Push up to raise roof panel
4 Pull down to lower roof panel
You can raise the tilt/sliding panel at the
rear for better ventilation of the vehicle
interior.
왘
Release the roof panel switch when the
tilt/sliding panel has reached the
desired position.
Opening
왘
Pull and hold the roof panel switch to
resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 263).
Release the roof panel switch when the
tilt/sliding panel has reached the
desired position.
Press and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 263).
Stopping the panorama roof with
tilt/sliding panel during Express-open
왘
Move the roof panel switch in any
direction.
The tilt/sliding panel will stop in its
current position.
Lowering
왘
Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 263)
until the tilt/sliding panel has lowered
and closed completely.
263
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
Synchronizing the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
왘
The tilt/sliding panel and its roller
sunblinds must be synchronized
앫
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
after the battery has been
disconnected or discharged
앫
after a malfunction
앫
if the tilt/sliding panel does not open
smoothly
! Do not attempt to open or close the
tilt/sliding panel before the tilt/sliding panel is
properly synchronized. The tilt/sliding panel
could otherwise lock-up in the open position.
If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed or
synchronized, see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center or call Roadside Assistance
(컄 page 333).
264
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40) and
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 41).
왘
Open the driver’s door (this puts
the starter switch in position 0,
same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed
again.
왘
Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Push and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 263)
until the roller sunblinds are fully
closed.
왘
Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 263) for
approximately 1 second.
왘
Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 263)
until the roller sunblinds are fully
opened.
왘
Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 1 (컄 page 263) for
approximately 1 second.
Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding
panel from the fuse box (컄 page 521).
i For information on which fuse box contains
the fuse for the power tilt/sliding panel, see the
fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 473).
Controls in detail
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel*
왘
Press and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 263)
until the tilt/sliding panel is fully raised
at the rear.
왘
Push and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 263)
until the tilt/sliding panel is fully
closed.
왘
Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 263) for
approximately 1 second.
왘
Open the tilt/sliding panel using the
Express-open feature (컄 page 263).
If the tilt/sliding panel opens
completely, the roof is synchronized.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
completely:
왘
Repeat the above steps.
265
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are
described on the following pages:
앫
앫
Cruise control (컄 page 266) and
Distronic* (컄 page 271), with which
the vehicle can maintain a preset
speed.
Distance warning function*
(컄 page 284) is only available with
Distronic*, which warns of stationary
obstacles or slower moving vehicles
that you are closing in on too quickly.
앫
AIRMATIC* (컄 page 285) adjusts the
vehicle suspension characteristics
automatically and controls the vehicle
level.
앫
Parktronic* (컄 page 291) and rear view
camera* (컄 page 295), which serve as
a parking aid.
For information on the ABS, BAS, EBP,
ESP®, and 4-ETS, see “Driving safety systems” (컄 page 100).
266
Cruise control
Warning!
The cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
The use of cruise control is recommended
for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed above
20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column (컄 page 24).
G
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a constant speed.
앫
The use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow
safe driving at a constant speed.
앫
The use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
changes in tire traction can result in
wheel spin and loss of control.
앫
Deactivate the cruise control when
driving in fog.
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
Activating cruise control
G
You can activate the cruise control when
the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (30 km/h).
The cruise control brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded. The
brake pedal depresses automatically when
the cruise control engages the brakes.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
including the area under the brake pedal.
Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the cruise control system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a
convenience system designed to assist the
driver during vehicle operation. The driver is
and must always remain responsible for
the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake
operation.
In the following cases you cannot activate
the cruise control:
1 Setting current or higher speed
Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
the resistance point) or 5 mph
increments (past the resistance point)
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
2 Setting current or lower speed
Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
the resistance point) or 5 mph
increments (past the resistance point)
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
3 Canceling cruise control
4 Resuming to last set speed
앫
when you brake
앫
when you have set the parking brake
앫
when the automatic transmission is set
to position P, R, or N
앫
if the ESP® is switched off
앫
if the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting for
the cruise control system.
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting current speed
Canceling cruise control
i The cruise control switches off
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
There are several ways to cancel the cruise
control:
앫
you step on the brake pedal
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 267).
왘
앫
you depress the parking brake pedal
왘
The current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control is activated.
The currently set speed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not
be able to maintain the set speed. Once the
grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains
the set speed by braking with the vehicle’s
braking system. In addition, on longer downhill
grades the automatic transmission will downshift automatically.
268
Step on the brake pedal.
The cruise control is canceled. The last
set speed is stored for later use.
automatically when
The cruise control switches off automatically and
an acoustic warning will sound when
앫
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
앫
the ESP® is in operation
앫
The cruise control is canceled. The last
set speed is stored for later use.
the ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch (컄 page 104)
앫
the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction (컄 page 441)
i The last stored speed is canceled when you
앫
you set the automatic transmission to N
while driving
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 267).
turn off the engine.
Observe additional messages in the
multifunction display that may appear.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
! Setting the automatic transmission to N
Setting a higher speed
while driving cancels the cruise control.
However, the automatic transmission should not
be set to N while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
roads).
You can increase the set speed in two
ways.
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume the last speed set.
Adjustment in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
Warning!
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift
the cruise control lever to the resistance point.
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to
the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 267).
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed increases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
G
You can increase the vehicle speed in
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments.
When using this feature, keep in mind that it
may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the set speed.
Increase the vehicle set speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions permit.
Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
i The set speed value is increased in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
you lift the cruise control lever past the
resistance point.
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up
past the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 267).
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed increases in
increments of 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h).
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is decreased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you
press the cruise control lever down to the resistance point.
왘
Briefly press the cruise control lever
down to the resistance point in direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 267).
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
speed.
Setting a lower speed
You can reduce the set speed in two ways.
Adjustment in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
The vehicle set speed decreases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Warning!
G
You can decrease the vehicle set speed in
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
using this feature, keep in mind that it may
take a brief moment until the vehicle has
reached the set speed.
Decelerate the vehicle set speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions permit.
Otherwise, sudden and unexpected deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
270
i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you
press the cruise control lever down past the
resistance point.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘
왘
Briefly press the cruise control lever
down past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2.
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed decreases in
increments of 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h).
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
speed.
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
Distronic*
G
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the
preset speed could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 267).
The cruise control resumes to the last
set speed or, if no speed is stored, it
will set and store the current speed.
왘
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases the driving
convenience afforded by the cruise control
while traveling on expressways and other
major roadways.
앫
If the Distronic distance sensor detects
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicle speed will be reduced so
that you follow that vehicle at your
preset following distance.
앫
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
you, Distronic will function in the same
way as standard cruise control
(컄 page 266).
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The last set speed appears in the multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds.
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed
adjustment reduction capability is intended
to make cruise control more effective and
usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not
however, intended to, nor does it, replace
the need for extreme care.
The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure a
safe stopping distance, always rests with
the driver.
Distronic cannot take road and traffic conditions into account.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by Distronic. This could
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
272
Warning!
G
Distronic adaptive cruise control is no
substitute for active driving involvement. It
does not react to pedestrians or on stationary objects, nor does it recognize or predict
the lane curvature or the movement of
preceding vehicles.
Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
of the vehicle’s braking power.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
conditions. Additionally, the driver must
provide the steering, braking and other
driving inputs necessary to remain in control
of the vehicle.
High-frequency sources such as toll
stations, speed measuring systems etc. can
cause the Distronic system to malfunction.
Warning!
G
Distronic requires familiarity with its operational characteristics. We strongly recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
Warning!
G
Distronic cannot take road and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if the
road, weather and traffic conditions make it
advisable to travel at a constant speed.
Warning!
G
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
and distance conditions. Do not use
Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy
rain, snow or sleet.
Warning!
G
Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off Distronic or do not
switch it on if:
앫
앫
roads are slippery or covered with snow
or ice. The wheels could lose traction
while braking or accelerating, and the
vehicle could skid.
the sensor is dirty or visibility is
diminished due to snow, rain or fog, for
example. The distance control system
functionality could be impaired.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while Distronic is switched
on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize dangerous situations until it is too late.
This could cause an accident in which you
and others could be injured.
Warning!
G
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
Warning!
G
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not Distronic is activated.
Switch off Distronic:
앫
when changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
앫
when entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
앫
in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, Distronic will continue to
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
Distronic is designed and intended only to
maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.
Use of Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
continuous speed.
Distronic will not react to stationary objects
in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
273
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as a
“Vehicular Radar System”. The radar sensor is
intended for use in an automotive radar system
only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted
by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Distronic displays in the speedometer
dial
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will
void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not
tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
274
1 Set speed
If Distronic is activated, one or two cruise
control speed segments come on around
the set speed.
i The vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
on the Distronic system.
1 Set speed
2 Cruise control speed segments
3 Speed of the vehicle ahead
If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the cruise control speed
segments 2, which represents the difference from the speed of the preceding
vehicle 3 to the driver’s selected set
speed 1, appear in the speedometer.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
If Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision:
앫
The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on
(컄 page 26).
앫
An intermittent warning sounds.
왘
Immediately apply the brake to avoid a
collision.
Under no circumstances should the
driver await the intermittent warning
sound before braking. See the following warning note.
The intermittent warning sound ceases
and the distance warning lamp l
goes out when the necessary distance
to the vehicle ahead is again established.
Warning!
G
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster is illuminated if the Distronic
system calculates that the distance to the
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that Distronic will not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance,
which creates a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
warning sound is intended as a final caution
in which you should intercede with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous situation. Do not wait for the operation
of the warning signal to intercede with your
own braking. This will result in potentially
dangerous emergency braking which will
not always result in an impact being avoided.
Warning!
G
Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This
corresponds to about 20% of the maximum
deceleration of your vehicle.
Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
restore the preset distance or to maintain
the set speed.
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement which could interfere with the
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
275
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system
Distronic activated
Distronic deactivated
Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system is activated or deactivated.
When you turn Distronic on, you will see
the set speed in the multifunction display
for about 5 seconds. When Distronic is
activated, the following display appears in
the multifunction display.
When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
the standard Distronic display in the multifunction display.
i For activating or deactivating the Distronic
system, see “Activating Distronic” (컄 page 277)
or see “Deactivating Distronic” (컄 page 280).
For activating or deactivating the Distance warning function, see “Distance warning function*”
(컄 page 191).
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see one of the following two
displays in the multifunction display.
1 Distronic activated
2 Set vehicle speed
1 Preceding vehicle, if detected
2 Actual distance to the preceding
vehicle
3 Preset distance threshold to the
preceding vehicle
4 Your vehicle
Cruise control lever
The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column.
276
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic
Setting the current speed
You can activate Distronic when the vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)
and 110 mph (180 km/h).
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 or depress in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 276).
When Distronic is activated the multifunction display will show a message such as
DISTRONIC 55 mph.
1 Setting current or higher speed
Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
the resistance point) or 5 mph
increments (past the resistance point)
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
2 Setting current or lower speed
Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
the resistance point) or 5 mph
increments (past the resistance point)
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
3 Deactivating Distronic
4 Activating Distronic or resuming to last
set speed
If Distronic has not been activated after
pressing the cruise control lever, you will
see the message DISTRONIC Off in the
multifunction display.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
앫
up to 2 minutes after starting the
engine
앫
when you brake
앫
when you have set the parking brake
앫
when the automatic transmission is set
to position P, R, or N
앫
if the ESP® is switched off
앫
if the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
Distronic is activated and the current
speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i If you do not take your foot off of the accelerator pedal but continue to accelerate past the
set speed, the following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
DISTRONIC Override
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in front
of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
then be determined only by the accelerator
pedal position.
277
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
You can increase the set speed in two
ways.
Adjustment in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
Warning!
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is increased in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift
the cruise control lever up to the resistance
point.
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to
the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 276).
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed increases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
G
You can increase the vehicle set speed in
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
using this feature, keep in mind that it may
take a brief moment until the vehicle has
reached the set speed.
Increase the vehicle set speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions permit.
Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
i The set speed value is increased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift
the cruise control lever up past the resistance
point.
278
왘
Briefly lift the cruise control lever up
past the resistance point in direction of
arrow 1 (컄 page 276).
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed increases in
increments of 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h).
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
speed.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed
You can reduce the set speed in two ways.
i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments
i The set speed value is decreased in
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time
you press the cruise control lever down to the
resistance point.
왘
Briefly press the cruise control lever
down to the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 276).
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed decreases in increments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h).
Adjustment in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
Warning!
G
You can decrease the vehicle set speed in
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
using this feature, keep in mind that it may
take a brief moment until the vehicle has
reached the set speed.
Decelerate the vehicle set speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions permit.
Otherwise, sudden and unexpected deceleration of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
왘
Briefly press the cruise control lever
down past the resistance point in
direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 276).
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
The vehicle set speed decreases in
increments of 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h).
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
speed.
i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you
press the cruise control lever down past the
resistance point.
279
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
G
The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions
permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the
preset speed could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
Deactivating Distronic
i The Distronic switches off automatically
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system:
앫
you step on the brake pedal
앫
you depress the parking brake pedal
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
In this case, the Distronic speed segments in the
speedometer (컄 page 274) will go out.
or
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 276).
Distronic will be deactivated. The last set
speed will be stored in memory.
i The following message appears in the multi왘
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 276).
The Distronic resumes to the last set
speed.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The last set speed or, if no speed is stored,
the current set speed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
5 seconds.
280
when
function display for approximately 5 seconds:
DISTRONIC Off.
The last stored set speed is deleted when the
engine is turned off.
앫
the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h)
앫
the ESP® is in operation
앫
the ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch (컄 page 104)
앫
the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction (컄 page 441)
앫
you set the automatic transmission to N
while driving
The Distronic speed segments in the speedometer (컄 page 274) will go out and an acoustic
warning will sound.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h)
by operation of the system. At that time the
driver must apply the brakes in order to
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to
a stop.
! Setting the automatic transmission to N
while driving cancels the Distronic. However, the
automatic transmission should not be set to N
while driving except to coast when the vehicle is
in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the Distronic. After a brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronic will resume
the last set speed.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic
You can set the specified following
distance for Distronic by varying the time
setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time setting and the current speed
of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and
sets the required following distance to the
preceding vehicle. The set distance will be
shown in the multifunction display
(컄 page 276).
Warning!
G
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
The distance setting switch for the time
setting is located on the cruise control
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column.
1 Distance setting switch
2 To decrease distance
3 To increase distance
281
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increasing distance
Driving with Distronic
Increasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a greater following
distance to the preceding vehicle.
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is required on the part of the driver. Be prepared to brake in such situations. Braking
will deactivate the Distronic system.
왘
Turn distance setting switch 1 in
direction of arrow 3.
Decreasing distance
Decreasing the distance setting tells
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the preceding vehicle.
왘
Turn distance setting switch 1 in
direction of arrow 2.
282
Warning!
G
Distronic works to maintain the speed
selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in
the same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at
your set distance). This means that:
앫
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you have changed lanes.
앫
While in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your
vehicle could then accelerate to the
previously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distance between your vehicle and those directly ahead
of it, but does not register stationary objects
in the road, e.g.:
앫
a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
앫
a disabled vehicle
앫
an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means
of steering or braking the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
Distronic will switch off, and the message
DISTRONIC currently unavailable – See
Operator’s Manual appears in the multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sensor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
sensor cover” (컄 page 414).
i If the message DISTRONIC
available
again appears during driving, the dirt (e.g.
slush) has dissolved; Distronic works again, if
you reactivate it (컄 page 277).
Turns and bends
Offset driving
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle
to brake late or unexpectedly.
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset
from your direct line of travel may not be
detected by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
283
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Lane changing
Narrow vehicles
Distance warning function*
When Distronic* is deactivated, this
function will continue to warn you when
recognizing a stationary obstacle or a
slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s
path and the danger of a collision exists:
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles traveling near the outer edges of the
lane have not yet been detected by
Distronic. There will be insufficient
distance to the vehicles ahead.
앫
The distance warning lamp l in the
instrument cluster comes on.
앫
An intermittent warning will sound if
necessary.
If these warnings are issued, you must
brake manually to maintain a safe distance
and avoid a collision with the preceding
vehicle.
When pressing the brake pedal, the warning sound ceases. The warning sound will
also cease when the distance to the
preceding vehicle is sufficient again without applying the brakes. In this case, the
distance warning lamp will also go out.
284
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
If the distance warning lamp l in the instrument cluster comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
immediate attention on the part of the driver
is required. As required by the traffic
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
around a possible obstacle. However, do not
drive by relying on the distance warning
function, as this will result in an emergency
braking application. This will not always
enable you to avoid a collision, especially
when traveling on varying road surface
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning
function. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
왘
AIRMATIC*
G
Switch on the distance warning function in the control system
(컄 page 191).
The AIRMATIC* consists of two components:
1 Symbol for activated distance warning
function
When the distance warning function is
switched on, you will see the : symbol
in the Standard display. When the distance
warning function is deactivated the
: symbol will not appear.
앫
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)*
(컄 page 286): Automatically optimizes
your vehicle’s suspension tuning.
앫
Vehicle level control* (컄 page 286):
Regulates the ride height of the vehicle.
Warning!
G
R 63 AMG only: When you turn off the
engine, the vehicle may be lowered
(컄 page 288). To avoid personal injury,
make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of
the wheel housing or under the vehicle when
you turn off the engine.
! R 63 AMG only: When you turn off the engine, the vehicle may be lowered (컄 page 288).
When parking, make sure there is sufficient
clearance under the vehicle for it to lower without making contact with the road curb for example. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.
285
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)*
The following settings are available:
Vehicle level control*
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent on:
앫
AUTO (for normal driving situations)
Indicator lamps 2 and 3 are off.
The vehicle level control automatically
regulates the ride height to
앫
road surface conditions
앫
앫
reduce fuel consumption
앫
your driving style
SPORT (for sporty driving)
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
앫
improve driving safety
앫
COMF (for comfort driving)
Indicator lamp 3 comes on.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 54).
while the vehicle is moving. The vehicle will then
reach the set level as fast as possible.
왘
Press ADS switch 1 repeatedly until
the desired suspension tuning is
reached.
The vehicle begins adjusting to the set
vehicle level as soon as the doors or
tailgate are
앫
your personal settings
The ADS switch is located on the upper
part of the center console.
i Changes to the vehicle level should be made
i The setting is stored when you turn off the
앫
engine.
or
앫
1 ADS switch
2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting
3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting
286
unlocked
opened or closed with the vehicle
unlocked
For major changes in vehicle level, the
engine must be running.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning!
G
Make sure that no one is near the wheel
housing or under the vehicle when you lower
the vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs
could become wedged into or under the
vehicle.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
lowered with all doors and the tailgate
closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door or
the tailgate is opened and will continue after
the door is closed again.
! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads,
adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause
the vehicle underbody to come in contact with
the road and result in damage to the vehicle underbody. Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to a
lower level.
The vehicle’s ride height changes by the
approximate values given in table below
according to the set level:
Level
Ride height
Raised
+ 1.97 in (+ 50 mm)
! Before jacking up the vehicle with equip-
Highway
+/- 0
ment that lifts one or more of the wheels completely off the ground, remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch.
Highspeed
- 0.78 in (- 20 mm)
! Please also note the information in the
section on towing (컄 page 517).
The vehicle lowers to highspeed level
automatically when
앫
the vehicles speed exceeds
70 mph (112 km/h)
앫
the vehicles speed is between
60 mph (96 km/h) and
70 mph (112 km/h) for longer
than 20 seconds
i The activation threshold is defined by the set
Warning!
G
suspension tuning (컄 page 286).
Basic settings (except R 63 AMG)
Adapt your speed and driving to possible
changed driving behavior of the vehicle after
changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle.
There are two settings from which to
choose:
앫
Raised level, for driving on rough roads
앫
Highway level, for driving on paved
roads in fair or better condition
i Obey local speed limits. Use prudent driving
speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
i The third available level is the highspeed
level that is set automatically.
287
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Basic settings (R 63 AMG only)
i The vehicle will be lowered by
There are two settings from which to
choose:
0.87 in (22 mm) after the engine is turned off.
앫
Raised level, for driving on rough roads
앫
Highway level, for driving on paved
roads in fair or better condition
i The third available level is the highspeed
level that is set automatically.
The vehicle lowers to highspeed level automatically when
From the raised level, the vehicle will not be not
lowered after the engine is turned off.
앫
the vehicles speed exceeds
70 mph (112 km/h)
When the engine is started, the previously
selected setting is selected again.
앫
the vehicles speed is between
60 mph (96 km/h) and
70 mph (112 km/h) for longer than 20
seconds
For information on ADS settings AUTO,
SPORT, or COMF, see “Adaptive Damping
System (ADS)*” (컄 page 286).
i Obey local speed limits. Use prudent driving
speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
ADS AUTO
ADS SPORT
ADS COMF
Raised level
+ 1.69 in (+ 43 mm)
+ 1.69 in (+ 43 mm)
+ 1.69 in (+ 43 mm)
Highway level
+/- 0
- 0.28 in (- 7 mm)
+ 0.20 in (+ 5 mm)
Highspeed level
+/- 0
- 0.28 in (- 7 mm)
+/- 0
288
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Raised level
Only choose the raised level when the road
conditions permit. Otherwise:
앫
Fuel consumption may increase.
앫
Handling characteristics of the vehicle
may be unfavorable.
The switch is located on the upper part of
the center console.
When the raised level is reached, indicator
lamp 2 comes on continuously and the
following message appears in the multifunction display:
i You can select the raised level at vehicle
speeds of up to 25 mph (40 km/h). At a higher
vehicle speed, the message
n Level selection not permitted
appears in the multifunction display.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 54).
1 Vehicle level control switch
2 Indicator lamp
If indicator lamp 2 is off:
왘
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the raised level.
i The messages can be cleared by pressing
button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
being set:
289
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Highway level
! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads,
왘
Close all doors and the tailgate.
왘
Start the engine (컄 page 54).
adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause
the vehicle underbody to come in contact with
the road and result in damage to the vehicle
underbody. Always make sure the vehicle has
sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it
to a lower level.
The switch is located on the upper part of
the center console.
When the highway level is reached, indicator lamp 2 goes out and the following
message appears in the multifunction display:
If indicator lamp 2 is on:
왘
Press switch 1 (컄 page 289).
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the highway level.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display while the level is
being set:
1 Vehicle level control switch
2 Indicator lamp
290
i The messages can be cleared by pressing
button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel.
i The vehicle level is set to highway level automatically when the vehicle speed is exceeding
25 mph (40 km/h).
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Parktronic* (Parking assist)
Warning!
Warning!
G
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always rests with the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by
the system and can damage the vehicle.
The operational function of the Parktronic
system can be affected by dirty sensors,
especially at times of snow and ice. See
“Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors”
(컄 page 414).
Interference caused by other ultrasonic
signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car
wash, or the air brakes of trucks) can cause
the system to send erratic indications, and
should be taken into consideration.
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
designed to assist the driver during
parking maneuvers. It visually and audibly
indicates the relative distance between the
vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically
activated when you
앫
The Parktronic system deactivates at
vehicle speeds exceeding approximately
11 mph (18 km/h). At lower vehicle
speeds, the Parktronic system turns on
again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates
when you set the automatic transmission
to position P or depress the parking brake
pedal.
The Parktronic system monitors the
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors
in the rear bumper.
switch on the ignition or start the
engine
and
앫
release the parking brake
and
앫
set the automatic transmission to
position D, R, or N
1 Sensors in the front bumper
291
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damaging the sensors, see
“Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors”
(컄 page 414).
! During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer
hitches).
The Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
working jackhammers, car wash or the air brakes
of trucks) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
292
Front sensors
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If the system detects an obstacle in this
range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no
longer be indicated by the system.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the
relative distance between the sensors and
an obstacle. The warning indicator for the
front area is located above the center air
vents in the dashboard. The warning indicator for the rear area is located in the rear
overhead control panel.
Front area warning indicator
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
3 Readiness indicators
Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for
either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
system is ready when the yellow readiness
indicators 3 are illuminated.
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the
seventh distance segment illuminates, you
have reached the minimum distance.
The current transmission position determines which warning indicator will be
activated.
앫
Front area: An intermittent acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of
2 seconds will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a
constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is set to position P or the
parking brake is set.
앫
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of
2 seconds will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a
constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is set to position D, P, or
the parking brake is set.
Transmission
position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
P
Neither activated
293
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Parktronic system
on/off
Switching on
왘
You can switch off the Parktronic system
manually.
The Parktronic switch is located in the
upper part of the center console.
Press Parktronic switch 1 once more.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
i The Parktronic system switches on
automatically when you switch on the ignition
(컄 page 39).
Parktronic system malfunction
If only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds,
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will automatically switch off after 20 seconds and
the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
comes on.
1 Parktronic switch
2 Indicator lamp
Switching off
왘
Press Parktronic switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
294
왘
Have the Parktronic system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible.
If only the red distance segments illuminate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g.
slush, snow or ice) or there is an interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals
(e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or
the air brakes of trucks). The Parktronic
system will automatically switch off after
20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the
Parktronic switch comes on.
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(컄 page 414).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
or
왘
Check the Parktronic system operation
at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Rear view camera*
G
앫
Make sure that no persons or animals are in
or near the area in which you are
parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they
could be injured.
there is a sudden change in temperature, e.g. if you drive into a heated
garage from the cold (lens condensation)
앫
the camera lens is dirty or covered
앫
the rear of your vehicle is damaged
Warning!
Warning!
G
The rear view camera is only an aid and may
display obstacles from a distorted perspective or inaccurately, or may not display obstacles at all. The rear view camera does not
relieve you of the responsibility to be cautious, take care and pay careful attention.
The rear view camera may not show objects
which are
Warning!
G
The rear view camera either will not function
or will not function to its full capability if
앫
very close to the rear bumper
앫
the tailgate is open
앫
under the rear bumper
앫
it is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
앫
above the tailgate handle
앫
it is night or you are parking/maneuvering your vehicle in an area where it is
very dark
앫
the camera is exposed to a very bright
white light
앫
the immediate surroundings are illuminated with fluorescent light (the display
may flicker)
You are responsible for safety at all times
and must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
in front of and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself or others.
In this case, have the position and setting of the camera checked by a qualified specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
contact a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for this purpose.
Do not use the rear view camera in these situations. Otherwise you could injure yourself
or others and/or damage property including
your vehicle while parking/maneuvering.
295
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The rear view camera is an optical parking
aid. It shows you the area behind the vehicle in the COMAND system display when
reverse gear R is engaged, for example
during parallel parking.
Switching the rear view camera
on and off
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to
position R (컄 page 197).
The rear view camera is located near the
tailgate handle.
The area behind the vehicle appears in
the COMAND system display.
i The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND system display as a mirror image, like
in the rear view mirror.
i The image from the rear view camera will
no longer be displayed if you select another
function on the COMAND system while reverse
gear R is engaged. To display the image again,
disengage and reengage reverse gear R.
1 Rear view camera
296
왘
Shift the automatic transmission to
position P, N or D to switch off the rear
view camera.
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Roof rack*
Warning!
G
Only use the roof rack when the basic
carrier bars have been completely mounted.
The left and right roof rails are only
stabilized by means of the basic carriers
being mounted.
! Load the roof rack in such a way that the
왘
Flip roof trim covers 1 open.
vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.
왘
Attach the roof rack to the attachment
points under roof trim covers 1.
Make sure
앫
you can completely raise the tilt/sliding
sunroof* (or tilt/sliding panel*) at the rear
앫
you can open the tilt/sliding sunroof* (or
tilt/sliding panel*) completely
앫
you can open the tailgate completely
Follow roof rack manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
For further information, inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached roof rack system or its load could
become detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
220 lb (100 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the
vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
1 Trim cover
297
Controls in detail
Loading
Loading instructions
Warning!
The gross vehicle weight which is the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,
spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers, and luggage/cargo must never
exceed the load limit and the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle as
specified on the placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 526). In addition, the load must be distributed in such a
way so that the weight on each axle never
exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The
GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on the certification label which can
be found on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 526).
G
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible using cargo tie-down
rings and fastening materials appropriate
for the weight and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or
sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
thrown around inside the vehicle, and can
cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the
items are securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a
collision or sudden maneuver, always use
tie-down rings and, if so equipped, always
use the partition net* when transporting
cargo.
Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
298
For more information, see “Tire and Loading Information” (컄 page 377).
Load distribution
The handling characteristics of a fully
loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load
distribution. It is therefore recommended
to load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Loading
Please pay attention to and comply with
the following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
앫
앫
Always place items being carried
against front or rear seat backrests,
and fasten them as securely as possible.
The heaviest portion of the cargo
should always be kept as low as possible against front or rear seat backrests.
i The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. The expanded cargo compartment (컄 page 301) should only be used for
items which do not fit in the cargo compartment
alone.
Cargo tie-down rings
Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo
tie-down rings.
Cargo compartment
Four cargo tie-down rings are located in
the cargo compartment.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even
load on all rings with rope of sufficient
strength to hold down the cargo.
i While the partition net* (컄 page 308) will
help protect you from smaller objects, it cannot
prevent the movement of large, heavier objects
into the passenger compartment in an accident,
during hard braking, or sudden maneuvers. Such
items must be properly secured using the cargo
tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.
1 Cargo tie-down ring
299
Controls in detail
Loading
Second seat-row
Third seat-row
Two cargo tie-down rings are located in the
footwell behind the driver’s and passenger
seat.
Two cargo tie-down rings are located in the
footwell behind the second-row seats.
1 Cargo tie-down ring
1 Cargo tie-down ring
Hooks
Two hooks are located on the rear compartment trim panels, one on each side.
1 Hook
Use the hooks to secure light weight items
only. The maximum permissible weight per
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).
300
Controls in detail
Loading
Expanding cargo compartment
Warning!
You can separately fold each seat of the
rear passenger compartment to expand
the cargo compartment.
Warning!
G
G
Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
When expanding the cargo compartment,
always fully fold the corresponding seats
and, if so equipped, always use the partition
net* (컄 page 308) when transporting cargo.
! When the second-row seats are folded
forward, the front seats may not be moved to the
rearmost position. Otherwise you could damage
the front and second-row seats.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in
the upright position.
Expanding cargo compartment in part
In an accident, during hard braking or
sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
thrown around inside the vehicle, and can
cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the
items are securely fastened in the vehicle.
왘
Always use the cargo tie down rings
(컄 page 299).
Folding third-row seats
Completely lower the head restraints of
the third-row seats.
1 Seat belt holder
2 Release handle
3 Seat backrest
왘
Place seat belt in seat belt holder 1.
왘
Pull release handle 2 on seat
backrest 3 in direction of arrow.
컄컄
Seat backrest 3 is released.
i The third-row head restraints are adjusted in
the same manner as the head restraints of the
second-row seats (컄 page 139).
301
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
Expanding cargo compartment fully
Warning
3 Seat backrest
4 Seat cushion
5 Strap
왘
Move seat backrest 3 slightly forward.
Seat cushion 4 is released and folds
forward automatically.
왘
Fold seat backrest 3 to a horizontal
position.
i Strap 5 serves to pull up the seat backrest
when bringing the third-row seats back to their
original position (컄 page 304).
302
G
Folded second-row seats are intended to
serve as cargo compartment expansion in
conjunction with folded third-row seats
only. Do not fold the second-row seats and
allow third-row seat occupants to use folded
second-row seats as a footrest while driving.
Third-row seat occupants must, like all vehicle occupants, keep both feet on the floor in
front of their seat. Otherwise, occupants
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If occupants slide under it, the belt would
apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
Do not fold the second-row seats and allow
third-row seat occupants to use folded
second-row seats as a table while driving.
Objects placed on folded second-row seats
may come loose during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an accident and be thrown
around in the vehicle interior. Objects
thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
i When folding both rows of seats, it is important that you fold the second-row seats first, and
then fold the third-row seats.
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding second-row seats
왘
! When the second-row seats are folded
forward, the front seats may not be moved to the
rearmost position. Otherwise you could damage
the front and second-row seats.
왘
Move the seat to be folded to its rearmost position (컄 page 138).
왘
Remove the rear center console*, if so
equipped (컄 page 323).
i The rear center console* can remain
installed, if installed in the most forward position
(컄 page 325). However, the cargo compartment
floor will then not be an even plane.
The storage compartment and the cupholders in
the rear center console* are only illuminated,
when the rear center console* is installed in the
most rearward position (position 0)
(컄 page 325).
Remove the head restraint from the
respective second-row seat
(컄 page 141).
1 Seat backrest
2 Seat cushion
3 Release lever
왘
Place the head restraint on the seat
cushion.
왘
Relieve the load on seat backrest 1
and pull release lever 3 past the
resistance point in direction of arrow
as far as it will go.
왘
Fold seat backrest 1 forward until it
fully rests on seat cushion 2 in a
horizontal position.
1 Seat backrest
2 Seat cushion
왘
Push down on folded seat backrest 1
until seat cushion 2 engages in seat
base.
Seat and seat backrest are unlocked.
303
Controls in detail
Loading
Folding third-row seats
왘
Place seat belt in seat belt holder 1.
i Strap 8 serves to pull up the seat backrest
왘
왘
Pull release handle 2 on seat
backrest 3 in direction of arrow.
when bringing the third-row seats back to their
original position (컄 page 304).
Completely lower the head restraints of
the third-row seats.
Seat backrest 3 is released.
i The third-row head restraints are adjusted in
the same manner as the head restraints of the
second-row seats (컄 page 139).
왘
왘
Slowly move seat backrest 3 forward.
Seat cushion 7 is released and folds
forward automatically.
Fold seat cushion 7 to a horizontal
position.
Guide pin 5 must engage in recess 4
of seat backrest 6.
i The second-row seats must be in their
rearmost position (컄 page 138).
왘
Fold seat backrest 3 to a horizontal
position.
Returning seats to their original position
1 Seat belt holder
2 Release handle
3 Seat backrest
304
3 Seat backrest (third-row seat)
4 Recess (on second-row seat backrest)
5 Guide pin (on third-row seat cushion)
6 Seat backrest (second-row seat)
7 Seat cushion (third-row seat)
8 Strap
왘
Carry out the steps described on
(컄 page 301) to (컄 page 304) in
reverse order.
왘
Make sure all seats are properly locked
in position.
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
G
Make sure
앫
the seats are properly locked
앫
the seat backrests are in an upright position and are properly locked
A second-row seat is properly locked only
when lock status indicator 1 is in hinged
position and red marking 2 is barely
visible.
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
locked, the seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide under the seat belt during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide under
it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen
or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
Second-row seat unlocked
Second-row seat locked
1 Lock status indicator
2 Red marking
1 Lock status indicator
2 Red marking
When the seat is unlocked
When the seat is locked
앫
lock status indicator 1 is extended
앫
앫
red marking 2 is clearly visible
lock status indicator 1 is in hinged
position
왘
When the seat is unlocked, push seat
backrest back until the seat audibly
engages.
앫
red marking 2 is barely visible
305
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing blind
Cargo compartment cover blind*
The cargo compartment cover blind can be
installed behind the third-row seats or the
second-row seats.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind
installed, do not pile luggage higher than the
lower edges of the rear side windows.
i The cargo compartment cover blind has two
extensions which are connected to the cargo
compartment cover blind by cords.
The cargo compartment cover blind must be
extended for installation behind the second-row
seats (컄 page 306).
Blind installed behind third-row seats
1 Handle
2 Mount
Rolling out blind
왘
Pull blind on handle 1 across the
cargo compartment.
왘
Guide blind into mounts 2 and
release.
Rolling up blind
왘
306
Disengage blind and guide retraction
by its handle 1.
Blind installed behind second-row seats
1 Release button
2 Blind
왘
Roll the blind up.
왘
Push release button 1.
왘
Pull blind 2 to the left against the
spring pressure until the spring in the
blind audibly engages.
왘
Remove the blind.
Controls in detail
Loading
왘
Installing blind
왘
For installation behind second-row
seats, install the blind extensions
(컄 page 307).
! For installation behind third-row seats,
the blind extensions must not be installed.
Otherwise, the blind could be damaged.
Remove mount cover by pulling
its upper edge out of side trim in
direction of arrow.
i To avoid loss of the mount covers, keep
them in a safe place while not in use, e.g. the
glove box.
왘
Place left side of blind 2 (컄 page 306)
in left mount.
왘
Position right side of blind 2
(컄 page 306) over right mount.
왘
Press release button 1 (컄 page 306)
and guide blind 2 (컄 page 306) into
mount.
1 Blind
2 Extension
3 Guidings
4 Guide pins
왘
Extending blind
Guide pins 4 must point directly at
guidings 3.
i The cargo compartment cover blind has two
왘
Remove the covers from the mounts in
side trim.
왘
Press on cover at its lower edge as
indicated by arrow.
The mount cover’s upper edge flips
up.
extensions which are connected to the cargo
compartment cover blind by cords.
The cargo compartment cover blind must be
extended for installation behind the second-row
seats.
Position extension 2 over blind 1.
왘
Turn extension 2 and blind 1 in opposite directions as indicated by the arrows.
Guide pins 4 must engage in
guidings 3.
컄컄
307
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄When not
in use, you can attach the cover
blind extensions to the cover blind.
Partition net*
Warning!
G
Make sure the partition net is properly
engaged at top and bottom position and the
tightening belts are securely fastened.
Use of the partition net is a particularly
important safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat
backrests with smaller objects. For your
safety, always use the partition net when
transporting cargo.
The partition net can be installed in two locations:
Never use a damaged partition net.
5 Extension guide rail
6 Mounting
왘
With the cargo compartment cover
installed behind third-row seats, insert
extension guide rail 5 into
mounting 6.
왘
Push extension into mounting 6 as far
as it will go.
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
objects being thrown around in the occupant compartment during a collision or
sudden maneuver, always use partition net
when transporting cargo.
The partition net cannot prevent the movement of large, heavier objects into the passenger compartment in an accident. Such
items must be properly secured using the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor (컄 page 299).
Passenger use of seats behind installed
partition net is restricted because of the
footwell being taken up by the net.
308
1 Holder behind B-pillar
2 Holder behind C-pillar
Controls in detail
Loading
앫
With the cargo compartment expanded
in part (컄 page 301), use holders
behind C-pillars 2 and the cargo
tie-down rings in the third-row footwell
(컄 page 300).
앫
With the cargo compartment fully
expanded (컄 page 302), use holders
behind B-pillars 1 and the cargo
tie-down rings in the second-row
footwell (컄 page 300).
왘
Open the zipper on the partition net
package.
왘
Roll out the partition net.
1 Holder
2 Partition net bar
왘
Unfold the partition net.
왘
The partition net bars must audibly engage.
Hang partition net bar 2 on holder 1
as indicated by the arrow.
왘
Push partition net bar 2 forward into
holder 1 in direction of arrow.
Installing the partition net
Pulling the partition net tight
Partition net installed behind the B-pillar
Belt hook attached in the second-row
footwell
1 Belt hook
2 Cargo tie-down ring
3 Tightening belt
왘
Hook belt hook 1 into cargo tie-down
ring 2 in direction of arrow.
왘
Pull tightening belt 3 by the loose end
in direction of arrow until the partition
net is pulled tight.
왘
After driving a short distance, make
sure the partition net is still tight and, if
necessary, pull it tight again.
309
Controls in detail
Loading
Loosening the partition net
Belt hook attached in the second-row
footwell
1 Buckle
2 Belt hook
3 Cargo tie-down ring
왘
Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
buckle 1 upward in direction of arrow.
왘
Remove belt hook 2 from cargo
tie-down ring 3.
310
Removing and storing the partition net
왘
Take partition net bar 2 out of
holder 1, see “Installing the partition
net” (컄 page 309).
왘
Press the red button on the upper and
lower partition net bar.
왘
Fold the partition net.
왘
Roll up the partition net.
왘
Close the zipper on partition net
package.
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Storage compartments
Warning!
G
Glove box/CD changer*
Closing the glove box
i Depending on vehicle equipment, a
왘
CD changer* and an AUX-socket are located in
the glove box.
Releasing CD changer*
Push glove box lid 2 up to close.
To help avoid personal injury during a
collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put
luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment
if possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo
higher than the seat backs.
Always use partition net* when transporting
cargo. Partition net* cannot secure hard or
heavy objects.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
1 Glove box lid release
2 Glove box lid
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
1 Release button
2 CD changer
3 AUX-socket
Opening the glove box
왘
Open the glove box.
왘
왘
Press release button 1.
앫
braking
앫
vehicle maneuvers
앫
an accident
Pull lid release 1 in direction of arrow.
Glove box lid 2 opens downward.
CD changer 2 is released and swings
down automatically.
For information on CD changer operation,
see separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
311
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing CD changer*
왘
Take the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 478).
Storage compartment in front center
console
1 CD changer
왘
Gently push CD changer 1 up in
direction of arrow until it engages.
For information on CD changer operation,
see separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
Locking and unlocking the glove box
separately
You can lock the glove box separately, e.g.
when the vehicle is in the shop for service.
1 Unlocking glove box
2 Locking glove box
왘
Insert mechanical key into glove box
lock.
왘
Turn mechanical key to position 2 to
lock the glove box.
왘
Turn mechanical key to position 1 to
unlock the glove box.
i The glove box can only be locked or
unlocked with the mechanical key.
312
1 Cover
2 Chrome label
왘
Tab lightly on chrome label 2 of
cover 1.
Cover 1 swings open.
Additional storage compartment in
front center console
A storage compartment is located in front
of the armrest in the front center console.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Front armrest storage compartments
Two storage compartments are located below the armrest. Both can be opened separately.
3 Storage tray/telephone compartment
4 Coinholders
1 Cover
2 Chrome label
왘
Tab lightly on chrome label 2 of
cover 1.
Cover 1 swings open.
i The storage compartment also contains a
power outlet (컄 page 322).
i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking
package*, the storage compartment contains an
ashtray with cigarette lighter (컄 page 319) instead.
Opening the storage compartment
왘
1 Button to open storage tray/telephone
compartment
2 Button to open storage compartment
Opening the storage tray
i The Roadside Assistance button •
왘
(컄 page 333) and the Information button ¡
(컄 page 334) are located in storage tray 3.
Press button 2 and lift up armrest.
Press button 1 and lift up armrest.
Two coin holders 4 are located in front of
storage tray 3.
313
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear armrest storage compartment*
Rear storage compartments
A storage compartment is located in the
armrest of the rear center console*
between the second-row seats.
Two storage compartments are located in
front of the second-row seats.
Lower storage compartment
1 Storage compartment cover
2 Release button
Upper storage compartment
왘
Press button under armrest and lift up
armrest.
i Depending on vehicle equipment, the upper
storage compartment may be replaced by a
control panel, for example in vehicles with rear
climate control* (컄 page 229) or rear automatic
climate control* (컄 page 245).
왘
Press release button 2 on storage
compartment cover 1.
The storage compartment cover opens
automatically.
i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking
package*, the storage compartment contains an
ashtray (컄 page 320).
314
Controls in detail
Useful features
Third-row storage compartment
Storage compartments are located on the
side trims of the third-row seats.
1 Storage compartment
i If your vehicle is equipped with a
3-zone automatic climate control*, the storage
compartment is replaced by an adjustable air
vent (컄 page 249).
Parcel nets
Warning!
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
G
Do not place objects with a combined
weight of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the
parcel net on the back of the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the Occupant
Classification System OCS (컄 page 88) may
not be able to properly approximate the
occupant weight category.
1 Parcel net
Parcel nets are intended for storing
light-weight items only.
Parcel nets on front seat backrests
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
be thrown around inside the vehicle and
cause injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
1 Parcel net
315
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in cargo compartment
Cup holders
Warning!
1 Parcel net
2 Clips
3 Mounting openings
4 Mounting lug
5 Rail
왘
Take parcel net 1 out of lower
clips 2.
왘
Push rails 5 up slightly in direction of
arrows.
왘
Pull mounting lugs 4 out of mounting
openings 3.
왘
Install parcel net 1 in reverse order.
316
G
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury.
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Keep in mind that objects placed in a cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Cup holders in front center console
A cupholder and a card/ticket holder with
bottle opener are located in the front
center console.
When not in use, keep rear cup holders
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident.
1 Cup holders
Controls in detail
Useful features
Card/ticket holder with bottle opener
A card/ticket holder and a bottle opener
are located in the cup holder of the front
center console.
The bottle opener is located underneath
the card/ticket holder and has openers for
crown caps and screw caps.
Reinserting
Cards and tickets can be inserted into the
slot in the middle. The card/ticket holder
is removable and has a bottle opener
underneath.
Removing
1 Tabs
2 Card/ticket holder
2 Opener for screw caps
3 Opener for crown caps
i With the card/ticket holder removed, you
can also take the rubber inlet from the cupholder
for cleaning.
왘
Guide tabs 1 into openings.
왘
Guide rear of card/ticket holder 2
into the cupholder.
1 Card/ticket holder with bottle opener
왘
Lift card/ticket holder 1 at the rear
and take it out.
317
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in front of second-row seats
왘
A cupholder is located in front of the
second-row seats.
Open storage compartment
cover 1 (컄 page 314).
왘
Press storage compartment cover 1
down in direction of arrow as far as it
will go.
! Close the cup holder when not in use and
before folding the second-row seats.
i Vehicles with rear center console*
(컄 page 323) are not equipped with cupholders
in front of the second-row seats.
Closing cup holder
왘
Make sure you have removed all
containers from the cup holder.
왘
Push cup holder 2 in until it engages.
왘
Close storage compartment cover.
Cupholders in rear center console*
Cupholders are located on the rear center
console* between the second-row seats.
Opening cup holder
1 Storage compartment cover
2 Cup holder
왘
1 Storage compartment cover
318
Pull out cup holder 2 in direction of
arrow as far as it will go.
1 Cup holders
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cupholders in third-row side trim
Cupholders are located in the side trims of
the third-row seats.
Ashtrays*
Ashtray in the front center console
Your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray
and a cigarette lighter (컄 page 321)
located in the front center console and an
ashtray located in front of the second-row
seats (컄 page 320).
Opening the ashtray
왘
Open cover 1 (컄 page 312).
i If your vehicle is not equipped with a
smoking package*, it has a storage
compartment (컄 page 312) with a power outlet
(컄 page 322) instead.
1 Cup holder
1 Cover plate
2 Ashtray insert
319
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing ashtray insert
Warning!
G
Remove ashtray insert only with vehicle
standing still. Set the parking brake to
secure vehicle from movement. Set automatic transmission to P. With the automatic
transmission set to P, turn off the engine.
왘
Rear seat ashtray (second row)
Removing ashtray insert
i Vehicles with rear center console*
왘
Open ashtray cover 1.
왘
Press ashtray cover 1 down in
direction of arrow as far as it will go.
(컄 page 323) are not equipped with an ashtray
in front of the second-row seats.
! Close the ashtray when not in use and before folding the second-row seats.
Opening the ashtray
Grip ashtray insert 2 on the sides and
pull it out upwards.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘
Insert ashtray insert 2 and push down
until the ball catch engages.
1 Ashtray cover
2 Ashtray insert
왘
Close ashtray cover plate 1.
왘
1 Ashtray cover
2 Ashtray insert
320
왘
Open ashtray cover 1 (컄 page 312).
왘
Press ashtray cover 1 down in
direction of arrow as far as it will go.
Push on ashtray insert 2 and pull it
out upwards.
Reinstalling ashtray insert
왘
Insert ashtray insert 2 into opening.
왘
Push down ashtray insert 2 until it
engages.
왘
Close ashtray cover 1.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter*
Warning!
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
Hold the knob only.
Make sure that any children traveling with
you do injure themselves or start a fire with
the hot cigarette lighter.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
1 Cover plate
2 Cigarette lighter
왘
Open cover plate 1 (컄 page 319).
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 2.
The cigarette lighter will pop out automatically when hot.
왘
Take out cigarette lighter 2.
! The lighter socket can accommodate 12V
DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum of
85 W) designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, however,
that connecting accessories to the lighter socket
(for example extensive connecting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit properly)
can damage the lighter socket. With the socket
damaged, the lighter may no longer be able to be
placed in the heating (pushed-in) position, or the
lighter may pop out too early with the lighter not
hot enough.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC electrical accessories designed for use with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the
12V power outlets (컄 page 322) in your vehicle
whenever possible.
! The cigarette lighter is not designed for use
with the electric air pump (컄 page 501). Use a
power outlet (컄 page 322) for electric air pump
operation.
i If the engine is off, and the cigarette lighter
is being used extensively, the vehicle battery
may become discharged.
321
Controls in detail
Useful features
Power outlets
! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle,
make sure that the maximum current drawn
does not exceed 55 A.
i The power outlets can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
of 240 W.
If the engine is off and the power outlets are
being used extensively, the vehicle battery may
become discharged.
i You can use the power outlets in the cargo
compartment or in the second seat row even if
the ignition is switched off.
An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the
vehicle’s electrical voltage does not fall below a
minimum level. If the voltage drops to this minimum level, the power outlets are automatically
switched off. This ensures that enough power
remains to start the engine.
322
Power outlets are located
앫
in the additional storage compartment
in front center console (컄 page 322)
앫
in the second-row footwell
(컄 page 323)
앫
on the right-hand side of the cargo
compartment (컄 page 323)
Power outlet in front center console
1 Cover plate
2 Power outlet cover
왘
Open cover plate 1 (컄 page 312).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Pull out cover 2 and insert electrical
plug (cigarette lighter type).
i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking
package*, the storage compartment contains an
ashtray with cigarette lighter (컄 page 319)
instead.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Power outlet in second-row footwell
Power outlet in cargo compartment
Rear center console*
The rear center console is located between
the second-row seats.
The rear center console contains:
앫
Storage compartment (컄 page 314)
앫
Cupholder (컄 page 318)
앫
DVD-player* (see separate COMAND
operating instructions)
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
i When fully expanding the cargo compart-
왘
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigarette lighter type).
왘
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigarette lighter type).
ment, the rear center console has to be removed
from the vehicle in order for the cargo compartment floor to be an even plane (컄 page 302).
323
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘
Removing
Warning!
! To prevent damage to the rear center
console and/or its components, make sure the
storage compartment (컄 page 314) and the
DVD-console lid* (see separate COMAND operating instructions) are closed before removing
the rear center console.
i Remove all items from the storage compart-
ment (컄 page 314) of the rear center console to
reduce the weight of the rear center console.
324
The front part of center console 1 is
released from base 3.
G
Remove all containers that may be stored in
the cupholders of the rear center console.
Otherwise liquids could spill on vehicle
occupants and/or vehicle equipment. Hot
liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may
cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Pull release handle 2.
1 Rear center console
2 Release handle
3 Rear center console base
4 Folding back
5 Handle
6 Anchorage points
왘
Lift center console 1 in direction of
arrow 4 and hold it there.
왘
While holding center console 1 up,
grip handle 5.
왘
Lift center console 1 at rear
handle 5 to release the center console from anchorage points 6.
왘
Take center console 1 out of the vehicle.
i Rear center console base 3 cannot be
removed.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Installing
Warning!
G
The rear center console must be properly installed on the center console base. Driving
with the rear center console not properly installed on the rear center console base may
cause the rear center console to come loose
and be thrown around in the vehicle interior,
causing injury to vehicle occupants during
앫
braking
앫
vehicle maneuvers
앫
an accident
1 Latch (position 1)
2 Latch (position 0)
3 Rear center console base
4 Anchorage point (position 1)
5 Anchorage point (position 0)
3 Rear center console base
6 Rear center console
왘
Position center console 6 above
base 3.
왘
You can install the rear center console in
two different positions. In the most forward position (position 1) you can expand
the cargo compartment fully (컄 page 302)
without removing the rear center console.
Insert the tabs at rear of center
console 6 into anchorage points 4
or 5 on base 3.
왘
Guide front of center console 6 down
towards base 3.
i The storage compartment and the cupholders in the rear center console are only illuminated, when the rear center console is installed in
the most rearward position (position 0).
왘
Center console 6 must rest on
base 3.
Press down on front of center
console 6 until it audibly engages in
latch 1 or 2.
325
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
Switching on
Switching off
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
왘
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the
direction of arrow 1.
The stalk is located on the lower left-hand
side of the steering wheel.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 3 comes on.
i The steering wheel heating is temporarily
suspended while indicator lamp 3 remains on
when
1 Switching on
2 Switching off
3 Indicator lamp
326
앫
the temperature of the vehicle interior is
above 86°F (30°C)
앫
the temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95°F (35°C)
When these conditions do not apply anymore,
steering wheel heating continues.
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the
direction of arrow 2.
The heated steering wheel is switched
off. Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
i Indicator lamp 3 flashes or goes out
앫
in case of power surge or undervoltage
앫
in case of a steering wheel heating malfunction
i The steering wheel heating switches off
automatically when you remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch or, on vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*, when you switch off the ignition
(컄 page 39) and open the driver’s door.
For information on the steering wheel, see
“Multifunction steering wheel”
(컄 page 160).
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle.
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for information on the installation of an
approved external antenna. Refer to the
radio transmitter operation instructions
regarding use of an external antenna.
G
Only operate the COMAND system1 if road,
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just
30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your
vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
i Various mobile phone cradles can be
installed in the front center armrest, see
separate installation instructions for the mobile
phone cradle. These mobile phone cradles can
be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
The functions and services available to you while
using the mobile phone depend on your service
provider and the type of mobile phone you are
using. See also separate operating manual for
instructions on how to use the mobile phone.
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
cradle, you can operate the telephone
using the following devices:
앫
mobile phone keypad
앫
COMAND system (see separate operating instructions)
앫
buttons s and t on the multifunction steering wheel (컄 page 160)
앫
Voice Control* (see separate operating
instructions)
Observe all legal requirements.
327
Controls in detail
Useful features
Please note that these functions are only
available with Mercedes-Benz approved
mobile phones. Please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for information on features available for your mobile phone of choice.
왘
If applicable, remove the cover for the
external antenna connection from the
back of the mobile phone and store it in
a safe place. Be sure to comply with the
mobile phone’s operating instructions
as well.
The cradle is located in the front center
armrest.
왘
328
The mobile phone is connected to the
network via the external antenna.
The battery is charged depending on its
charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The
charge procedure will be indicated in
the mobile phone’s display.
Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
cradle
! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along
with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the
mobile phone cradle.
Push the top of the mobile phone in
direction of arrow 1, until the lug on
the mobile phone release button
engages.
The mobile phone is linked to the
hands-free device and the multifunction steering wheel.
Open telephone compartment
(컄 page 313).
Once the mobile phone has been inserted
in the mobile phone cradle, you have to
use the hands-free device to respond
during phone calls.
왘
Example illustration
1 Inserting the mobile phone
2 Connector contact
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘
Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
into connector contact 2 on
cradle 3.
You can place or receive phone calls. You
can control other functions of the mobile
phone via the control system (컄 page 193)
or COMAND system, see separate operating instructions.
i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the
mobile phone remains switched on for approx.
10 minutes. If you place or receive a call during
this time, the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has been completed.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Removing mobile phone from mobile
phone cradle
Changing mobile phone cradle
If you require a different cradle for your
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
before installing a new one.
Removing an existing mobile phone
cradle
왘
Press release button in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.
Installing a different mobile phone
cradle
Example illustration
1 Release catch for mobile phone
2 Mobile phone cradle
i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
flip top before removing from the cradle while
a call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be
disconnected.
왘
Press release catch in direction of
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of
mobile phone cradle 2.
Example illustration
Example illustration
1 To release the mobile phone cradle
2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
3 Mobile phone cradle
1 Contact plate
2 Recesses
3 Mobile phone cradle
왘
Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
왘
Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
until it engages.
329
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid*
The Tele Aid system
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance
call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete
either of these steps will result in a system that
is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation,
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a
user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock and
more.
330
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
앫
automatic and manual emergency
앫
roadside assistance
앫
information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage are available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted by using the volume control on
the COMAND system headunit or on the
multifunction steering wheel. To raise, turn
the rotary volume control on the COMAND
system headunit clockwise or press
button æ on the multifunction steering
wheel. To lower, turn the rotary volume
control on the COMAND system headunit
counterclockwise or press button ç on
the multifunction steering wheel.
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
i The SOS button is located in the overhead
control panel (컄 page 332).
The Roadside Assistance button •
(컄 page 333) and the Information
button ¡ (컄 page 334) are located below
the center armrest cover.
! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the GPS (Global
Positioning System) satellites for vehicle
location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by
other means.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
System self-check
Emergency calls
the COMAND system audio is muted and the
selected mode (radio, CD etc.) pauses.
The optional cellular phone (if installed) inserted
in cradle switches off. If you must use this
phone, we recommend that you use it only with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Remove the phone from the cradle and place the
call. The navigation* system (if engaged) will
continue to run. The display in the instrument
cluster is available for use, and spoken commands are only available by pressing the
RPT button on the COMAND system. A pop-up
window will appear in the COMAND system display to indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress.
After the Tele Aid call has ended, the optional
cellular phone inserted in the cradle switches on
again. A PIN entry might be necessary.
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
malfunctions are detected and indicated
(the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • and the
Information button ¡ stay on longer
than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
message Tele Aid inoperative appears
in the multifunction display.
An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which
the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or air bags deploy.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on
the Information button remain illuminated
continuously in red and/or the message
Tele Aid inoperative is displayed in the
multifunction display after the system
self-check, a malfunction in the system has
been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See (컄 page 332) for
instructions on initiating an emergency call
manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp on the SOS button will
begin to flash. The message
Connecting call appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message Call connected
appears in the multifunction display.
All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number
and color are generated.
331
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon
after the emergency call has been initiated. The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
The Tele Aid system is available if
앫
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
앫
vehicle battery power is available
앫
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the Response
Center
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means.
Initiating an emergency call manually
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
The cover opens.
왘
332
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals
from the GPS satellite network and pass the
information on to the Response Center.
Briefly press on cover 1.
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they
receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle
occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
The Roadside Assistance button • is
located below the center armrest cover.
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
i While the call is connected you can change
to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV
button on the COMAND system headunit.
1 Roadside Assistance button •
왘
Open the storage tray (컄 page 313).
왘
Press and hold button 1 (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for
assistance.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
multifunction display.
333
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For
services such as labor and/or towing,
charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside
Assistance Manual for more information.
The following is only available in the USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
i The indicator lamp on the Roadside
Information button ¡
Assistance button • remains illuminated in
red for approximately 10 seconds during the
system self-check after switching on the ignition
(together with the SOS button and the
Information button ¡).
The Information button ¡ is located
below the center armrest cover.
See system self-check (컄 page 331) if the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance
button • is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network was not available).
The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated
using the t button on the multifunction
steering wheel or the END button on the
COMAND system headunit.
334
1 Information button ¡
왘
Open the storage tray (컄 page 313).
왘
Press and hold button 1 (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and
location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
i While the call is connected, you can change
to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV
button on the COMAND system headunit.
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation
of your vehicle, the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or
Mercedes-Benz USA products and services
is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
i The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red for
approximately 10 seconds during the system
self-check after switching on the ignition
(together with the SOS button and the Roadside
Assistance button •).
See system self-check (컄 page 331) if the
indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays
on longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call failed appears in the
multifunction display.
! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
after pressing one of the buttons or remain
illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid
system has detected a malfunction or the
service is not currently active, and may not
initiate a call. Visit your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center and have the
system checked or contact the Response Center
at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as
possible.
Information calls can be terminated using
the t button on the multifunction steering
wheel or the END button on the COMAND
system headunit.
335
Controls in detail
Useful features
Call priority
Remote door unlock
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are
active, an Emergency call is still possible.
In this case, the Emergency call will take
priority and override all other active calls.
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
왘
i The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
calls can only be terminated by a Response
Center or Customer Assistance Center representative, whereas Roadside Assistance and
Information calls can also be terminated using
the t button on the multifunction steering
wheel or the END button on the COMAND
system headunit.
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or
the system does not reset, contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer
Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.
336
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
왘
Then return to your vehicle at the time
arranged with the Response Center
and pull the tailgate recessed handle
for a minimum of 20 seconds until the
SOS button is flashing.
The message Connecting call
appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i The remote door unlock feature is
available if the relevant cellular phone network is
available.
The SOS button will flash and the message
Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center
specialist may attempt to establish voice contact
with the vehicle occupants.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center,
you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the
tailgate recessed handle again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered
incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Response Center will
contact the local law enforcement and
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
provided to law enforcement.
i When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically
to the Response Center. For more information,
see “Anti-theft systems” (컄 page 107).
Garage door opener*
The integrated remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices. It provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held remote
controls used to operate devices such as
garage door openers, gate openers, or
other devices compatible with HomeLink®
or some other systems.
Before the integrated remote control can
be used, it must be programmed to the
garage door opener, gate operator or other
device you wish to operate. See the following instructions for programming information.
Interior rear view mirror with integrated
remote control
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
Needed for programming (not part of
vehicle equipment):
5
Hand-held remote control of
garage door opener, gate
operator or other device
6
Hand-held remote control
button
337
Controls in detail
Useful features
Warning!
G
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming
a garage door opener, the door moves up or
down. When programming a gate operator,
the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as required
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
– signaling the door to stop and reverse –
does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
338
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide
(CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Programming the integrated remote
control
Step 1:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed a
signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to
step 3.
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time,
press and hold the two outer signal
transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and
release them only when indicator
lamp 1 begins to flash after approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the
button for longer than 30 seconds).
This procedure erases any previous
settings for all three channels and initializes the memory.
If you later wish to program a second
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter
buttons, do not repeat this step and
begin directly with step 3.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 3:
Step 5:
Rolling code programming
왘
왘
To train a garage door opener (or other
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to
train approximately 2 to 5 in
(5 to12 cm) away from the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be programmed, while keeping indicator
lamp 1 in view.
Step 6:
왘
Step 4:
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control
button 6 and the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
release the buttons until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
first time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already been
programmed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds.
After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
the hand-held remote control button
and the signal transmitter button.
Press and hold the just-trained signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe indicator lamp 1.
If indicator lamp 1 stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the respective signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and
released.
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
continue with programming steps 8 through 12
as your garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
Step 8:
왘
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the
“training” button may also be referred
to as “learn”or “smart” button. If there
is difficulty locating the transmitting
button, refer to the garage door opener
Operator’s Manual.
컄컄
Step 7:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
339
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄Step
왘
9:
Press the “training” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
Step 12:
Step 4:
왘
왘
Press and hold the signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully trained.
왘
While still holding down the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this
sequence on the hand-held remote
control until the frequency signal has
been learned. Upon successful training, indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds.
왘
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the
following step.
Step 10:
왘
Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and release
the programmed signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
same signal transmitter button a
second time to complete the training
process.
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
signal transmitter button a third time to complete the training process.
340
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Upon completion of programming the
Operation of integrated remote control
Programming tips
integrated remote control, make sure you retain
the hand-held remote control that came with the
garage door opener, gate operator or other
device. You may need it for use in other vehicles,
for future programming of an integrated
remote control, or simply for continued use as a
hand-held remote control to operate the respective device in other situations.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter
button (2, 3 or 4) to activate the
remote controlled device.
If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are
some helpful tips:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press and hold the desired signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
Do not release the button.
왘
Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the signal transmitter button, proceed
with programming starting with step 3.
Check the frequency of the hand-held
remote control 5 (typically located on
the reverse side of the remote).
The integrated remote control is compatible with radio-frequency devices
operating between 280-390 MHz.
앫
Put a new battery in hand-held remote
control 5. This will increase the likelihood of the hand-held remote control
sending a faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.
앫
While performing step 3, hold
hand-held remote control 5 at different lengths and angles from the signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying
angles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
(5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Reprogramming a single signal
transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
앫
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Simultaneously press and hold outer
signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
341
Controls in detail
Useful features
앫
앫
If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
programming steps again using that
other hand-held remote control. Make
sure new batteries are in the hand-held
remote control before beginning the
procedure.
Straighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This
may help improve transmitting and/or
receiving signals.
i Certain types of garage door openers are
incompatible with the integrated remote control.
If you should experience further difficulties with
programming the integrated remote control,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service
(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
i USA only:
Compass
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Calling up the compass
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the AIRMATIC/Compass menu
appears in the multifunction display.
The compass displays the direction
into which the vehicle is currently traveling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W or NW.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
342
왘
Example for compass display on vehicles
equipped with AIRMATIC*
i If your vehicle is not equipped with
AIRMATIC*, the multifunction display will show
the compass only.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i The presence of buildings, bridges, power
lines and large antenna masts can influence the
displayed values. Metallic or magnetic objects in
or on the vehicle can influence the accuracy of
the compass.
Floormats
Warning!
G
To make sure the display is correct, the
compass must be set to the proper
geographic zone (컄 page 186). It may also
be necessary to calibrate the compass
(컄 page 187).
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
i If the compass is not calibrated or its func-
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper function of the pedals.
tion is impaired by outside influences, the message Compass - - - appears in the
multifunction display.
Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal movement.
1 Retainer pin
2 Eyelet
Removing
왘
Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1.
왘
Remove the floormat.
Installing
i To install or remove the floormats more
easily, move the driver’s seat or front passenger
seat as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 45).
왘
Lay down the floormat in the respective
footwell.
왘
Press floormat eyelets 2 onto retainer
pins 1.
343
Controls in detail
Useful features
Infrared reflecting windshield*
1 Infrared transparent areas
Your vehicle is equipped with infrared
reflecting glass, which reduces the amount
of radiated heat entering the vehicle
interior through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
the transmission of signals through the
glass by in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g.
electronic toll collection devices.
To allow the use of these devices in the
vehicle, infrared transparent areas are
placed in the windshield.
344
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
345
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find
detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
346
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Shift gears in a timely manner.
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1
(컄 page 205) only when driving at
moderate speeds (for hill driving).
앫
Select C as the preferred shift
program (컄 page 206) for the first
1000 miles (1500 km).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine
speeds to the permissible maximum.
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫
During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do
not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫
During this period, avoid engine speeds
above 4500 rpm in each gear.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when
driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine, the transfer case, the front
differential or the rear differential has been
replaced.
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent,
depends on driving habits and operating
conditions.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.
Pedals
Warning!
G
Drinking and driving
To save fuel you should:
G
앫
Keep tires at the recommended
inflation pressures.
Warning!
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Remove carriers when not in use.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are a very dangerous combination. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and
deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles). Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Make sure that absolutely no objects are obstructing the pedal’s range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
and injury.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
347
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!
Brakes
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components,
the first braking action may be somewhat
reduced and increased pedal pressure may
be necessary to obtain expected braking
effect. Maintain a safe distance from
vehicles in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
accident.
348
! Operational or performance test must only
be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer. If
such tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or
the transfer case which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when testing the brakes on a
brake test dynamometer and such testing should
be no longer than 10 seconds.
Active braking action through ESP® may otherwise seriously damage the brake system which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Operation
Driving instructions
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only
subjected to moderate loads, you should
occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 102).
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid level in
the reservoir.
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low if the brake warning lamp
in the instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
parking brake is released (컄 page 421).
Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear
(컄 page 454).
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
! When driving down long and steep grades,
relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
reduces brake pad wear.
When using the engine’s braking power, a drive
wheel may not spin for an extended period of
time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
349
Operation
Driving instructions
High-performance brake system
(R 63 AMG only)
The high-performance brake system is
designed to operate under the extremely
high operating demands required to
accommodate the performance capabilities of the vehicle. The brakes may
produce a squeaking-type noise depending
on the
앫
vehicle speed
앫
brake force applied
앫
ambient conditions, e.g. temperature
and humidity
As with any brake system, the wear of individual brake system components such as
brake pads or disks strongly depends on
your driving style and the conditions under
which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style calling for high demand braking
will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
more quickly.
350
Warning!
G
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
replacement brake pads and discs may take
several hundred miles of driving until they
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
that time, you may need to use increased
brake pedal pressure while braking. Please
be aware of this and adjust your driving and
braking accordingly during this break-in
period.
Excessive high demand braking will cause
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display.
Especially for high performance driving, it is
important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
Parking brake
When driving on wet roads or dirt covered
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into
the parking brake. To prevent corrosion
and a reduction in the braking power of the
parking brake, observe the following:
왘
From time to time, lightly engage the
parking brake before driving off.
왘
Drive a distance of approximately
110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed
of 12 mph (20 km/h)
Warning!
G
While performing this procedure, please assure that the vehicle is stopped before applying the parking brake. Otherwise the rear
wheels could lock up. You could lose control
of the vehicle and cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not light
up when the parking brake is engaged.
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when you engage the parking brake.
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving off
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Parking
Warning!
앫
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press the
start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO*).
앫
Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
leaving.
G
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury or damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result of
vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
앫
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
앫
Shift the automatic transmission to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
351
Operation
Driving instructions
Tires
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with
caution to an area which is a safe distance
from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center or tire dealer for repairs.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
point the tire is considered worn and
should be replaced.
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you
16
do not allow your tires to wear down to
that level. As tread depth approaches
1/ in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on
8
a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
352
Specified tire inflation pressures must be
maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
For more information, see “Tires and
wheels” (컄 page 373).
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(컄 page 405) with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four
wheels for the winter season to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance compared to summer
tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Tire speed rating
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use
prudent driving speeds appropriate to
prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
serious injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
353
Operation
Driving instructions
R 320 CDI, R 350, R 500
R 63 AMG
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
155 mph (250 km/h).
R 350, R 500 (with Sport Package*)
R 350, R 500 (with AMG rims*)
R 63 AMG with increased top speed*
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“W”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 168 mph (270 km/h)
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
171 mph (275 km/h).
i For information on speed ratings for winter
tires, see “Winter tires” (컄 page 405).
For additional general information on tire speed
markings on the tire sidewall, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 403).
354
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
shift the automatic transmission to
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow chains,
see “Snow chains” (컄 page 406).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
Operation
Driving instructions
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal brake effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking
efficiency should be tested as soon as
possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust
pipe and from around the vehicle with the
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind.
G
Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
G
G
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 405).
Standing water
To prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment if you must drive through
standing water, keep in mind that
앫
the maximum depth of the water may
not exceed 10 in (25 cm)
앫
you must drive slowly
i Vehicles with AIRMATIC*
(except R 63 AMG):
If you have selected the raised level
(컄 page 289) before driving through standing
water, the maximum water depth is
12 in (30 cm).
i R 63 AMG with AIRMATIC*:
If you have selected the highway level
(컄 page 289) with the ADS in SPORT mode
(컄 page 286) before driving through standing
water, the maximum water depth is
7.5 in (19 cm).
If you have selected the raised level
(컄 page 289) before driving through standing
water, the maximum water depth is 9 in (23 cm).
355
Operation
Driving instructions
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
of unknown depth. Before driving through water,
determine its depth. Never accelerate before
driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive
slowly to prevent water from entering the
passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage
to electrical components or wiring of the engine
or transmission, or could result in water being
ingested by the engine through the air intake,
causing severe internal engine damage. Any
such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
356
Passenger compartment
Warning!
Driving abroad
G
Always fasten items being carried as
securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The rear cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. Always use the partition net* when transporting cargo. The
partition net* cannot secure hard or heavy
objects. Always fasten items being carried
as securely as possible using the cargo
tie-down rings in the cargo floor area and
fastening materials.
Abroad, there is an extensive
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
directory, you should request pertinent
information from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Operation
Driving instructions
Control and operation of radio
transmitters
Catalytic converter (gasoline engine)
Telephones and two-way radios
Warning!
G
COMAND system, radio and telephone*
Warning!
G
Do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. Only operate
the COMAND system, radio or telephone1 if
road, weather and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just
30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your
vehicle is covering a distance of
44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system,
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit should
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
connected to an antenna that is installed
on the outside of the vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important
element in conjunction with the oxygen
sensors to achieve substantial control of
the pollutants in the exhaust emissions.
Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended
maintenance instructions as outlined in
your Maintenance Booklet.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this
vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially
start a fire.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
357
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine)
Emission control
Your vehicle is equipped with an oxidation
catalyst, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve
substantial control of the pollutants in the
exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in
proper operating condition by following
our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance
Booklet.
Certain engine systems serve to keep the
toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible legal limits.
Warning!
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or
operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
358
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered
in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the
Maintenance Booklet.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant
temperature may rise to approximately
248°F (120°C).
The engine should not be operated
with the coolant temperature above
248°F (120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
359
Operation
At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
Warning!
G
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable and poisonous. They burn violently and
can cause serious injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact, extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel
fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel
fuel vapors can damage your health.
G
Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
fuel system and engine could be damaged.
In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
! Damage resulting from mixing gasoline with
diesel fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
왘
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
! Diesel engine: When filling the diesel fuel
tank using fuel containers, place a filling filter, a
suede cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter.
Otherwise, particles from the fuel container
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel injection system.
왘
Turn off the engine
앫
by turning the SmartKey to
position 0 (컄 page 39). Remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch.
앫
by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button (컄 page 41).
Open the driver’s door (with the
driver’s door open, starter switch is
now in position 0, same as
SmartKey removed from starter
switch).
Briefly push on fuel filler flap at the
position indicated the arrow.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
360
Operation
At the gas station
왘
Open the fuel filler flap completely.
왘
Turn the fuel cap to the counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible
pressure is released.
왘
Take off the fuel cap.
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler
neck. Do not drop the cap. It could damage the
vehicle paint finish.
왘
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
Warning!
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump
nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
왘
왘
Replace the fuel cap by turning it clockwise until it audibly engages.
Close the fuel filler flap.
You should hear the latch close shut.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap
open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve
warning lamp to flash and the ? malfunction
indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 424).
i Gasoline engine:
Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of
96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline
quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.
For more information on gasoline, see see “Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)”
(컄 page 541), see “Fuel requirements”
(컄 page 542), and the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
i Diesel engine:
Only use commercially available vehicular diesel
fuels No. 2 or No. 1 (ASTM D975 No. 2-D or
No. 1-D). Information on diesel quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
The sulfur content in diesel fuel should not
exceed 50 parts per million (ppm). When using
diesel fuel with a sulfur content of above
300 ppm, the engine oil interval should be
shortened.
For more information on diesel fuels, refer to the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
! Diesel engine:
The engine is more susceptible to wear and
damage if you use
앫
marine diesel fuel
앫
heating oil
앫
additives
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
special additives is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
361
Operation
At the gas station
Low outside temperatures
(diesel engine)
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is offered in the winter months. Check with
your fuel retailer.
Check regularly and before a long trip
Engine oil level
왘
For more information on engine oil, see
“Engine oil” (컄 page 366).
Open the hood (컄 page 364).
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For more information,
see “Coolant level” (컄 page 370) and
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 538).
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The
fuel system and engine will otherwise be damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Brake fluid
1 Coolant level
2 Brake fluid
3 Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
362
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will
not solve the problem. For more information, see
“Brake fluid” (컄 page 541).
Operation
At the gas station
Windshield/rear window washer
system and headlamp cleaning
system*
For more information on refilling the washer reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning*
system” (컄 page 372).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For information on replacing light bulbs, see “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 484).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 146).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” (컄 page 382).
363
Operation
Engine compartment
Hood
Warning!
Warning!
G
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others.
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, only touch owner serviceable
components described in the Operator's
Manual and comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
Opening
Warning!
Warning!
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from the vehicle and do not open the
hood until the engine has cooled.
If necessary, call the fire department.
364
G
G
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades.
Warning!
G
Vehicles with gasoline engine:
The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high
voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets,
diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
The hood lock release lever is located in
the driver’s footwell.
Vehicles with diesel engine:
The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
electronic control unit for the injection
system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components of the
injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
when the ignition is switched on
2 Handle for opening the hood
1 Hood lock release lever
왘
Pull release lever 1 downwards.
The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 protrudes slightly from the radiator grille.
If not, lift the hood slightly.
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
왘
Press and hold handle 2.
The hood is unlocked.
왘
Pull up on the hood in direction of
arrow and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
struts.
365
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
G
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hand or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged before driving. Do not continue driving if the
hood can no longer engage after an accident
for example. The hood could otherwise
come loose while the vehicle is in motion
and injure you and/or others.
왘
Let the hood drop from a height of
approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
왘
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
366
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption
can occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Checking engine oil level with the
control system (R 500 only)
When checking the oil level
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 5 minutes with
the engine turned off
앫
with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle must have
been stationary for at least 30 minutes
with the engine turned off
i Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
More information on this subject is available at
any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
To check the engine oil level via the
multifunction display, do the following:
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
The standard display (컄 page 166)
should appear in the multifunction
display.
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display:
i If you want to interrupt the checking proce-
If you see the message:
dure, press the k or j button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Observe waiting period
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For information on adding engine oil, see
(컄 page 369).
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 538) and
(컄 page 540).
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the multifunction display:
앫
Engine oil level OK
앫
Add 1.0 qt. to reach max. oil
level
(Canada: 1.0 liter)
앫
Add 1.5 qts. to reach max. oil
level
Other display messages
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
in the starter switch, the following
message will appear:
왘
If the engine is at operating
temperature, wait 5 minutes before
repeating check procedure.
왘
If engine is not at operating temperature, wait 30 minutes before repeating
check procedure.
If you see the message:
Engine oil level
Not when engine on
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
If the engine is at operating temperature, wait 5 minutes before checking
oil.
왘
If the engine is not at operating temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.
Switch ignition on
to check engine oil level
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
(Canada: 1.5 liters)
앫
Add 2.0 qts. to reach max. oil
level
(Canada: 2.0 liters)
367
Operation
Engine compartment
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at operating temperature, the following
message will appear:
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level
왘
Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine and/or
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the
oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For more information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine
oil, see the “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 459).
Checking engine oil level with the oil
dipstick (except R 500)
When checking the oil level
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground
앫
with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been
stationary for at least 5 minutes with
the engine turned off
앫
with the engine not at operating temperature yet, the vehicle also must
have been stationary for at least
5 minutes with the engine turned off
1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper mark
3 Lower mark
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 364).
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1.
왘
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
dipstick guide tube.
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower mark 3 (min.) and upper mark 2
(max.) of the oil dipstick.
368
Operation
Engine compartment
i All models (except R 63 AMG):
Adding engine oil
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
2.1 US qt (2.0 l).
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
required for vehicles with Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles).
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
R 63 AMG:
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
1.6 US qt (1.5 l).
왘
If necessary, add engine oil.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” section (컄 page 538) and
(컄 page 540).
For information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil, see
the “Practical hints” section (컄 page 459).
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification
other than those expressly required for the
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil
and oil filter at change intervals longer than
those called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)
will result in engine or emission control system
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
R 350 (R 320 CDI similar)
1 Filler cap
R 500 (R 63 AMG similar)
1 Filler cap
369
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine or
emission control system not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Transmission fluid level
Coolant level
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. If you notice transmission
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center check the automatic transmission.
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check
the coolant level, the vehicle must be
parked on level ground.
Warning!
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.
앫
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure.
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Technical data” section (컄 page 538) and
(컄 page 540).
370
G
Operation
Engine compartment
앫
앫
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
왘
Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approximately one half turn counterclockwise
to release any excess pressure.
왘
Continue turning cap 1 counterclockwise and remove it.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
Coolant level 4 is correct if the level:
1 Cap
2 Coolant expansion tank
3 Indicator wall
4 Coolant level
앫
for cold coolant: reaches the top of
indicator wall 3 visible through the
filling opening
앫
for warm coolant: is approximately
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap 1.
For more information on coolant, see
“Coolants” (컄 page 543).
371
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield/rear window washer
system and headlamp cleaning*
system
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment.
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of 8.0 US qt (7.6 l).
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid
in a suitable container.
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
1 Cap
2 Windshield washer reservoir
372
왘
Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and water (or commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below freezing
point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the washer system/reservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield and
headlamp washer fluid mixing ratio”
(컄 page 546).
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and
purchase.
Warning!
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
further information. If incorrectly sized rims
and tires are mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged.
앫
The operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct.
Warning!
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle
cannot be assured when such tires are used.
Important guidelines
앫
Only use sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire inflation pressure loss and
damage to the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
inflation pressure and correct as
required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
373
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance
Warning!
G
Regularly check the tires for damage.
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control
of your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure,
see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 380).
374
Tire inspection
Life of tire
Every time you check your tire inflation
pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫
excessive treadwear (컄 page 375)
앫
cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber
앫
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation.
Spare tires will age and become worn over
time even if never used, and thus should be
inspected and replaced when necessary.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire inflation pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
G
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths under
1
/8 in (3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and
become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be replaced.
wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor safety
laws consider a tire to be worn when the
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and
fuels.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Direction of rotation
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫
Storing tires
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
375
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
replaced. Always observe and follow applicable
temporary use restrictions and speed limitations
indicated on the spare wheel.
Loading the vehicle
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
앫
The Tire and Loading Information
placard can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number
of people that can be in the vehicle and
the total weight that can be carried in
the vehicle. It also contains information
on the proper size and recommended
tire inflation pressures for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle.
376
앫
The certification label, also found on
the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be
carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
either the front axle or rear axle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Following is a discussion on how to work
with the information contained on the
placard with regards to loading your
vehicle.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Seating capacity
Tire and Loading Information
Warning!
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
and rear seating capacity. The placard
showing the seating capacity is located on
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 376).
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading
the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Tire and Loading Information placard
i Data shown on placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the following illustration. Refer to
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
i Data shown on placard example are for
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
왘
illustration purposes only. Load limit data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the following illustration. Refer to
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
lbs.” on this placard.
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
(if applicable) should never exceed the
weight referenced in that statement.
1 Seating capacity
377
Operation
Tires and wheels
Steps for determining correct load limit
Step 4
Step 6 (if applicable)
The following steps have been developed
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
왘
왘
Step 1
왘
Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
your vehicle’s placard.
Step 2
왘
Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
Step 3
왘
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
378
The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lbs passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
Step 5
왘
Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in step 4.
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 380).
The following table shows examples on
how to calculate total and cargo load
capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
The following examples use a load limit
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
purposes only. Make sure you are using
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 377).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined
weight limit
of occupants and
cargo from
placard
Number of Seating
occupants configura(driver and tion
passengers)
Occupants weight
Combined
Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight of all tongue weight (total load limit from
occupants
placard minus combined weight of
all occupants)
1
5
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
750 lbs
1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
1500 lbs
front: 2
rear: 3
2
1500 lbs
3
front: 1
rear: 2
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
540 lbs
1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
3
1500 lbs
1
front:1
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
150 lbs
1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 380).
379
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the
combined weight of all occupants, cargo
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(컄 page 380) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
either the front or rear axle. You can obtain
the GVWR and GAWR from the certification
label. The certification label can be found
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
data” (컄 page 526).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
(컄 page 380) must never exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by
a single axle (front or rear).
380
To assure that your vehicle does not
exceed the maximum permissible weight
limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear
axle), have the loaded vehicle (including
driver, passengers and all cargo and, if
applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on
a suitable commercial scale.
Trailer tongue load
The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects
the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
added to the weight of all occupants riding
and any cargo you are carrying in the
vehicle. The tongue load typically is
between 10% and 15% of the trailer weight
and everything loaded in it.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 376).
The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km).
i Data shown on placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the following illustration. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
Warning!
G
If the tire inflation pressure drops
repeatedly:
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
pressures listed on placard.
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
In addition to the tire placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
filler flap for any additional information
pertaining to special driving situations. For
more information, see “Important notes on
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 381).
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure
앫
Check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
1 Tire and Loading Information placard
with recommended cold tire inflation
pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard
lists the recommended cold tire inflation
pressures for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow,
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
381
Operation
Tires and wheels
Be sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before
adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
Checking tire inflation pressure
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
Check and adjust the tire inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
can be considered cold if the vehicle has
been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for
speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified
on the placard located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of
air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire inflation pressure
where the temperature is different from
the outside temperature.
382
Warning!
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
If you check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
been driven for several miles or sitting less
than 3 hours), the reading will be
approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold tire
inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will
be underinflated.
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading
the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure
manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct
tire inflation pressure:
왘
Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire.
왘
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
valve.
왘
Read tire inflation pressure on tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(컄 page 376) or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap. If necessary, add
air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure.
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)
While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the system to detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
see a corresponding warning message in
the multifunction display.
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay
앫
if snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
앫
in presence of ice and snow
앫
if you are driving on a loose surface
(e.g. sand or gravel)
앫
if you are driving in a very sporty
manner (involving rapid acceleration or
high speeds in curves)
i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
왘
Install the valve cap.
왘
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Warning!
G
When the multifunction display shows the
message Tire pressure Check tires,
one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare, should be
checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended tire inflation pressure as
specified on the Tire And Loading Information placard (컄 page 377) or on the tire inflation pressure label (컄 page 382).
383
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures
since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires
cannot be detected by the Run Flat
Indicator.
The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
caused by a foreign object). In this case
bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
maneuvers.
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be
reactivated in the following situations:
앫
if you have changed the tire inflation
pressure
앫
if you have replaced the wheels or tires
앫
if you have installed new wheels or
tires
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
Warning!
G
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in
a reliable manner if you have set the correct
tire inflation pressures for each tire.
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was
set, the system will monitor the pressure
according to the incorrect value.
384
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
Make sure the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 166).
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the following message appears in
the multifunction display:
왘
Press the reset button on the instrument cluster (컄 page 156).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
Operation
Tires and wheels
If you wish to confirm activation:
왘
Press button æ.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
restarted
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure
values for all four tires.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 26). Depending on
how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS
system itself:
앫
If the telltale illuminates continuously, one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS.
앫
If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
itself is not operating properly.
Press button ç.
or
왘
Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS), (USA only)
Wait until the message
Restart
Run Flat Indicator?
disappears.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
Warning!
G
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
385
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
386
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunction develops, it may take up to 10 minutes
for the system to signal a malfunction using
the TPMS telltale flashing and illumination
sequence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes
driving if the malfunction has been corrected.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to malfunction.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the TPMS
Warning!
i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might loose control over the vehicle.
The TPMS must be reactivated when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 376) or, if available, the supplemental tire pressure
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap (컄 page 360), make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition.
Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
pressure on the placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄 page 376). Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 381) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 382). If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 166).
왘
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 156).
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
왘
Press the æ button.
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Tire pressure monitor
restarted
After driving a few minutes the current
tire inflation pressure values are
accepted as reference pressures and
then monitored.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Press the ç button.
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the following message:
Tire pressure monitor
active
Menu: R-button
387
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire pressure electronically
with the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS)*,
(Canada only)
The TPMS only functions on wheels that
are equipped with the proper electronic
sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as selected by the driver, in all four
tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display. The present inflation
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes’ travel time.
i Possible differences between the readings
of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas
station equipment, and the vehicle’s control
system can occur. Usually the readings issued by
the control system are more precise.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
왘
Press the j or k button on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
current inflation pressures for each tire
appear in the multifunction display.
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure of the
removed road wheel for some minutes. If this
happens, keep in mind that the indicated value
where the spare wheel is mounted does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation pressure.
Warning!
i When the message Tire pressure
displayed after driving for a few
minutes appears in the multifunction display,
the individual inflation pressure values are
matched with the tires. The individual values are
displayed after a few minutes driving.
Warning!
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
388
G
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
available, the supplemental tire pressure information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may effect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to malfunction.
Reactivating Advanced TPMS*
The TPMS must be reactivated when you
have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
a new level (e.g. because of different load
or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
recalibrated to the current tire inflation
pressures.
Warning!
G
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
왘
Using the tire placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 376) or, if available, the supplemental tire pressure
information on the inside of the fuel
filler flap (컄 page 360), make sure the
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
correct.
컄컄
389
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure recommended for the vehicle operating condition.
Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
pressure on the placard on the driver’s door
B-pillar (컄 page 376). Some vehicles may have
supplemental tire pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 381) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 382). If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
filler flap.
왘
왘
왘
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
왘
Tire pressure
displayed after
driving for
a few minutes
390
Underinflated tires
Underinflated tires can:
앫
cause excessive and uneven tire wear
The following message will appear in
the multifunction display:
앫
adversely affect fuel economy
앫
lead to tire failure from being
overheated
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
After driving a few minutes the system
verifies that the current tire inflation
pressures are within the system’s
specified range. Afterwards the current
tire inflation pressures are accepted as
reference pressures and then monitored.
If you wish to cancel activation:
왘
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Press the æ button.
Tire pressure monitor
restarted
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display menu
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 166).
Press the j or k button repeatedly until you see the current inflation
pressures for each tire appear in the
display or the following message appears in the display
Press the reset button (컄 page 156).
Press the ç button.
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Overinflated tires
Tire labeling
Overinflated tires can:
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
앫
adversely affect handling
characteristics
앫
cause uneven tire wear
앫
be more prone to damage from road
hazards
앫
adversely affect ride comfort
앫
increase stopping distance
Warning!
G
Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards
(컄 page 398)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
(컄 page 396)
3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 397)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
(컄 page 398)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 400)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 392)
8 Load identification (컄 page 395)
9 Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(컄 page 532).
391
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
General:
Tire width
Depending on the design standards used,
the tire size molded into the sidewall may
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire
size designation.
The tire width 1 (컄 page 392) indicates
the nominal tire width in mm.
No letter preceding the size designation
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire
based on European design standards.
The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 392) is the
dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width and is
expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio
is arrived at by dividing section height by
section width.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
392
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high
pressure compact spares designed for
temporary emergency use only.
Aspect ratio
Tire code
The tire code 3 (컄 page 392) indicates
the tire construction type. The “R” stands
for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B”
means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 393).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rim diameter
The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 392) is the
diameter of the bead seat, not the
diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
indicated in inches (in).
Warning!
G
Tire load rating
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR (컄 page 401) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.
The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 392) is a
numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
See also “Maximum tire load”
(컄 page 397) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in
kilograms and lbs.
Warning!
G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 392) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 392) are also referred
to as “service description”.
For additional information on tire load
rating, see “Load identification”
(컄 page 395).
Tire speed rating
The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 392)
indicates the approved maximum speed
for the tire.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the
maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
393
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 392) and tire
speed rating 6 (컄 page 392) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
(Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
앫
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any
tire with a speed capability above
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a
“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the
maximum speed capability of the tire,
394
the service description for the tire must
be referred to. The service description
is comprised of the tire load rating 5
(컄 page 392) and the tire speed
rating 6 (컄 page 392).
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
designation and no service
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 392) is
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed capability.
If a service description 5 and 6
(컄 page 392) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
앫
Any tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
“ZR” in the size designation AND the
service description must be placed in
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed
capability of the tire as being above
186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
manufacturer for the actual maximum
permissible speed of the tire.
Operation
Tires and wheels
All-season and winter tires
Index
Load identification
Speed rating
Q M+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
No specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
1
XL (Extra Load): designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
or M+S . for winter tires
Light Load: designates a light load tire.
i Not all M+S rated radial-ply tires provide
special winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/snowflake
marking .on the tire sidewall. These tires
meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifically for use in snow conditions.
In addition to tire load rating, special load
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating
the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 393).
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
C, D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
395
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 396)
which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires and gives
purchasers the means to easily identify
such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
code” and “Date of manufacture”.
Manufacturer’s identification mark
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
396
The manufacturer’s identification mark 2
(컄 page 396) denotes the tire
manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (컄 page 373).
Tire size
The code 3 (컄 page 396) indicates the
tire size.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire type code
Maximum tire load
Warning!
The code 4 (컄 page 396) may, at the
option of the manufacturer, be used as a
descriptive code for identifying significant
characteristics of the tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 396)
identifies the week and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week,
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two
figures represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
G
1 Maximum tire load rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
For more information on tire load rating
(컄 page 393).
For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 378).
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
397
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire inflation pressure
Always follow the recommended tire
inflation pressure (컄 page 380) for proper
tire inflation.
Warning!
G
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(U.S. vehicles)
Tire manufacturers are required to grade
tires based on three performance
factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
398
Operation
Tires and wheels
Quality grades can be found, where
applicable, on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
Treadwear Traction Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Treadwear
Traction
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
399
Operation
Tires and wheels
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning!
G
Tire ply material
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.
This marking tells you about the type of
cord and number of plies in the sidewall
and under the tread.
400
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
Bar
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Another metric unit for air pressure. There
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
to 1 bar.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the
tire meets requirements of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Air pressure
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
bars.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Curb weight
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s
door B-pillar.
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus
the weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage
etc. loaded on the trailer.
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
equipped, air conditioning and additional
optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.
401
Operation
Tires and wheels
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Maximum load rating
Production options weight
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
installed accessories, passengers and
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
load. The GVW must never exceed the
GVWR indicated on the certification label
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
The maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
The combined weight of those installed
regular production options weighing over
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
402
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit and production options
weight.
Maximum tire inflation pressure
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire
under normal driving conditions.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).
Normal occupant weight
Recommended tire inflation pressure
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
at their designated seating positions.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
listed on placard located on driver’s door
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rim
Tire ply composition and material used
Treadwear indicators
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
This indicates the number of plies or the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Narrow bands, sometimes called
“wear bars” that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
remains.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
Maximum permissible weight on trailer
tongue.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle
weight and dividing it by two.
403
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rotating tires
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all
around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 375).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle
is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible.
404
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to
the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 375).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
tire” (컄 page 497).
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your
vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This
service includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” to a premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze
which is formulated for temperatures
below freezing point (컄 page 546).
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to make
sure that the engine can be started
even at low ambient temperatures.
앫
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
Winter tires
Warning!
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated
radial-ply tires provide special winter
performance. Make sure the tires you use
show M+S and the mountain/snowflake
marking.on the tire sidewall. These
tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
have been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP®, 4-ETS, and EBP
in winter operation.
G
Winter tires with a tread depth under
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your
vehicle, you must place a notice to this
effect where it will be seen by the driver.
Such notices are available at your tire
dealer or any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
For safe handling, make sure all winter
tires mounted are of the same make and
have the same tread design.
405
Operation
Winter driving
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Snow chains
! Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive, use
snow chains on rear wheels only.
Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance
for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to
your vehicle or tires, use of snow chains is not
permissible with the spare wheel.
! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping
System (ADS)*: When driving with snow chains,
do not select SPORT mode (컄 page 286).
앫
Use of snow chains is not permissible
with all wheel/tire combinations
(컄 page 532).
앫
Snow chains should only be used on
the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.
앫
Only use snow chains that are
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will be glad to advise you on this
subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
앫
Do not use snow chains on the spare
wheel (컄 page 534).
i When driving with snow chains, you may
wish to deactivate the ESP® (컄 page 104) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction.
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
406
Please observe the following guidelines
when using snow chains:
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
at the times called for by the maintenance
service indicator.
Starting approximately 1 month before
maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or
when you switch on the ignition (example
service A):
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage will result in
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Service
Service
Service
Service
Maintenance service indicator
message
The maintenance service indicator
message will notify you when your next
maintenance service is due.
A
A
A
A
in XXXX miles (km)
in XX days
in X day
due now
The maintenance services will be indicated
by showing a service type A through type H
in the multifunction display. Types A
through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging:
from
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
of maintenance services and intervals they
need to be performed at.
i Vehicles equipped with Maintenance
System only (U.S. vehicles):
The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks
distance driven and the time elapsed since your
last maintenance service and calculates other
maintenance service work required.
Service A
(approx. 1 hour)
to
Service H
(approx. 8 hours)
407
Operation
Maintenance
i Vehicles equipped with FSS {PLUS} (Flexible
You can also clear it yourself:
Service System {PLUS}) only (Canada vehicles):
앫
FSS {PLUS} evaluates engine temperature,
oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance driven and the time elapsed since your
last service and calculates other maintenance service work required.
앫
The interval between maintenance services
depends on your driving habits. A gentle
driving style, moderate engine speeds and
the avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
Clearing the maintenance service
indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message is automatically cleared
앫
after approximately 10 seconds when
you switch on the ignition or when
reaching the maintenance service
threshold while driving
앫
after approximately 30 seconds, once
the suggested maintenance service
term has passed
408
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
Service A exceeded by XXX days
Service A exceeded by X day
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
1 Reset button
왘
Press reset button 1 on the instrument cluster.
The maintenance service indicator
message is cleared and the standard
display appears in the multifunction
display (컄 page 166).
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will reset the maintenance service
indicator following a completed maintenance service.
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
i The menu overview can be found on
(컄 page 162).
You can call up the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check
when the next maintenance service is due.
왘
Switch on the ignition (컄 page 39).
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 166).
왘
Press button è or ÿ on the
multifunction steering wheel
repeatedly until the standard display
appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 166).
왘
Press button k or j on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator display
with the service symbol 9 and the
service deadline appears in the multifunction display.
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
disconnection will not be included in the count
shown by the maintenance service indicator. To
arrive at the true maintenance service deadline,
you will need to subtract these days from the
days shown in the maintenance service indicator
message or maintenance service indicator
display.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center, you can have the maintenance
service indicator reset. The automotive
maintenance facility carrying out the
maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service
indicator in the maintenance-relevant
literature for your vehicle. Such literature
is available either from either an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
i If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
been performed. Resetting the system without
performing the proper service as called for by
the maintenance service indicator will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
409
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Regular and proper care will help to maintain the value of your vehicle. The best way
to protect your vehicle from harmful environmental influences is to wash it and use
protective treatments regularly.
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
410
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
but also by:
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
Tar
앫
Gravel and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
앫
near the ocean
앫
in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
앫
during winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Operation
Vehicle care
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others
applied later.
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
products.
Power washer
Paintwork, painted body components
! Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a
distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of
the power washer.
! Affixing stickers, adhesive tape or similar
materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires.
The intense jet of water can result in damage to
the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across the
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts,
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber
parts.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
proximity, i.e. within approximately
3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be
inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending on the climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
왘
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
411
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Hand-wash
Automatic car wash
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of
water and cleaning agents.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight.
You can have your car washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Automatic
car washes without brushes are preferable.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should
be protected from any wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
not forget to clean the inner sides of the
wheels.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
proximity, i.e. within approximately
3 ft (approximately 1 m), the vehicle could be
inadvertently locked or unlocked.
412
왘
왘
Only use a mild car wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water.
Direct only a very weak spray towards
the ventilation intake.
왘
Use plenty of water and rinse the
sponge and chamois frequently.
왘
Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
dry with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
the finish.
! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.
왘
To protect the filter system, switch the
climate control system (컄 page 218) or
the automatic climate control system*
(컄 page 232) to air recirculation mode.
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
paint or ornamental moldings.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it
before running it through the automatic
car wash.
Operation
Vehicle care
! If you want the gear position to remain in N
i After running the vehicle through an auto-
(for example when the vehicle is pulled through
a car wash):
matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield (컄 page 415). This will prevent smears
and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by
residual wax on the windshield.
앫
do not remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or, when using KEYLESS-GO*
앫
do not turn off the engine using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* and open
the driver’s door
Otherwise, the transmission will shift to P and
lock the wheels, preventing the vehicle from
being pulled through a car wash.
! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch
is set to 0 (컄 page 61). Otherwise, the rain
sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle
damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle
through an automatic car wash to prevent
damage to the mirrors.
When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may
vibrate.
Ornamental moldings
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental moldings, use a use damp cloth.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
have chrome appearance, they could be made of
anodized aluminum that will be damaged when
cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use damp
cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
side markers, turn signal lenses
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such
as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage
the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
surface.
Very dirty ornamental moldings of which you are
sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome cleaner.
If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is
chrome-plated, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
413
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor
cover
왘
Restart the engine after cleaning sensor cover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
sensors
! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor
covers. Applying strong pressure may damage
the sensor covers.
Follow the instructions provided by the power
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power
washer.
! To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
1 Distronic system sensor cover
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water and a
non-scratching cloth to clean sensor
cover 1.
! To prevent scratches or damage, never
apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the sensor
cover 1. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors
with a dry cloth or sponge.
414
1 Parktronic system sensors in front
bumper
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo, with plenty of water and a
soft, non-scratching cloth to clean
sensors 1 on the bumpers.
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Rear View Camera lens*
! Do not clean the camera and the area
around the camera:
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
앫
with a high-pressure cleaner
왘
앫
with a dry cloth and high pressure
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
앫
with aggressive cleaning agents
왘
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild
window cleaning solution on all outside
and inside glass surfaces.
You could otherwise damage the camera.
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
1 Camera lens
왘
Only use clean water and a soft,
non-scratching cloth to clean camera
lens 1.
Be careful not to apply wax to camera
lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wax using the
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo
with plenty of water.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
왘
Fold wiper arms forward until they snap
into place.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of the
front, rear or side windows with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
415
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the panorama roof with
tilt/sliding panel*
The rear part of the panorama roof has a
protective layer on the inside.
왘
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild
window cleaning solution.
Light alloy wheels
Plastic and rubber parts
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
왘
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution.
왘
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm solution.
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
spray of water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid
may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.
! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents
or cleaners containing solvents. Do not touch
the protective layer with hard objects such as an
ice scraper or ring. Never apply strong force and
only use a soft, non-scratching cloth when cleaning the rear part of the tilt/sliding panel*.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately after it has
been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims
have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased
corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads.
Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage
the wheel paint if the car is not driven after
cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it is parked
after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle
for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
protective layer.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
416
The surface may temporarily change
color. If this is the case, wait for it to
dry.
Warning!
G
Do not use cleaners containing solvents or
cockpit care sprays to clean the cockpit or
the steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents will make the surface porous and vehicle occupants could suffer serious injuries
from plastic parts coming loose in the event
of air bag deployment.
Operation
Vehicle care
Hard plastic trim items
Headliner
Upholstery
왘
왘
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
! Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
Steering wheel
왘
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz
approved Leather Care.
Carpets
왘
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
and Fabric Care for cleaning the
carpets.
Use a soft bristle brush or a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of
excessive dirt.
Seat belts
왘
Only use clear, lukewarm water and
soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
direct sunlight.
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Warning!
G
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
Using other seat or head restraint covers
may interfere with or prevent the activation
of the active head restraints. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for availability.
417
Operation
Vehicle care
Leather upholstery
Wood trims
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject
to a natural aging process. Leather upholstery may also react to certain ambient
influences such as high humidity or high
temperature by showing wrinkles for
example.
왘
왘
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
Care.
! Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage to
the upholstery.
Exercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside should
not become wet.
418
Dampen cloth using water and use
damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
may be abrasive.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an
emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Bleeding the fuel system
(diesel engine only)
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
419
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the
bulb self-check when switching on the
ignition, have the respective bulb checked
and replaced if necessary.
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The BAS, ESP®, EBP, and 4-ETS
are also switched off (see messages in multifunction display).
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘
Read and observe messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 433).
-
The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
The brake system is still functioning normally
but without the ABS available.
왘 Have the system checked at an
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
other systems such as the navigation
Truck Center as soon as possible.
system* or the automatic transmission may Failure to follow these instructions
also be malfunctioning.
increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts. The ABS has switched off.
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ABS is operational again and
The battery might not be charged sufficiently. the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
왘
420
Have the generator (alternator) and
the battery checked.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
;
3
Possible cause/consequence
(USA only)
The red brake warning lamp
You are driving with the
comes on while driving and an parking brake set.
(Canada only)
acoustic warning sounds.
There is insufficient brake fluid
in the reservoir.
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lamp stays on.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system.Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
Suggested solution
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 57).
왘
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle in a safe location or as soon as
it is safe to do so.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
421
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
;
3
v
422
Possible cause/consequence
(USA only)
(Canada only)
Suggested solution
The red brake warning lamp
A malfunction in the Electronic 왘 Have the system checked at an authocomes on while driving. In
Brake Proportioning
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
addition, the yellow ABS mal- (컄 page 105) was detected.
Center as soon as possible.
function indicator lamp, and
Failure to follow these instructions
the yellow ESP® warning lamp
increases the risk of an accident.
come on and an acoustic warning sounds.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
?
±
Possible cause/consequence
(USA only)
The yellow engine malfunction There is a malfunction in:
indicator lamp comes on while
(Canada only)
앫 The fuel management
driving.
system
앫
The ignition system
앫
The emission control
system
앫
Systems which affect
emissions
Such malfunctions may result
in excessive emissions values
and may switch the engine to
its limp-home (emergency
operation) mode.
Suggested solution
왘
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics
system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located in the front left area
of the footwell next to the parking
brake pedal.
i Some states may by law require you to visit
a workshop immediately as soon as the engine
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
423
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
?
±
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The yellow engine malfunction A loss of pressure has been
왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 360).
indicator lamp comes on while detected in the fuel system.
If it is not closed properly:
(Canada only)
driving.
The fuel cap may not be closed
왘 Close the fuel cap.
properly or the fuel system
may be leaky.
If it is closed properly:
(USA only)
Your fuel tank is empty.
왘
Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
왘
After refueling start, turn off and
restart the engine three or four times in
succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
424
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
v
The yellow ESP® warning lamp
comes on while the engine is
running.
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The ESP® has been switched of with the ESP®
switch or has switched off due to a
malfunction.
왘
Risk of accident!
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic conditions.
v
The yellow ESP® warning lamp
flashes while driving.
The ESP® or traction control has come into
operation because of detected traction loss
of at least one tire.
Switch the ESP® back on
(컄 page 105).
If the ESP® cannot be switched back on:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Observe additional messages in the
multifunction display that may
appear.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
왘
When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
왘
While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
왘
Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather conditions.
왘
Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 104)
Failure to follow these instructions
increases the risk of an accident.
425
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
<
<
<
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your
on for a maximum of 6 seconds passengers to fasten your seat belts before
after starting the engine.
driving off.
왘
You hear a warning chime for a
maximum of 6 seconds after
starting the engine.
왘
You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
Fasten your seat belts.
Regardless of whether the seat belts
are fastened or not, the seat belt telltale always comes on and remains lit
for 6 seconds after starting the
engine.
Fasten your seat belt.
The warning chime stops sounding.
The red seat belt telltale comes You and/or your front passenger have foron while the vehicle is standing gotten to fasten your seat belts.
still and the engine is running or
during driving.
There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being occupied.
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
왘
Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in a safe
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
426
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
<
During driving the red seat belt
telltale flashes and you additionally hear an intermittent warning
chime with increasing intensity.
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The vehicle’s speed once exceeded
15 mph (25 km/h) and you and/or your
front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
seat belts.
왘
There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore the system senses the
front passenger seat as being occupied.
왘
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
Remove the items from the front
passenger seat and put them in a safe
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat
belt on one of the front seats, the warning chime
stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only
go out if both the driver and front passenger’s
seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing
still and a front door is opened.
427
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
H
USA only:
Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale for the TPMS illuminates
continuously.
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS*
(Canada only) detects a loss of pressure in at
least one tire.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a
halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the
traffic situation around you.
왘
Read and observe messages in
the multifunction display.
Canada only:
Low tire pressure telltale for the
Advanced TPMS* illuminates
continuously.
H
USA only:
Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale for the TPMS flashes
60 seconds and then stays
illuminated.
If the tire inflation pressure in the
respective tire(s) has (have) been
corrected, the combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale
goes out after few minutes driving.
There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
왘
Read and observe messages in
the multifunction display.
왘
Have the TPMS checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
After the malfunction has been
remedied the combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale
goes out after few minutes driving.
428
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning!
G
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of incompatible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
to function properly.
429
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp in The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
the fuel gauge comes on while driving.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 360).
1
왘
Drive with added caution to the
nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
The red SRS indicator lamp comes There is a malfunction in the restraint systems.
on while driving.
The air bags or emergency tensioning device
(ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to
deploy unexpectedly in an accident.
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked, otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could result in
an accident and/or injury to you or to
others.
430
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Problem
59The front passenger
front air bag off indicator
lamp illuminates and remains illuminated with
the weight of a typical
adult or someone larger
than a small individual on
the front passenger seat.
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solution
The system is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘
Also read and observe any messages
in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (컄 page 445).
G
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passenger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
431
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible
cause/consequence
59The front passenger
The system is malfunctionfront air bag off indicator ing.
lamp does not illuminate
and/or does not remain
illuminated with the
weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or
less on the front passenger seat.
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp does
not illuminate or remains out with the
432
Suggested solution
왘
Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and
child seat and check installation of the child seat.
왘
Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight
onto the seat are present.
왘
Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat
are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases
etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints
pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize
such forces as supplemental weight.
왘
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp
remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center. Do not transport a child on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
왘
Also note any messages in the multifunction display
and follow corrective steps (컄 page 445).
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on the front
passenger seat, do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display
Warning and malfunction messages
appear in the multifunction display located
in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(컄 page 174) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the
multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 156) or
button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 156) or
button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
multifunction steering wheel. They are
then stored in the vehicle status message
memory (컄 page 174). Remember that
clearing a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will
not correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
Warning!
G
All categories of messages contain
important information which should be
taken note of and, where a malfunction is
indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
433
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with
added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
434
i Switching on the ignition causes all
instrument cluster lamps (except high beam
headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the
lamps and multifunction display are in working
order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may
appear in the multifunction display.
For your convenience the messages are
divided into two sections:
앫
Text messages (컄 page 435)
앫
Symbol messages (컄 page 451)
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display message
ABS
inoperative
See Operator's Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The ABS has detected a malfunction
and has switched off.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels may lock during hard braking,
reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
The ESP® and the BAS are also
deactivated.
The brake system is still functioning
normally but without the ABS available.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
The ABS was deactivated because of When the voltage is above this value again, the
insufficient power supply. The charg- ABS is operational again and the message in
ing voltage has fallen below 10 volts. the multifunction display should disappear.
The brake system is still functioning If the message in the multifunction display
normally but without the ABS
does not disappear:
available.
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the
battery checked.
435
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
ABS
unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
If the yellow ESP® warning
lamp v flashes while driving and
this message appears, the electronic traction system has switched off
to prevent overheating of the drive
wheel brakes.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
electronic traction system switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the ESP® warning lamp v goes
out.
The self-diagnosis has not yet been The display will clear after driving a short
completed yet.
distance at a vehicle speed of above
12 mph (20 km/h).
Cruise
control and
SPEEDTRONIC
Cruise
control
436
inoperative
The cruise control is malfunctioning.
왘
Have cruise control checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
––– mph
You have attempted to set a
speed while driving below
20 mph (30 km/h).
왘
Accelerate to a speed exceeding
20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed
(컄 page 266).
The ESP® is switched off.
왘
Switch on the ESP® (컄 page 105).
The automatic transmission is set to
position P, R, or N.
왘
Set the automatic transmission to
position D (컄 page 197).
The vehicle is secured with the
parking brake.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
DISTRONIC
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You have attempted to set a
speed while driving below
20 mph (30 km/h).
왘
Accelerate to a speed exceeding
20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed
(컄 page 266).
The ESP® is switched off.
왘
Switch on the ESP® (컄 page 105).
The automatic transmission is set to
position P, R, or N.
왘
Set the automatic transmission to position D (컄 page 197).
The vehicle is secured with the
parking brake.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
inoperative
The Distronic* or the Distronic*
display are malfunctioning.
왘
Have the system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Override
You have accelerated. The
Distronic* has switched off.
왘
Stop accelerating.
––– mph
437
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
DISTRONIC
438
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
available again
Distronic* had been deactivated and
is available again.
왘
Activate Distronic* (컄 page 277).
currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
Distronic* is deactivated because
the functionality is impaired by
external interferences, e.g.
high-frequency sources such as toll
stations, speed measuring systems
etc.
왘
Leave the area of the external interference.
왘
Activate Distronic* again (컄 page 277)
when the message DISTRONIC available
again appears.
Distronic* is deactivated because
the Distronic* sensor has not
sensed any other vehicles or
objects, e.g. road sign or such, for a
long time.
왘
Try to activate Distronic* again
(컄 page 277) when the message
DISTRONIC available again appears.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
DISTRONIC
currently unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Distronic* is deactivated because
왘
the Distronic* cover in the
radiator grille is dirty
Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator
grille (컄 page 414).
왘
Restart the vehicle.
the functionality is impaired by
heavy precipitation or fog
Distronic* becomes operational again without the engine being restarted when
앫
앫
앫
dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off
while driving (e.g. slush or snow)
앫
the system recognizes full sensor
availability due to lessening rain or
because the road is drying, for example
앫
the message in the multifunction display
disappears
You can then operate Distronic* as usual
again.
439
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Depress brake to
shift out of
Park
You have tried to shift the automatic
transmission into position D, R or N
using the gear selector lever without
depressing the brake pedal.
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
Door Open
Vehicle not in Park
You have opened the driver’s door
and the automatic transmission is
still in position D, R or N.
왘
Before you leave the vehicle, make sure
that the automatic transmission is set to
position P and that the parking brake is
engaged.
Drive to workshop
without
shifting gears
The automatic transmission cannot If the automatic transmission is set to
be shifted out of the set position be- position D:
cause of a malfunction.
왘 Without changing the automatic transmission from position D, drive to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If the automatic transmission is set to
position N, R or P:
440
왘
Do not drive.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
ESP
inoperative
See Operator’s Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning
lamp v comes on.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
The ESP® has detected a malfunction and switched off.
The ABS may still be operational.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning
lamp v comes on.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
The ESP® or the ESP® display is
malfunctioning.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning
lamp v comes on.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
The ESP® is deactivated because of
Truck Center as soon as possible.
a malfunction or interrupted power
Failure to follow these instructions increases
supply.
the risk of an accident.
441
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
ESP
442
Possible cause/consequence
unavailable
See Operator’s Manual
Possible solution
The ESP® was deactivated because When the voltage is above this value again, the
of insufficient power supply. The
ESP® is operational again and the message in
charging voltage has fallen below
the multifunction display should disappear.
10 volts.
If the message in the multifunction display
The brake system is still functioning does disappear:
normally but without the ESP®
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the
available.
battery checked.
If the yellow ESP® warning
lamp v flashes while driving and
this message appears, the electronic traction system has switched off
to prevent overheating of the drive
wheel brakes.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
electronic traction system switches on again.
The self-diagnosis has not been
completed yet.
The display will clear after driving a short
distance at a vehicle speed of above
12 mph (20 km/h).
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the ESP® warning lamp v goes
out.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
P
Shift to P
Shift to P or N
to start engine
Only shift to
Park when vehicle
is stationary
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You have started the engine or
switched on the ignition with
KEYLESS-GO* and opened the
driver’s door with the automatic
transmission not set to position P.
왘
왘
Close the driver’s door
You have attempted to start the
engine with the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button while the automatic transmission was set to
position R or D.
왘
Set the automatic transmission to
position P or N.
You have tried to shift the transmission into position P using the gear
selector lever although the vehicle is
still in motion.
왘
Set the automatic transmission to
position P.
or
Make sure the brake pedal is depressed
when attempting to start the engine with
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
Stop the vehicle.
443
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
SRS
Warning!
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
Restraint sys. malfunction
Visit workshop
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also
result in injury.
444
The system is malfunctioning.
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
Possible
Possible solution
cause/consequence
Front passenger airbag Front passenger front Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front passenenabled
air bag is activated
ger seat for the following:
See Operator’s Manual while driving even
though a child, small
individual, or object
below the system’s
weight threshold is on
the front passenger
seat, or the front passenger seat is empty.
Objects on the seat or
forces acting on the
seat may make the
system sense supplemental weight.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly secure
the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary.
왘
Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger seat and
make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat is empty.
왘
Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat
is of a heavier weight than actually present.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and turn on the ignition (컄 page 39).
(Continued on next page)
445
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
Possible
Possible solution
cause/consequence
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 92) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 26) for the following:
Front passenger airbag
enabled
See Operator’s Manual
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫
the 59 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 88) has deactivated the air
bag.
앫
the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait
at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and
to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 88),
the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the
system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp re-
446
mains out even after performing the above
corrective steps, do not have any children
12 years old and under and other small
individuals use the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
Possible
Possible solution
cause/consequence
Front passenger airbag Front passenger front Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
disabled
air bag is deactivated passenger seat for the following:
See Operator’s Manual while driving even
though an adult or
someone larger than a
small individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
acting on the seat may
make the system
sense a decrease in
weight.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
왘
Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
왘
Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 44).
왘
Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind or around the
seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser
weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat.
왘
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch on the
ignition (컄 page 39).
(Continued on next page)
447
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
Possible
Possible solution
cause/consequence
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 92) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 26) for the following:
Front passenger airbag
disabled
see Operator’s Manual
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫
the 59 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 88) has deactivated the air
bag.
앫
the message Front passenger airbag enabled see Operator’s Manual or the
message Front passenger airbag disabled see Operator’s Manual should
not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait
at last 60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and
to make sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 88),
the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the
system checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Warning!
G
If the 59 indicator lamp re-
448
mains out even after performing the above
corrective steps, do not have any children
12 years old and under and other small
individuals use the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Check tires
Then restart
Run Flat Indicator
There was a warning message about
a loss in the tire inflation pressure
and the Run Flat Indicator has not
been reactivated yet.
왘
Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set
for each tire.
왘
Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator (컄 page 384).
Run Flat Indicator
inoperative
Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire pressure
Check tires
The Run Flat Indicator indicates that
the pressure is too low in one or more
tires.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
왘
Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 382).
왘
If necessary, replace the wheel (컄 page 497).
왘
Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure values (컄 page 384).
왘
Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
Tire pressure
displayed after
driving for
a few minutes
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire inflation pressure is being
checked.
449
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Tire pressure monitor
inoperative
The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is
malfunctioning.
왘
Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire pressure monitor
inoperative
No wheel sensors
There are wheels without appropriate wheel
sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires).
왘
Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘
Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire pressure monitor
Wheel sensor missing
One or more sensors are defect (e.g.
battery is empty).
왘
Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
One or more wheels without appropriate
wheel sensors mounted (e.g. spare tire).
왘
Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire pressure for the respective tire is shown in
the multifunction display.
Tire pressure monitor
currently unavailable
450
The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is unable to
monitor the tire pressure due to
앫
a nearby radio interference source.
앫
excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
왘
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been
removed, the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* automatically becomes active again after a few minutes
driving.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol
#
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
앫
alternator malfunctioning
앫
broken poly-V-belt
Do not forget that the brake
system requires electrical
energy and may be operating
with restricted capability.
Considerably greater brake
pedal force is required and the
stopping distance is increased.
왘
Stop in a safe location or as soon as it is
safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine.
Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
immediately. Adjust driving to be
consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
451
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
#
Battery/Alternator
Stop vehicle
The battery is defective.
2
Brake wear
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
452
The brake pads have reached
their wear limit.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
soon as it is safe to do so.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Do not continue to drive.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
왘
Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
; (USA only)
! (Canada only)
; (USA only)
3 (Canada only)
Release
parking brake
You are driving with the parking
brake set.
왘
Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
EBV, ABS, ESP inoperative The EBP, the ABS, and the ESP® 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Manual
have switched off due to a malWheels may lock during hard braking,
function. The BAS is also
switched off.
The brake system is still functional but without the EBP, the
ABS, and the ESP® available.
reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
453
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
; (USA only)
3 (Canada only)
Check
brake fluid level
There is insufficient brake fluid
in the reservoir.
Warning!
G
Driving with the message Check brake
fluid level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before
checking the brake system. Overfilling the
brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling
brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire. You could be
seriously burned.
454
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
pad thickness and leaks.
왘
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is
safe to do so.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
•
Coolant level
Stop car, switch engine
off
The coolant is too hot.
Among other possible causes
(the cooling fan could be
malfunctioning), the poly-V-belt
could be broken.
왘
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or
as soon as it is safe to do so.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an
inoperative water pump which may
result in damage to the engine.
Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If it is intact:
왘
Wait for the message to disappear
before restarting the engine.
Doing otherwise could result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
(Continued on next page)
455
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
왘
Observe the coolant temperature in the
multifunction display (컄 page 166).
If the temperature rises again:
왘
Warning!
G
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
456
During severe operation conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
immediately.
! The engine should not be operated with the
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
B
Top up coolant
See Oper. Manual
The coolant level is too low.
Warning!
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 370).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level
warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant
in the cooling system. The engine will overheat,
causing major engine damage.
457
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
N
Check eng. oil level
at next refueling
The engine oil level is too low.
왘
Check the engine oil level (컄 page 366).
USA only:
The engine oil level is too low.
왘
Add engine oil (컄 page 369) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 366).
The measuring system is
malfunctioning.
왘
Have the measuring system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Add 1 qt. engine oil
at next refueling
Canada only:
Add 1 liter engine oil
at next refueling
Engine oil level
cannot be measured
When the message Add 1 qt. engine oil
when next refueling (Canada: 1 liter)
appears while the engine is running and at
operating temperature, the engine oil level
has dropped to approximately the minimum level.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
458
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest
service station where the engine oil should
be topped to the required level with an
approved oil specified in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
N
Engine oil level
There is no oil in the engine.
Stop car, turn engine off There is a danger of engine
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as it is safe to do so in a safe
location.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Add engine oil (컄 page 369) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 366).
Have oil siphoned or drained off.
damage.
Engine oil level
Reduce oil level
You have added too much
engine oil. There is a risk of
damaging the engine and/or the
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the oxidation catalyst
(diesel engine).
왘
Engine oil level
Visit workshop
The engine oil has dropped to a
critical level.
왘
Check the engine oil level (컄 page 366)
and add oil as required (컄 page 369).
왘
If you must add engine oil frequently, have
the engine checked for possible leaks.
! The engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in
Observe all legal requirements with
respect to its disposal.
serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
459
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
c
A
a
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
You are driving with one or more
doors open.
Gas cap is open
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
soon as it is safe to do so.
왘
Close the doors.
A loss of pressure has been
왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 360).
detected in the fuel system. The
If it is not closed properly:
fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system may 왘 Close the fuel cap.
be leaky.
If it is closed properly:
You are driving with the hood or
the tailgate open.
You are trying to lock the vehicle
with the KEYLESS-GO* function
with a door or the tailgate open.
460
왘
왘
Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as it is safe to do so in a safe
location.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 364) or the
tailgate (컄 page 125).
왘
Close all doors and/or the tailgate
(컄 page 125).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
F
Key
not detected
The SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is not detected
while the engine is running
because
앫
앫
Key
not detected
the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is not in the
vehicle
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Search for the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
locked nor can the engine be started
again after the engine is stopped.
there is strong
radio-frequency interference
The SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily
not detected.
왘
Change the position of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
왘
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in
the starter switch if necessary.
The SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is not detected
while the ignition is switched on
(컄 page 39) and a door is
opened or closed and the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is
not in the vehicle.
왘
Search for the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked
nor can the engine be started.
왘
Change the position of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
461
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
F
Key detected
in vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
left in the vehicle was detected
while trying to lock the vehicle
from the outside.
왘
Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
out of the vehicle.
Remove key
You have forgotten to remove
the SmartKey.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
You need a new key
There is no additional code available for SmartKey or SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO*.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Change
key batteries
The batteries in the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO* are discharged.
왘
Replace the batteries (컄 page 483).
Don’t forget
your key
This message appears for a
왘 Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
maximum of 60 seconds if the
or
driver’s door is opened with the
engine shut off and no SmartKey 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
with you when leaving the vehicle.
in the starter switch.
This message is only a reminder.
462
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
3rd brake lamp
The high mounted brake lamp is
malfunctioning. This message
will only appear if all light
emitting diodes have stopped
working.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Active headlamps
inoperative
The active Bi-Xenon* headlamp
system is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
AUTO Light
inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps do not
switch on automatically.
왘
In the control system, set lamp operation
to manual mode (컄 page 147).
왘
Switch on headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch (컄 page 146).
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Brake lamp left
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is
being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Brake lamp right
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is
being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
463
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Cornering lamp
Left
The left corner-illuminating front
fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Cornering lamp
Right
The right corner-illuminating
front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Front foglamp
Left
The left front fog lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Front foglamp
Right
The right front fog lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
High beam
Left
The left high beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
Halogen headlamp:
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘
High beam
Right
The right high beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Halogen headlamp:
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘
464
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
License plate lamp
Left
The left license plate lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
License plate lamp
Right
The right license plate lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Low beam
Left
The left low beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
Halogen headlamp:
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘
Low beam
Right
The right low beam lamp is
malfunctioning.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Halogen headlamp:
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
465
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Marker lamp
Front Left
The left front side marker lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Marker lamp
Front Right
The right front side marker lamp
is malfunctioning.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Parking lamp
Front left
The front left parking lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute
bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Parking lamp
Front right
The front right parking lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute
bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Foglamp
Rear Left
The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Reverse lamp
Left
The left backup lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Reverse lamp
Right
The right backup lamp is
malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
466
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Switch off lights
You have removed the SmartKey
from the starter switch and
opened the driver’s door or
removed the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 146).
Switch off lights
or remove key
You have opened the driver’s
door while the exterior lamp
switch is in position U and
the SmartKey is still in the
starter switch.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 146).
or
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The parking lamps are still on.
Tail lamp
Left
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Tail lamp
Right
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is
being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
467
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence Possible solution
.
Turn signal
Rear Left
The left rear turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute
bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Turn signal
Rear Right
The right rear turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute
bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Turn signal
Front Left
The left front turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute
bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Turn signal
Front Right
The right front turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute
bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 484).
Turn signal
Left mirror
The turn signal in the left exterior rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes
have stopped working.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Turn signal
Right mirror
The turn signal in the right exterior rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes
have stopped working.
왘
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
468
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
L
Tele Aid
inoperative
One or more main functions of the
Tele Aid* system are malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Tele Aid* system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Tele Aid
battery
The emergency power battery for the
Tele Aid* system is malfunctioning. If the
vehicle battery is also malfunctioning or
drained, Tele Aid* will not be operational.
왘
Have the Tele Aid* system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Function
unavailable
This display appears if button t or
s on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
Top up
washer fluid
The fluid level has dropped to
about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.
왘
Add washer fluid (컄 page 372).
t
W
469
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
n*
STOP
car too low
The AIRMATIC* is inoperative.
왘
Avoid large steering angles.
Otherwise a fender or tire could
be damaged.
왘
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
왘
Have the vehicle checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
왘
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) depending on the set
vehicle level.
왘
Have the vehicle checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
왘
Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) depending on the set
vehicle level.
왘
Have the vehicle checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Malfunction
Malfunction
470
The AIRMATIC* is malfunctioning.
The AIRMATIC* is functional only to a
limited extent.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
n*
Vehicle rising
wait briefly
The vehicle level is too low.
왘
Do not drive off.
The vehicle level control* has not yet
adjusted the vehicle level to the necessary height required for driving.
왘
Wait until the message disappears
from the multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
Compressor
cooling down
Level control was activated too long/too
frequently.
왘
Let the compressor cool until the
message disappears.
The selected level will be set once the
compressor has cooled down.
Level selection
not permitted
! When the message Compressor cooling
down appears in the multifunction display, driving is still possible.
You are driving too fast for the desired
level selection.
왘
Reduce vehicle speed.
왘
Set the next higher level
(컄 page 287).
Keep in mind that the ride height of the vehicle is
not yet reached and you could therefore damage
the underbody of the vehicle.
The selected level will be set once the compressor has cooled down.
471
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit
i Check expiration dates and contents for
The vehicle tool kit is stored under the cargo compartment floor.
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items.
The first aid kit is stored under the cargo
compartment floor, see “Vehicle tool kit”
(컄 page 472).
472
The vehicle tool kit includes:
앫
Towing eye bolt
앫
Wheel wrench
앫
Alignment bolt
앫
Vehicle jack
앫
Fuse chart
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Fuse extractor
앫
Collapsible wheel chock
앫
Wheel bolts for spare wheel
(if applicable, see “Mounting the spare
wheel” (컄 page 500))
1 Cargo compartment floor, lowered
2 Handle cover
왘
Open the tailgate (컄 page 123).
왘
Push in handle cover 2 and pull
handle in direction of arrow.
왘
Lift cargo compartment floor 1.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
3 Securing hook
왘
Release securing hook 3 (located below the floor handle) from holder.
3 Securing hook
4 Cargo compartment floor, raised
5 Upper cargo compartment lip
왘
Engage securing hook 3 on upper
cargo compartment lip 5.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind*
installed behind the third-row seats
(컄 page 306), disengage cargo compartment
cover blind* and flip it forward. Otherwise the
strap of the securing hook could damage the
cargo compartment cover blind*.
You can now access the vehicle tool kit.
To remove the vehicle tool kit storage
well casing, proceed as described
on (컄 page 476).
6 Wheel bolt wrench
7 Electric air pump
8 Jack
9 Spare fuses, fuse extractor, fuse chart
a Spare wheel (collapsible tire)
b Alignment bolt
c Towing eye bolt
d Collapsible wheel chock
e Spare wheel bolts
f Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
왘
To remove jack 8, loosen the hook
and loop fastener.
473
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicle jack
Warning!
The vehicle jack is located underneath the
storage compartment floor.
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface.
Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the
jack take-up bracket. Always lower the
vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands
before working under the vehicle.
474
Operational position
왘
Storage position
Turn crank handle clockwise until it
engages (operational position).
왘
Remove vehicle jack from its storage
compartment (컄 page 472).
Before storing the vehicle jack in its storage compartment:
왘
Push crank handle up.
앫
The vehicle jack should be fully collapsed.
앫
The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Setting up the collapsible wheel chock
왘
Tilt both plates upward 1.
The collapsible wheel chock serves to additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
changing the wheel.
왘
Fold the lower plate outward 2.
왘
Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
way into the openings of base plate 3.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting the vehicle” (컄 page 498).
Spare wheel
Warning!
G
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with a spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
1 Tilt the plate upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® with a spare
wheel mounted.
475
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare
wheel with collapsible tire. The spare
wheel is located underneath the cargo
compartment floor (컄 page 472).
i For information on how to mount the spare
wheel, see “Mounting the spare wheel”
(컄 page 498).
Removing the spare wheel
왘
Remove the jack from the vehicle tool
kit (컄 page 473).
왘
Loosen retaining screw 1 by turning it
counterclockwise.
Reinstalling the spare wheel after use
There are two guide pins in the spare wheel
well that serve to hold the spare wheel in
place.
i If retaining screw 1 does not come loose,
turn vehicle tool kit storing well casing 3 slightly
counterclockwise. Retaining screw 1 should
then come loose easily.
왘
Turn vehicle tool kit storing well
casing 3 by approximately 180°.
The electric air pump (컄 page 473)
points towards the rear.
1 Retaining screw
2 Spare wheel
3 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
476
왘
Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 3.
왘
Remove spare wheel 2.
1 Guide pins
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왘
Turn vehicle tool kit storing well
casing 3 (컄 page 476) by approximately 180°.
The electric air pump (컄 page 473)
points in direction of travel.
왘
Fasten retaining screw 1
(컄 page 476) by turning it clockwise.
왘
Insert the jack into the vehicle tool kit
storage well casing (컄 page 473).
1 Guide pins
2 Spare wheel
i Fold the jack base outwards (against the
왘
spring power) and first insert the jack base into
the recess in the left of the storage well casing.
Place spare wheel 2 into spare wheel
well.
Make sure spare wheel 2 is placed
precisely on guide pins 1.
왘
왘
Close and pull tight the hook and
loop fastener that secures the
jack (컄 page 473).
With the electric air pump
(컄 page 473) pointing towards the
rear, insert vehicle tool kit storage well
casing 3 (컄 page 476) into spare
wheel 2.
477
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
Removing the mechanical key
Unlocking the driver’s door
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
1 Unlocking
2 Mechanical key
왘
Move locking tab 1 in direction of
arrow.
왘
Insert mechanical key 2 into the
driver’s door lock until it stops.
왘
Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
housing.
왘
Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwise to position 1 and hold it there.
왘
Pull the door handle until the locking
knob moves up.
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the
driver’s door using the mechanical key.
i Unlocking the driver’s door with the
mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system.
To cancel the alarm:
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
앫
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
앫
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 41).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
왘
478
Pull the door handle once more to open
the driver’s door.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, lock the
vehicle carrying out the following steps.
왘
Exit the vehicle.
왘
Close the driver’s door.
왘
Enter the vehicle through the rear left
door.
Press down the locking knob of the
driver’s door.
왘
Close the front passenger door, the
rear right door and the tailgate.
왘
왘
Open the driver’s door and the rear left
door.
왘
Press the central locking switch on the
driver’s door (컄 page 130).
! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make sure
to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you before proceeding with
the next step. The next step will lock the vehicle.
The locking knobs of the front passenger door and the rear doors move
down.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
drained:
왘
왘
Exit the vehicle.
왘
Close the rear left door.
Fuel filler flap
왘
Open the tailgate (컄 page 123).
The fuel filler flap release is located behind
a cover in the right side trim panel of the
cargo compartment.
The vehicle is locked.
i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft
alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap.
1 Lock
2 Cover
컄컄
Press down the locking knobs of
the front passenger door and the
rear doors manually.
479
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
컄컄왘
Insert a suitable object such as a coin
into the slot of lock 1.
왘
Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90°
in direction of arrow.
왘
Remove cover 2.
왘
Pull red fuel filler flap release 3 in
direction of arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
왘
Open the fuel filler flap (컄 page 360).
i The fuel filler flap release may differ,
depending on production date. If your vehicle is
not equipped with the fuel filler flap release as
illustrated, pulling a red fabric cord instead
unlocks the fuel filler flap.
3 Fuel filler flap release
480
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
You can open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof manually should an electrical
malfunction occur.
왘
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located
behind a cover on the overhead control
panel.
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 67).
Open the driver’s door (this puts
the starter switch to position 0,
same as with the SmartKey
removed from starter switch).
The driver’s door can then be
closed again.
왘
Press on cover 1 at the position
indicated by the arrow.
왘
Take off cover 1.
왘
Take crank 2 out of the Operator’s
Manual pouch.
왘
Insert crank 2 into hole.
왘
Turn crank 2 clockwise to
왘
앫
slide sunroof closed
앫
raise sunroof at the rear
Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to
앫
slide sunroof open
앫
lower sunroof at the rear
i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized if
it has been operated manually (컄 page 260).
i The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel* cannot be operated as described.
Contact Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
1 Cover
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
2 Crank
481
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraints have been
triggered in a rear-end collision, the active
head restraints must be reset. Otherwise,
the active head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another rear-end collision.
You can tell that the active head restraints
have been activated when they have been
moved forward and cannot be adjusted.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, have the active head
restraints checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center after a
rear-end collision.
! Be careful not to damage upholstery.
i For your convenience, we recommend that
왘
Guide reset tool 1 into the rectangular opening of active head
restraint 2.
왘
Press reset tool 1 downward in
direction of arrow until you hear the
head restraint release mechanism
audibly disengage.
왘
Pull out reset tool 1.
왘
Firmly press the active head restraint
cushion backward towards the head restraint cover in direction of arrow until
it engages.
왘
Repeat this procedure on the active
head restraint for the second front
seat.
왘
After resetting the active head
restraints store reset tool 1 in the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
you have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
You will find the reset tool for manually operating
the active head restraints in the Mercedes-Benz
vehicle literature pouch.
Warning!
G
When pushing back the head restraint
cushion, take care that your fingers do not
become caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
482
1 Reset tool
2 Active head restraint
왘
Take the reset tool 1 out of the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
pouch.
For information on active head restraints,
see “Active head restraints” (컄 page 83).
For information on head restraint adjustment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
왔 Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Warning!
G
i When replacing batteries, always replace
왘
both batteries. The required replacement
batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
SmartKey housing.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
왘
Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (컄 page 478).
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
i When replacing batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
3 Batteries
4 Contact springs
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
왘
Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
왘
Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.
The battery compartment is unlatched.
왘
Pull out batteries 3.
왘
Using a line-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under contact springs 4 with
the positive terminal (+) side facing up.
왘
Return battery compartment 2 into
housing until it locks into place.
왘
Slide mechanical key 1 back into
SmartKey.
왘
Check the operation of the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
483
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp
assemblies are in good working order at
all times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
headlamp adjustment.
484
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights
on should clear up the fogging.
앫
Turn signal lamps
앫
Brake lamps
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Tail lamps
when the following lamps malfunction:
Read and observe messages in the multifunction
display (컄 page 463).
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
Rear lamps
Type
1 Parking/standing lamp W 5 W
2 Turn signal lamp
3 Additional turn signal
lamp
4 Headlamps:
Low beam
Lamp
Type
PY 21 W
8 High-mounted brake
lamp
LED
LED
9 Tail, brake, and side
marker lamp
P 21 W
a Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
b Backup lamp
P 21 W
H7 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon headlamps*:
Low beam1
D2S-35 W
5 Headlamps:
High beam/high beam
flasher
H7 (55 W)
c Rear fog lamp (driver’s
side only)
P 21 W
d License plate lamps
C5W
Bi-Xenon headlamps*:
High beam/high beam
flasher spot lamp
H7 (55 W)
1
6 Side marker lamp
WY 5 W
7 Corner-illuminating
front fog lamp*
H11 (55 W)
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Do not
replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
485
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Warning!
G
Notes on bulb replacement
앫
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch the lights off before changing a
bulb to prevent short circuits.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas.
A bulb can explode if you:
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
486
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:
앫
the additional turn signal lamps in the
exterior rear view mirrors
앫
the high mounted brake lamp
앫
the Bi-Xenon* low beam lamps
앫
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
the Bi-Xenon* high beam flasher spotlight
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not
come on, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
the front side marker lamps
! Do not replace the bulbs yourself. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced by a qualified
specialist workshop having the necessary skills
and tools for carrying out the work required.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam headlamp bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
왘
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 146).
왘
Turn cover 1 counterclockwise.
왘
Remove cover 1.
왘
Turn bulb socket 3 counterclockwise.
왘
Pull bulb socket 3 out of the headlamp housing.
왘
Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb
socket 3.
왘
Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb
socket 3.
왘
Insert bulb socket 3 into the headlamp housing.
왘
Turn bulb socket 3 clockwise until it
engages.
왘
Place cover 1 on the opening in the
headlamp housing.
왘
Turn cover 1 clockwise until it
engages.
Open the hood (컄 page 364).
Halogen headlamps
2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
1 Low beam/high beam headlamp cover
2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
3 Bulb socket for low beam headlamp
4 Bulb socket for high beam headlamp
487
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
High beam headlamp bulbs
Front turn signal lamp bulbs
왘
Turn cover 1 counterclockwise.
왘
왘
Remove cover 1.
Pull bulb socket 2 out of the headlamp housing.
왘
Turn bulb socket 4 counterclockwise.
왘
왘
Pull bulb socket 4 out of the headlamp housing.
Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb
socket 2.
왘
Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb
socket 2.
왘
Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb
socket 4.
왘
Insert bulb socket 2 into the headlamp housing.
왘
Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb
socket 4.
왘
Insert bulb socket 4 into the headlamp housing.
왘
Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it
engages.
왘
Place cover 1 on the opening in the
headlamp housing.
왘
Turn cover 1 clockwise until it
engages.
Bi-Xenon headlamps*
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
2 Low beam/high beam headlamp cover
– Do not remove
1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
488
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Low beam and high beam flasher spot
bulbs
Warning!
Parking and standing lamp bulbs
Corner-illuminating front fog lamp*
bulbs
G
Do not remove the low beam/high beam
cover for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because
of high voltage in Bi-Xenon* lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
and its components. We recommend that
you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
1 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp
Front turn signal lamp bulbs
왘
Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise.
왘
Pull bulb socket 1 out of the headlamp housing.
왘
Pull bulb socket 1 out of the housing.
왘
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 1.
왘
Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb
socket 1.
왘
Insert the new parking and standing
lamp bulb into bulb socket 1.
왘
Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb
socket 1.
왘
Insert bulb socket 1 into the housing.
왘
Insert bulb socket 1 into the headlamp housing.
왘
Turn bulb socket 1 clockwise until it
engages.
Example illustration (except R 63 AMG)
1 Corner-illuminating front fog lamp*
2 Cover
3 Retaining screw
489
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Example illustration (R 63 AMG)
왘
Remove screws 4 that retain front fog
lamp 1.
왘
Remove corner-illuminating front fog
lamp 1.
Example illustration (except R 63 AMG)
1 Corner-illuminating front fog lamp*
2 Cover
3 Retaining screws
왘
Remove retaining screw(s) 3.
왘
All models except R 63 AMG:
Insert a suitable object (e.g.
screwdriver) at point indicated by the
arrow and pry out cover 2.
Cover 2 is released.
왘
Swing cover 2 outwards and take it
off.
왘
R 63 AMG:
Take off cover 2.
490
5 Corner-illuminating front fog lamp bulb
socket
Example illustration (R 63 AMG)
4 Retaining screws
i R 63 AMG only:
An additional adapter cable is used to connect
the bulb socket with the vehicle’s electrical
circuit. Reuse the adapter cable after replacing
the bulb.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘
Turn bulb socket 5 counterclockwise.
Additional turn signal lamps bulbs
왘
Pull bulb socket 5 out of the housing.
왘
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5.
The additional turn signal lamps in the
exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
왘
Insert the new corner-illuminating front
fog lamp bulb into bulb socket 5.
왘
Insert bulb socket 5 into the housing.
왘
Turn bulb socket 5 clockwise until it
engages.
왘
Insert corner-illuminating front fog
lamp 1 back into bumper.
왘
Fasten retaining screws 4.
왘
Reinsert cover 2 and press it in until it
engages.
왘
Fasten retaining screw(s) 3.
If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to
function, the entire turn signal unit must
be replaced. Have the turn signal unit replaced by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following first:
왘
Turn the combination switch to
position M (컄 page 146).
Tail lamp unit
i To access the tail lamp units, you have to
Front side marker lamp bulbs
Since replacing the side marker lamp bulbs
is a technically highly demanding process,
we recommend you have the side marker
lamp bulbs replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
remove the cover in the corresponding side trim
panel of the cargo compartment.
왘
Open the tailgate (컄 page 123).
491
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Opening the side trim panels
왘
Insert a suitable object such as a coin
into the slot of lock 1.
왘
Turn lock 1 clockwise (left side trim
panel) or counterclockwise (right side
trim panel) by 90° in direction of arrow.
왘
1 Lock
2 Cover in left side trim panel
492
Depending on which bulb needs to be
replaced, turn the respective bulb
socket 1 - 4 counterclockwise.
왘
Pull the bulb socket out of the housing.
왘
Similarly turn the bulb counterclockwise carefully and pull the bulb out of
bulb socket.
왘
Insert the new bulb into the bulb
socket.
왘
Turn the bulb in the bulb socket clockwise carefully.
왘
Insert the bulb socket into the housing.
왘
Turn the bulb socket clockwise until it
engages.
Remove cover 2.
Replacing bulbs
1 Lock
2 Cover in right side trim panel
왘
1 Tail, side marker, standing, and parking
lamp bulb socket
2 Turn signal lamp bulb socket
3 Fog lamp bulb socket
(driver’s side only)
4 Backup lamp bulb socket
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamps
1 License plate lamp cover
2 Screw
왘
Loosen screws 2.
왘
Remove license plate lamp cover 1.
왘
Replace the license plate lamp bulb.
왘
Reinstall license plate lamp cover 1.
왘
Retighten screws 2.
493
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove the SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
and cause injury.
Warning!
G
Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Change the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
Front wiper blades
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms
are folded forward.
왘
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
Fold the wiper arms forward until they
engage.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may
cause windshield damage.
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Removing
왘
1 Wiper blade
2 Tab
3 Wiper arm
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Press tabs 2 together.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Tilt wiper blade 1 away from wiper
arm 3.
왘
Take off wiper blade 1 in direction of
arrow.
왘
494
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear.
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0
(컄 page 41).
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing
왘
Fold wiper blade 1 towards wiper
arm.
Tabs 2 (컄 page 494) must engage
into both recesses of attachment 2.
1 Wiper blade
2 Attachment
3 Guide tab
4 Opening
왘
With guide tab 3 sliding into
opening 4, place wiper blade 1 onto
wiper arm in direction of arrow.
왘
Check whether the wiper blade is
securely fastened.
왘
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on
the windshield.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
Rear wiper blade
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
and cause injury.
! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the impact
from the tensioning spring could crack the rear
window.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the rear
window glass without a wiper blade inserted.
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may
cause rear window damage.
495
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Removing
! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It
왘
could tear.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
왘
Fold wiper arm 1 away from the rear
window until it engages.
왘
Turn wiper blade 2 to form a right
angle with wiper arm 1 as shown.
왘
Hold wiper arm 1 and disengage
wiper blade 2 by carefully sliding it in
direction of arrow.
왘
Remove wiper blade 2.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*
왘
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0
(컄 page 41).
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
Installing
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
왘
Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper
arm 1.
왘
Hold wiper arm 1 and engage wiper
blade 2 by pushing it in direction of
arrow until it locks into place.
왘
Check whether the wiper blade is
securely fastened.
왘
Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear
window.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
496
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Warning!
G
Preparing the vehicle
왘
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface
when possible.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flasher
(컄 page 152).
왘
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed a vehicle speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Turn the steering wheel so that the
front wheels are in a straight-ahead
position.
왘
Set the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Set the automatic transmission to
position P (컄 page 197).
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 67).
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
i Open doors only when conditions are safe to
Do not switch off the ESP® with a spare
wheel mounted.
왘
do so.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* button once
(컄 page 67).
왘
Open the driver’s door (this puts
the starter switch in position 0,
same as with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed
again.
왘
Remove the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button from the starter
switch.
i You can use the power outlets in the cargo
compartment or in the second seat row to
operate the electric air pump even when the
ignition is switched off, e.g. in order to inflate the
collapsible tire (컄 page 501).
An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the
vehicle’s electrical voltage does not fall below a
minimum level. If the voltage drops to this minimum level, the power outlets are automatically
switched off. This ensures that enough power
remains to start the engine.
497
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Prepare the vehicle as described
(컄 page 497).
왘
Take the wheel wrench and the vehicle
jack from the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 473).
왘
Take the spare wheel from the wheel
well under the cargo compartment
floor (컄 page 476).
왘
Lifting the vehicle
Warning!
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
firmly set parking brake and block wheels
before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface.
Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the
jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.
498
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
or other sizable objects.
One wheel chock is included with the
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 473).
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place the wheel chock in front of and
another sizable object behind the
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack
on a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill,
place the wheel chock and another sizable
object as follows:
왘
Place the wheel chock and another
sizable object on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the axle not
being worked on.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
왘
Place jack 3 on firm ground.
왘
Position jack 3 under the take-up
bracket 2 so that it is always vertical
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
왘
Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack 3
is fully seated in take-up bracket 2
and the jack base evenly meets the
ground.
왘
Continue to turn crank 4 until the
wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm)
from the ground.
The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not
suited for performing maintenance work
under the vehicle.
1 Wheel wrench
왘
앫
Never start the engine when the vehicle
is raised.
앫
Never lie down under the raised vehicle.
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with wheel
wrench 1).
The jack take-up brackets are located
directly behind the front wheel housings
and in front of the rear wheel housings.
! Do not position the jack on the body of the
vehicle, as this may cause damage to the
vehicle.
2 Take-up bracket
3 Jack
4 Crank
499
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
Mounting the spare wheel
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first
wheel bolt.
Warning!
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are
damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
1 Alignment bolt
왘
Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
remove.
왘
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bolt 1 supplied in the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 472).
왘
Remove the remaining wheel bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This
could result in damage to the bolts and wheel
hub threads.
왘
Remove the wheel.
500
1 Wheel bolt for 18", 19", 20" and 21"
light alloy wheels and R 63 AMG spare
wheel
2 Wheel bolt for 17" light alloy wheels or
18" spare wheel (located in trunk with
spare wheel)
! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting 17" wheels or the 18" spare wheel with
collapsible tire. The use of any wheel bolts other
than wheel bolts 2 for 17" wheels or the
18" spare wheel with collapsible tire will physically damage the vehicle’s brakes.
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Warning!
G
Only use genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
왘
Guide spare wheel onto the alignment
bolt and push it on.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
왘
Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last
wheel bolt and tighten slightly.
Inflating the collapsible tire
Warning!
G
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump (컄 page 472) before lowering the
vehicle.
Warning!
G
Observe instructions on air pump label.
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the
collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be damaged.
왘
Take the electric air pump out of the
vehicle tool kit storage well
(컄 page 472).
501
컄컄
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄
왘
Screw union nut 5 onto the
collapsible tire valve.
왘
Insert electrical plug 3 into a power
outlet (컄 page 322).
! The cigarette lighter* (컄 page 319) is not
designed for use with the electric air pump. Use
a power outlet (컄 page 322) for electric air
pump operation.
왘
Electric air pump
1 Flap
2 On/off switch
3 Electrical plug
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
5 Union nut
왘
Open flap 1 on electric air pump.
왘
Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
with pressure gauge 4.
왘
Remove the valve cap from the
collapsible tire valve.
502
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1.
왘
왘
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once without depressing the
brake pedal.
Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
The electric air pump should now
switch on and inflate the collapsible
tire.
왘
Inflate the spare wheel tire to the
recommended tire inflation pressure
given in the “Technical data” section
(컄 page 532).
This takes about 5 minutes for the
collapsible tire.
Warning!
G
Air hose 4 and union nut 5 can become
hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution
to avoid burning yourself when using the
equipment.
! Do not operate the electric air pump longer
than 8 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it
may overheat.
You may operate the electric air pump again
after it has cooled off.
Practical hints
Flat tire
! Please compare the recommended tire in-
G
Lowering the vehicle
flation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on
the spare wheel rim.
Warning!
Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.
Warning!
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to
the recommended tire inflation pressure given
on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly mounted.
왘
Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0.
왘
왘
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button twice without depressing
the brake pedal.
If the tire inflation pressure is above
the recommended tire inflation pressure given in this Operator’s Manual,
release excess tire inflation pressure
using the vent screw.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
왘
Detach the electric air pump.
왘
Store the electrical plug and the air
hose behind the flap and place the
electric air pump back in the vehicle
tool kit storage well.
G
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump (컄 page 501) before lowering the
vehicle.
왘
Lower vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.
왘
Remove the jack.
1-5 Wheel bolts
503
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘
Store jack and all other vehicle tool kit
items back into the storage well.
i The removed road wheel cannot be stored in
the spare wheel well under the cargo compartment floor, but should be transported in the
cargo compartment wrapped in a protective
wrap.
Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS*:
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure monitor until a full size wheel/tire with functioning
sensor has been placed back into service on the
vehicle.
6 Wheel wrench
왘
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
504
Practical hints
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
왔 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is
empty is not recommended. Otherwise, air
may be sucked into the fuel system. If this
happens, the ? malfunction indicator
lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction
indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on
and the engine may not start immediately
after refueling the vehicle.
After refueling:
왘
Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P.
The gear position indicator in the multifunction display should be on P.
왘
Do not depress the accelerator.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If necessary,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from
the starter switch (컄 page 41).
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 for at least 10 seconds
(컄 page 40).
왘
Return the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 (컄 page 40).
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 (컄 page 41) and hold it
there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
until the engine runs surge-free.
If the engine does not start:
왘
Wait for approximately 2 minutes.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 3 (컄 page 41) and hold it
there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
until the engine runs surge-free.
If the engine still does not start, do not
make any further attempts to start the engine. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light truck Center or call
Roadside Assistance (컄 page 333).
i When the ? malfunction indicator lamp
(USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator
lamp (Canada only) has been illuminated for the
above condition, it will remain illuminated until
the engine was cycled on and off four times in a
row.
505
Practical hints
Battery
The battery is located under the front
passenger seat.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends to have the
battery replaced at authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service life.
G
Warning!
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
Keep children away.
Fire, open flames and smoking
are prohibited when handling
batteries. Avoid creating sparks.
When replacing the battery, always use
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
506
Rinse any acid spills immediately with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
Risk of explosion.
If you use your vehicle mostly for
short-distance trips, you will need to have
the battery charge checked more
frequently.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center about steps you need to observe.
Wear eye protection.
Wear suitable protective clothing, especially gloves, apron and
faceguard.
Follow the instructions in this
Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Practical hints
Battery
! The battery is a valve-regulated lead acid
(VRLA) battery, also referred to as “fleece”
battery. Such batteries do not require topping-up
of the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore
do not have cell caps and the battery cover is
non-removable. Do not attempt to open the
battery as otherwise the battery will be damaged.
Even though VRLA batteries do not require
topping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be
opened to check the electrolyte level, the
battery condition must be checked periodically
by performing a battery conductance test. Refer
to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition
testing intervals.
As with any other battery, the battery may
discharge if the vehicle is not operated for an
extended period of time. You can connect a
battery maintenance charge unit tested and
approved for use on your vehicle model or disconnected the battery to prevent battery discharge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for more information.
! The factory-equipped VRLA battery is
leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement
that has the same security features and is of
identical size, voltage, and capacity as the
factory-equipped battery.
The battery, the battery ventilation and the lateral plug must always be securely installed when
the vehicle is in operation.
Warning!
G
Jump starting must only be done using the
jump-start contacts located in the engine
compartment (컄 page 514).
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 506).
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
507
Practical hints
Battery
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the
alternator and other electronic components
could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for further information.
Warning!
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
508
Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling
and reconnecting the battery
Warning!
G
Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and
reconnecting the battery is a complicated
and technically demanding procedure that
also requires safety precautions to avoid the
risk of injury. We strongly recommend that it
be performed by a qualified technician or an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center only. Please read the instructions
fully before beginning operation and only
undertake it if you feel fully capable of
performing all of the tasks involved as
described in these instructions. Observe all
safety instructions and precautions when
handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 506). Performing the tasks involved
incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle
and impair the operating safety of the
vehicle, and/or cause severe injury to you
or others.
i With a disconnected battery you will no longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
start/stop button will have no effect.
Step 1 (Disconnecting)
i If your battery is discharged, the vehicle
must be jump started (컄 page 514) using the
jump start contacts in the engine compartment,
or an accessory battery charge unit* approved
by Mercedes-Benz must be connected using the
jump start contacts in the engine compartment
(see separate instructions for the accessory
battery charge unit*) before any of the following
steps can be performed. If the battery cannot be
jumped or charged, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘
Set the automatic transmission to
position P (컄 page 199).
왘
Firmly depress the parking brake
(컄 page 66).
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 67).
왘
Leave the ignition switched on
(컄 page 39).
Practical hints
Battery
i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you
Step 2 (Disconnecting)
had the vehicle jump started:
앫
Leave the engine running.
앫
Complete step 1, starting with switching off
all electrical consumers.
앫
Continue with step 2.
앫
When the font passenger seat is in the most
forward position, turn off the engine.
왘
Switch off all electrical consumers.
왘
Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 506).
왘
Open the front passenger door.
i Open doors only when conditions are safe to
do so.
왘
Move the front passenger seat to the
most rearward position (컄 page 45).
3 Battery cover mounting nuts
1 Seat rail cover, front right
2 Seat rail cover, front left
왘
Pull off right seat rail cover 1 in direction of arrow.
왘
Pull left seat rail cover 2 in direction
of arrow as far as it will go.
Left seat rail cover 2 cannot be removed.
왘
Using a 6 mm T-handle hex key (not
supplied with vehicle) with a minimum
shaft length of 12 in (30 cm), unfasten
and remove battery cover mounting
nuts 3 located at the floor carpet perforation.
왘
Move the front passenger seat to the
most forward position (컄 page 45).
509
컄컄
Practical hints
Battery
컄컄왘
Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40).
Step 3 (Disconnecting)
Step 4 (Disconnecting)
4 Seat rail, rear
5 Seat rail cover, rear
6 Floor carpet
i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you
had the vehicle jump started, turn off the engine.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0.
After turning off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
with the driver’s door closed, the
starter switch is in position 1.
With the driver’s door opened, the
starter switch is set to position 0,
same as SmartKey removed from
starter switch (컄 page 41).
510
왘
왘
Pull seat rail cover 5 away from seat
rail 4 on both sides as indicated by
arrows.
Pull off seat rail cover 5 to the rear as
indicated by arrow.
왘
Pull back and fold floor carpet 6 in
direction of the arrow.
i To release the floor carpet perforations (see
dotted line in above illustration), you will have to
apply somewhat greater force when pulling the
floor carpet back.
Practical hints
Battery
Step 5 (Disconnecting)
Step 6 (Disconnecting)
Step 7 (Disconnecting)
7 Battery cover mounting nuts
8 Battery cover with integrated air
channel
9 Pulling battery cover out
a Lifting battery cover
b Battery ventilation hose
c Battery
d Battery attachment
e Attachment nuts
왘
Lift battery cover 8 slightly in direction of arrow a.
왘
Pull battery ventilation hose b out of
battery c.
왘
Pull battery cover 8 in direction of
arrow 9.
왘
Unfasten and remove attachment
nuts e.
왘
Remove battery cover 8.
왘
Remove battery attachment d.
왘
Push battery c to the left.
왘
Unfasten and remove battery cover
mounting nuts 7.
511
Practical hints
Battery
Step 8 (Disconnecting)
Step 9 (Removing)
왘
Take out battery.
Step 10 (Reinstalling)
왘
Carry out step 9 (컄 page 512).
f Positive terminal with cover
g Negative terminal
왘
Carry out steps 7 through 1 in reverse
order to complete reinstall the battery,
(컄 page 511) to (컄 page 508).
Step 11 (Reconnecting)
왘
If the battery has been removed, carry
out step 9 (컄 page 512) before starting
the connecting procedure.
왘
Open the driver’s door.
왘
Make sure the SmartKey is removed
from the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Disconnect battery negative lead from
negative terminal g.
왘
Make sure the negative lead does not
come into contact with the positive
lead.
Battery, shown removed for illustration
왘
Remove the cover from positive
terminal f.
왘
Disconnect battery positive lead from
positive terminal f.
! The battery, battery ventilation hose b,
and vent plug h must always be securely
installed when the vehicle is in operation.
512
왘
b Battery ventilation hose
h Vent plug
왘
Carry out step 11 to reconnect the
battery (컄 page 512).
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
electronics have status 0.
With the driver’s door opened, the
vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0, same as SmartKey
removed from the starter
switch (컄 page 41).
Practical hints
Battery
왘
왘
Connect the positive lead to the positive terminal and fasten it’s cover
(컄 page 512).
Connect the negative lead to the negative terminal (컄 page 512).
If the battery is discharged, the battery can
be charged using the jump-start contacts
located in the engine compartment
(컄 page 515).
! Never invert the terminal connections!
i The following procedures must be carried
out following any interruption of battery power
(e.g. due to disconnection):
앫
Set the clock (컄 page 181).
Vehicles with COMAND system with navigation module*: Time and date are set automatically.
앫
Synchronize the door windows
(컄 page 254).
앫
Synchronize the power tilt/sliding sunroof*
(컄 page 260).
앫
Synchronize the power tilt/sliding panel*
(컄 page 264).
앫
Synchronize the power folding exterior rear
view mirrors* (컄 page 214).
왘
Charging the battery
Warning!
G
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
Charge the battery in accordance with
the instructions of the battery charger
manufacturer.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
513
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫
앫
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Jump starting should only be performed
using the jump-start contacts in the engine compartment (컄 page 515).
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
앫
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic
converter1 are cold.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system,
which will not be covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
앫
Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
1
514
Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
parts that move when the engine is
started or running.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated
failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter1.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
The jump-start contacts are located in the
engine compartment.
1 Negative (-) terminal
2 Positive (+) terminal
왘
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Apply parking brake.
왘
Set automatic transmission to
position P.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 364).
왘
Open cover of positive terminal 2.
1 Negative terminal of discharged
battery
2 Positive terminal of discharged battery
3 Negative terminal of charged battery
4 Positive terminal of charged battery 컄컄
515
Practical hints
Jump starting
컄컄왘
Connect positive terminals 2 and 4
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to
charged battery 4 first.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not switch on the headlamps
under any circumstances.
왘
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
왘
왘
Connect negative terminals 1 and 3
of the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to charged battery 3
first.
! Never invert the terminal connections!
왘
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
516
Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 1 and 3 and then
from the positive terminals 2 and 4.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
왘
Have the battery checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the
vehicle be transported with all wheels off
the ground using flatbed or appropriate
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is
preferable to other types of towing.
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment,
with the SmartKey in starter switch turned to
position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will
damage radiator and supports.
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
Use the towing eyes.
Switch off the ESP® (컄 page 104) and the
automatic central locking (컄 page 130).
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
could damage the transfer case, which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe
instructions for towing the vehicles with all
wheels on the ground.
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the
vehicle may be towed with all wheels on
the ground only so far as necessary to have
the vehicle moved to a safe location where
the recommended towing methods can be
employed.
Warning!
G
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the power
supply or in the vehicle’s electrical
system
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the starter switch is
in position 2 (컄 page 39).
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, the automatic transmission must be
in position N and the starter switch must be in
position 2 (컄 page 39).
When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
ground, the vehicle may be towed only for
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed
not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Keep in mind that it is important for the
SmartKey to be in the respective starter switch
positions as described above. As soon as the
SmartKey is removed from the starter switch or
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is removed
from the vehicle, the automatic transmission will
shift to park position P, see “Starter switch positions” (컄 page 39).
517
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
! Towing of the vehicle should only be done
using the towing eye. Never attach tow cable,
tow rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame or
suspension parts.
i When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and
the ignition in position 2 (컄 page 39), the vehicle
doors lock if the left front wheel is turning at a
speed of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or above.
Installing towing eye bolt
Depending on whether you are towing a
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing
eye bolt can be screwed into threaded
holes which are located behind covers on
the right-hand side of each bumper.
Example illustration R 500
To prevent the vehicle doors from locking,
deactivate the automatic central locking
(컄 page 130).
1 Towing eye cover
i To signal turns while being towed with
hazard warning flasher in use, set the starter
switch to position 2 and activate combination
switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner
– only the selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
i If the battery is disconnected or discharged,
the automatic transmission will remain locked in
position P and the SmartKey will not turn in the
starter switch. For more information, see “Battery” (컄 page 506) and “Jump starting”
(컄 page 514).
518
Warning!
Example illustration R 500
1 Towing eye cover
G
In order to avoid possible serious burns or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the cover, because the rear exhaust pipe is
extremely hot.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Removing cover
Removing towing eye bolt
왘
Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by
the arrow.
왘
Loosen towing eye bolt counterclockwise with wheel wrench.
왘
Lift off cover 1 to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
왘
Unscrew towing eye bolt.
왘
Store the towing eye bolt and wheel
wrench back into the vehicle toolkit
(컄 page 473).
Installing towing eye bolt
왘
왘
Take the towing eye bolt and wheel
wrench from the vehicle toolkit
(컄 page 473).
Screw towing eye bolt in to its stop and
tighten with wheel wrench.
왘
Engage cover 1 at top and press at
bottom.
Installing cover
왘
Engage cover 1 at top and press at
bottom.
Stranded vehicle
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should
be done with the greatest of care, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or diagonally, since it could result in damage to the
chassis alignment.
Never try to free a vehicle that is still coupled to a trailer.
If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward
in its own previously made tracks.
519
Practical hints
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and
systems secured by that fuse will stop
operating.
Warning!
G
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the
cause determined and remedied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center
i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage
recommended in the fuse chart.
Any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be
glad to advise you on this subject.
520
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have
the cause determined and rectified by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following aids are available to help you
replace fuses. They are included with the
vehicle tool kit (컄 page 473):
앫
Before replacing fuses:
왘
Apply the parking brake (컄 page 66).
왘
Make sure automatic transmission is
set to position P (컄 page 199).
The gear position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P.
Fuse chart
The fuse chart explains the fuse allocation and fuse amperages.
앫
Spare fuses
앫
Fuse extractor
The electrical fuses are located in different
fuse boxes:
앫
on the passenger side of the engine
compartment (컄 page 521)
앫
in the cargo compartment
(컄 page 521)
앫
in the passenger compartment
(컄 page 522)
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Turn off the engine (컄 page 67).
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘
Open the driver’s door (this puts
the starter switch to position 0,
same as with the SmartKey removed from starter switch). The
driver’s door can then be closed
again.
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in engine compartment
The main fuse box is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment.
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 364).
왘
Release clamp 1.
왘
Lift fuse box cover 2 up.
왘
Install fuse box cover in reverse order.
! The fuse box cover must be installed
properly to prevent moisture and/or dirt from
entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse
operation.
왘
Close the hood after checking or replacing fuses (컄 page 366).
Fuse box in cargo compartment
The fuse box is located under the cargo
compartment cover on the right-hand side
of the spare wheel well.
왘
Open the tailgate (컄 page 123).
왘
Lift the cargo compartment cover
(컄 page 472).
왘
Secure cargo compartment cover with
strap (컄 page 473).
1 Clamp
2 Main fuse box cover
1 Cover
왘
Fold cover 1 to the left as indicated by
the arrow.
521
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in passenger compartment
Opening:
왘
Pull cover 1 in direction of arrow.
The fuse box is located behind a cover in
the dashboard on the passenger side.
Closing:
왘
왘
Open the front passenger door.
왘
Clip upper end of cover 1 into opening.
Emergency engine shut-down
If the engine cannot be turned off as described in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 67), do the following:
왘
Take the fuse chart and the fuse
extractor from the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 472).
왘
Open the fuse box in the engine compartment (컄 page 521).
왘
Use the fuse extractor to remove
fuse 120.
Push on lower end of cover 1 until it
engages.
Find its location in the fuse chart.
1 Cover
! Do not use sharp objects such as a screwdriver to open fuse box cover 1, as this could
damage it.
522
i R 500: Remove fuse 114 to shut-down the
engine. Find its location in the fuse chart.
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
523
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine
Mercedes-Benz Parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections.
Each part has been specifically developed,
manufactured or selected for and adapted
to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
should be installed.
524
! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s
durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed on the vehicle
in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫
Emission System Warranty
앫
Emission Performance Warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
Accessories warranties, copies of which
are available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange
for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
525
Technical data
Identification labels
1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar)
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
can be found in the following locations:
2 Paintwork code
3 VIN
앫
on the certification label
앫
embossed underneath the
passenger-side seat in the second
seat row (컄 page 527)
앫
on the lower edge of the windshield
(컄 page 527)
526
Example certification label
(Canada vehicles)
2 Paintwork code
3 VIN
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the illustration. Refer to certification
label on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
Technical data
Identification labels
4 Second-row seat
5 Carpet
6 VIN
왘
왘
Move second-row seat 4 on passenger side to the rear as far as possible (컄 page 138).
Fold carpet 5 in direction of arrow.
You may have to cut the perforated
carpet using a sharp object, e. g. a
knife.
7 Vacuum line routing diagram label
8 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
9 VIN (lower edge of windshield)
a Engine number (engraved on engine)
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine number.
527
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
R 320 CDI
R 350
R 500
1 Coolant pump
2 Idler pulley
3 Automatic belt tensioner
4 Power steering pump
5 Air conditioning compressor
6 Crankshaft
7 Idler pulley
8 Generator (alternator)
1 Idler pulley
2 Idler pulley
3 Automatic belt tensioner
4 Power steering pump
5 Air conditioning compressor
6 Crankshaft
7 Coolant pump
8 Generator (alternator)
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
528
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
R 63 AMG
1 Idler pulley
2 Idler pulley
3 Idler pulley
4 Automatic belt tensioner
5 Power steering pump
6 Air conditioning compressor
7 Crankshaft
8 Coolant pump
9 Generator (alternator)
529
Technical data
Engine
Model
R 320 CDI (251.122)1
R 350 (251.165)1
Engine
642
272
Mode of operation
Diesel 4-stroke engine
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
6
6
Bore
3.27 in (83.00 mm)
3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke
3.62 in (92.00 mm)
3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
182 cu in (2987 cm )
213 cu in (3498 cm3)
Compression ratio
16.5:1
10.7:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
221 hp/3800 rpm
(165 kW/3800 rpm)
268 hp/6000 rpm 2
(200 kW/6000 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
398 lb-ft/1600 - 2400 rpm
(540 Nm/1600 - 2400 rpm)
258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm
(350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
4500 rpm
6500 rpm
Firing order
1-4-2-5-3-6
1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt
2035 mm
2404 mm
1
3
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
530
Technical data
Engine
Model
R 500 (251.175)1
R 63 AMG (251.177)1
Engine
113
156
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
8
Bore
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3.72 in (94.60 mm)
3
Total piston displacement
303 cu in (4966 cm )
379 cu in (6208 cm3)
Compression ratio
10:1
11.3:1
2
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
302 hp/5600 rpm
(225 kW/5600 rpm)
503 hp/6800 rpm 2
(375 kW/6800 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
339 lb-ft/2700 - 4750 rpm
(460 Nm/2700 - 4750 rpm)
465 lb-ft/5200 rpm
(630 Nm/5200 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6300 rpm
7200 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2370 mm
2369 mm
1
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
531
Technical data
Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been tested and
! Using tires other than those approved by
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by
Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best
possible performance in conjunction with the
driving safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
vehicle and tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the
following on the tire’s sidewall:
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects,
such as
앫
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment
tires
AMG vehicles:
Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG
vehicles. For information on tested and
approved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
532
앫
poor handling characteristics
앫
increased noise
앫
increased fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation
characteristics that could cause them to come
into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts.
Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the
result.
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center. A placard with the recommended
tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s
door B-pillar (컄 page 376). Some vehicles may
have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds (컄 page 381)
or for vehicle loads less than the maximum
loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 382). If such
information is provided, it can be found on the
placard located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with vehicle.
i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not available as standard or optional factory equipment,
but can be purchased from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire
configuration on your vehicle (Appearance
Package, Sport Package etc.), equipping your
vehicle with winter tires approved for your
vehicle model may also require the purchase of
two or four wheel rims of the recommended size
for use with these winter tires. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for more
information.
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
R 320 CDI
R 350
R 500
R 320 CDI (Sport Package*)
R 350 (Sport Package*)
R 500 (Sport Package*)
Rims (light alloy)
7.5 J x 17 H2
8 J x 18 H2
8 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset
2.20 in (56 mm)
2.64 in (67 mm)
2.64 in (67 mm)
235/65 R17 104H M+S
255/55 R18 105H M+S
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
All-season tires
Winter
1
tires1,2
235/65 R17 104H M+S. 255/55 R18 105H M+S. 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S.
R 320 CDI (Sport Package*)
R 350 (Sport Package*)
R 500 (Sport Package*)
R 63 AMG
AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2
8.5 J x 20 H2
Wheel offset
2.52 in (64 mm)
2.36 in (60 mm)
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
–
–
265/45 ZR20 104Y
All-season
tires1
Summer tires
Winter tires
1
2
1
1,2
255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S. 255/45 R20 105V XL (Extra Load) M+S.
Radial-ply tires
Not available as factory equipment.
533
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel (collapsible tire)
R 320 CDI
R 350
R 500
R 63 AMG
Rim (steel)
6.5 B x 18 H2
–
Rim (light alloy)
–
5.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset
1.58 in (40 mm)
0.51 in (13 mm)
195/75-18 106P
185/65-19 104P
Collapsible tire
1
Recommended tire inflation pressure 44 psi (3.0 bar)
1
51 psi (3.5 bar)
Must not be used with snow chains.
! Please compare the recommended tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire
inflation pressure on the yellow label located on
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the
collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation
pressure given on the yellow label on the spare
wheel rim.
534
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of
the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
Model
R 350
R 500
R 63 AMG
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/180 A
14 V/180 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.4 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/2.2 kW
Battery
12 V/70 Ah
12 V/95 Ah
12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs
NGK PLKR 6A
NGK PFR 5R-11
NGK T20036N
Electrode gap
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque
15 - 22 lb-ft (20 - 30 Nm)
15 - 22 lb-ft (20 - 30 Nm)
15 - 18 lb-ft (20 - 25 Nm)
Model
R 320 CDI
Generator (alternator)
14 V/220 A
Starter motor
12 V/2.2 kW
Battery
12 V/95 Ah
535
Technical data
Main Dimensions
Model
R 320 CDI, R 350
R 500
R 63 AMG
Overall vehicle length
203.0 in (5157 mm)
203.0 in (5157 mm)
203.0 in (5157 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior mirrors folded out)
85.4 in (2168 mm)
85.4 in (2168 mm)
85.4 in (2168 mm)
Overall vehicle width (exterior mirrors folded in)
75.7 in (1922 mm)
75.7 in (1922 mm)
77.5 in (1922 mm)
65.4 in (1661 mm)
65.4 in (1663 mm)
64.3 in (1634 mm)
Wheelbase
126.6 in (3215 mm)
126.6 in (3215 mm)
126.6 in (3215 mm)
Track, front
65.6 in (1665 mm)
64.7 in (1643 mm)
65.6 in (1665 mm)
65.3 in (1658 mm)
64.4 in (1636 mm)
65.0 in (1652 mm)
5.8 in (148 mm)
5.9 in (150 mm)
5.9 in (150 mm)
40.7 ft (12.4 m)
40.7 ft (12.4 m)
40.7 ft (12.4 m)
Overall vehicle height
Track, rear
Ground clearance
Turning circle
1
1
1
Data apply to unladen vehicles with standard equipment. Data may vary in vehicles equipped with AIRMATIC* depending on the selected
damping settings (컄 page 285) and the current vehicle level (컄 page 286).
536
Technical data
Weights
왔 Weights
Roof load max.
220 lb (100 kg)
537
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities
Warning!
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore use only
products tested and approved by
Mercedes Benz.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
G
Comply with all valid regulations with respect to handling, storing and disposing of
service fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of children.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a physician immediately.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
R 320 CDI
R 350
R 500
R 63 AMG
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
10.1 US qt (9.6 l)
Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Transfer case
0.53 US qt (0.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Rear axle
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
Hypoid gear oil
Front axle
1.2 US qt (1.1 l)
Hypoid gear oil
Engine with oil filter
538
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Power steering
approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid
Front wheel hubs
approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each
High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system
Cooling system
Fuel Tank
including a reserve of
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
R 320 CDI
R 350
R 500
R 63 AMG
10.0 US qt (9.5 l)
10.0 US qt (9.5 l)
11.1 US qt (10.5 l)
12.2 US qt (11.5 l)
MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
21.1 US gal (80.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
All, except R 63 AMG approx. 3.4 US gal (13.0 l)
approx. 4.0 US gal (15.0 l)
R 63 AMG
Air conditioning system
Windshield washer and
headlamp cleaning*
system
1
R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
8.0 US qt (7.6 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 546).
539
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS
(Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved
engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet,
or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
540
! Using engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles),
or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals
longer than those called for by the Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada
vehicles) will result in engine or emission control
system damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)
recommendations for scheduled oil changes.
Failure to do so could result in engine or
emission control system damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Engine oil additives
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Premium unleaded gasoline
(gasoline engine)
Brake fluid
Warning!
G
Warning!
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from the
atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous
operating conditions, this moisture content
can lead to the formation of bubbles in the
system, thus reducing the system’s
efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be
replaced regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
Maintenance Booklet for replacement
interval.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will provide you with additional
information.
G
! To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded is not available and
low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:
앫
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious
injury.
Have the fuel tank only partially filled with
unleaded regular and fill up with premium
unleaded as soon as possible.
앫
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such
as two persons and no luggage.
앫
Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator
pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or
operating in mountainous terrain.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or clothing contact,
extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with gasoline and the inhalation of gasoline vapors are damaging to
your health.
541
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives carbon deposits
can build up, especially on the intake
valves and in the combustion area, leading
to engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
542
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of
gasolines which contain these additives,
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet for a
listing of approved product(s). Follow
directions on product label.
Do not blend other specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
costs and may be harmful to the engine
operation.
Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested
and approved by us for use on
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Fuel requirements
Gasoline engine
Only use premium unleaded fuel.
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Diesel engine
Only use commercially available vehicular
diesel fuels No. 2 or No. 1 (ASTM D975 No.
2-D or No. 1-D).
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is offered in the winter months. Check with
your fuel retailer.
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The
fuel system and engine will otherwise be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which
provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
replacement interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Maintenance booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved
products of equal specification (see
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper
level.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approx. -22°F [-30°C]). If you
use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to
approx. -49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat
transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
543
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
If the coolant level is low, water and
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
be used to bring it up to the proper level
(have cooling system checked for signs of
leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
544
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum
components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be
specifically formulated to protect the
aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in
a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Approx. freeze protection
Model
–35°F (–37°C)
–49°F (–45°C)
R 320 CDI
5.0 US qt (4.75 l)
5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
R 350
5.0 US qt (4.75 l)
5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
R 500
5.6 US qt (5.25 l)
6.1 US qt (5.8 l)
R 63 AMG
6.1 US qt (5.75 l)
6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
545
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system
Both the windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system are supplied from the
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid
reservoir has a capacity of approx.
8.0 US qt (7.6 l).
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or concentrate and commercially available
premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
546
Windshield and headlamp washer fluid
mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and water:
앫
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“MB SummerFit” and commercially available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)
Index
A
ABS 100
Indicator lamp 420
Messages in the multifunction
display 435
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 203
Accessory weight 401
Accident 64
Active head restraint 83, 137, 482
Air bags 74
Children 75, 86
Front, Driver 77
Front, Passenger 77
Messages in the multifunction
display 445–448
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 88
Safety guidelines 76
Side impact 78
Window curtain 78
Air conditioning, Cooling 228, 243
Air conditioning refrigerant 540
Air conditioning system see
Climate control or
Automatic climate control (3-zone)*
Air distribution 223, 238
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Air pressure, Tires 401
Air pump, Electric 502
Air recirculation mode 226, 240
Air vents, Front 218, 224, 232, 238
Air vents, Rear 230, 245, 249
Air volume 224, 239
AIRMATIC* 285
Messages in the multifunction
display 470
Alarm system see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 472, 500
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 543, 546
Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror 212
Antiglare, Auto-dimming rear view
mirrors* 213
Anti-theft systems 107
Anti-theft alarm system 107
Immobilizer 107
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Arm rests, Second-row 141
Armrest storage compartments
Front 313
Rear* 314
Ashtrays* 319
Aspect ratio 401
ATF 370
AUDIO menu 171
CD operation 172
Radio operation 171
Satellite radio* operation 172
Audio search function 188
Auto-dimming*, Rear view mirrors 213
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirrors* 213
Automatic central locking, Control
system 189
547
Index
Automatic climate control (3-zone)* 232
Air conditioning, Cooling 243
Air conditioning refrigerant 540
Air distribution 238
Air recirculation mode 240
Air vents, Front 232, 238
Air vents, Rear 245, 249
Air volume 239
Control panel, Front 234
Control panel, Rear 245
Deactivating system 236
Defogging 240
Defrosting 239
Maximum cooling, MAX COOL 240
Rear passenger compartment 245
Residual heat utilization (REST) 244
Automatic headlamp mode 147
Automatic lighting control, Interior
lighting 154
Automatic locking when driving 130
Automatic shift program 206
548
Automatic transmission 197
Accelerator position 203
Automatic shift program 206
Emergency operation
(limp-home mode) 211
Gear ranges 205
Gear selector lever 54, 197
Gear shifting malfunctions 211
Hill start assist system 204
Kickdown 203
Kickdown, manual shift program
(R 63 AMG only) 211
Manual shift program
(R 63 AMG only) 209
Program mode selector switch 206
Shifting procedure 200
Starting the engine 54
Steering wheel gearshift control 207
Transmission fluid level 370
Transmission positions 201
Automatic transmission fluid see ATF
AUX-socket 311
B
Backrest
Seat 44
Seat, Lumbar support 136
Seat, Multicontour* 136
Backup lamps
Messages in the multifunction
display 463–468
Replacing bulbs 484
Bar 401
BAS 102
Lamps in instrument cluster 420
Messages in the multifunction
display 435
Batteries, SmartKey
Check lamp 112, 116
Checking battery condition 115, 120
Battery, Vehicle 506
Charging 513
Disconnecting and connecting 508
Jump starting 514
Removing and installing 508
Bead 401
Index
Beverage holder see Cup holder
Bleeding the fuel system
(diesel engine) 505
Bolts, Spare wheel 500
Bottle opener 317
Brake Assist System see BAS
Brake fluid 541
Checking 362
Messages in the multifunction
display 454
Brake lamp
Cleaning lenses 413
Messages in the multifunction
display 463–468
Replacing bulbs 484
Brake pads 348
Messages in the multifunction
display 452
Brakes 348
High-performance brake system
(AMG vehicles only) 350
Warning lamp 421
Break-in the vehicle 346
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs
C
California retail buyers and lessees,
Important notice for 11
Call priority, Tele Aid* 336
Can holder see Cup holder
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants 538
Card holder 32, 317
Cargo compartment
Tie-down rings 299
Cargo compartment cover blind* 306
Cargo tie-down rings 299
Carpets, Cleaning 417
Catalytic converter
(gasoline engine) 357
CD changer* 172, 311
CD player 172
Center console 31
Central locking 189
Automatic 130
Locking/unlocking from the
inside 130
Central locking switch 130
Certification label 526, 527
CHECK ENGINE malfunction
indicator lamp 423, 424
Checking tire pressure electronically
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS)*,
(Canada only) 388
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), (USA only) 385
Child safety
Infant and child restraint systems 85
Children in the vehicle 84
Air bags 75, 86
Blocking rear door window
operation 97
Indicator lamp, Front passenger front
air bag 92
Infant and child restraint
systems 93, 95
LATCH-type child seat anchors 93
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) 88
Cigarette lighter* 321
549
Index
Climate control 218
Air conditioning, Cooling 228
Air conditioning refrigerant 540
Air distribution 223
Air recirculation mode 226
Air vents, Front 218, 224
Air vents, Rear 230
Air volume 224
Control panel, Front 220
Control panel, Rear 230
Deactivating system 222
Defogging 225
Defrosting 224
Rear passenger compartment 229
Residual heat utilization (REST) 229
Clock 26, 181
Cockpit 24
Cold tire inflation pressure 401
Collapsible tire 475, 534
Collapsible wheel chock 475
Combination switch 59, 60, 62, 150
Compass 342
Control system 186
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 357
550
Control system 159
Multifunction display 159
Multifunction steering wheel 160
Resetting to factory default 176
Control system menus 162
AIRMATIC*/Compass 174
AMG Menu 168
AUDIO 171
Distance warning function* 191
Distronic* 174
Navi* 173
Settings 176
Standard display 166
TEL* 193
Trip computer 191
Vehicle status message memory 174
Control system submenus 163, 165
Comfort* 189
Instrument cluster 179
Lighting 183
Time/Date 181
Vehicle 186
Coolant 370, 539, 543
Anticorrosion/antifreeze mixing ratio
and quantity 543
Capacities 539
Checking coolant level 370
Messages in the multifunction
display 455–457
Temperature 359
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 151
Fog lamps, Front 149
Messages in the multifunction
display 464
Replacing bulbs 484, 485
Cruise control 266
Activating 267
Messages in the multifunction
display 436
Cup holders 316
Front center console 316
Rear center console 318
Curb weight 401
Index
D
Date display, Setting 181
Daytime running lamp mode 148
Setting 183
Deep water see Standing water
Defogging windshield 225, 240
Defrosting, Front 224, 239
Defrosting, Rear 217
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps 185
Interior lighting 186
Department of Transportation see DOT
Diesel engine
Bleeding fuel system 505
Preglow indicator lamp 29
Diesel fuel see Fuel
Difficulties
While driving 63
With starting 57
Digital speedometer 159, 167
Dimensions, Vehicle 536
Direction of rotation (tires) 375
Displays
Digital speedometer 159, 167
Distronic* 174, 274
Maintenance service indicator
message 407
Messages in the multifunction
display 433–471
Multifunction display 159
Outside temperature 158, 159, 167
Selecting 180
Showing malfunctions 175
Symbol messages 451
Text messages 435
Vehicle status message memory 174
Vehicle system settings,
Control system 163, 165, 176
Distance to empty (range), Trip
computer 191
Distance warning function* 191
Distronic* 271
Activating 277
Cleaning system sensor 414
Control system 276
Deactivating 280
Distance warning function* 284
Driving hints 282
Messages in the multifunction
display 437
Warning and indicator lamps 274
Door
Entry lamps 155
Locking, In an emergency 479
Locking/unlocking,
KEYLESS-GO* 116
Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 112
Messages in the multifunction
display 460
Opening from the inside 122
Opening from the outside 113
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid*) 336
Unlocking, Mechanical key 478
551
Index
Door control panel 36
Door handle 36
Door windows see Power windows
DOT 396, 401
Drinking and driving 347
Driving 51
Abroad 356
Hydroplaning 352
In winter 354, 405
Instructions 51, 347
Problems 63
Safety systems 100
Systems 266
Through standing water 355
With Distronic* 282
Driving off 58
Driving safety systems
4-ETS 106
ABS 100
BAS 102
EBP 105
ESP® 102
552
Driving systems 266
AIRMATIC* 285
Cruise control 266
Distronic* 271
Parktronic* 291
Rear view camera* 295
Driving tips 203
Kickdown 203
E
Easy-entry/exit feature* 132
Control system 190
EBP 105
Indicator and warning lamps 422
Electric air pump 502
Electrical fuses see Fuses
Electrical system, Technical data 535
Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP
Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
Electronic Traction System see 4-ETS
Emergency calls
Tele Aid* 331
Emergency, In case of
Battery, Jump starting 514
First aid kit 472
Flat tire 497
Fuses 520
Hazard warning flasher 152
Instrument cluster,
Indicator lamps 420–428
Roadside Assistance 12, 333
Towing the vehicle 517
Emergency operation
Locking/unlocking the vehicle 478
Power tilt/sliding sunroof,
Manual operation* 481
Remote door unlock, Tele Aid* 336
Tailgate, Opening from the
inside 123
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) 211
Emergency tensioning device see ETD
Index
Emission control 358
Information label 527
System warranties 10
Vacuum routing diagram label 527
Engine
Belt layout 528
Break-in recommendations 346
Cleaning 412
Compartment 364
Malfunction indicator lamp 29, 423
Maximum engine speed 157, 530
Number 527
Starting 54
Tachometer 29, 157
Technical data 530
Turning off 67
Engine coolant see Coolant
Engine oil 366, 540
Adding 369, 540
Additives 540
Changing 369, 540
Checking level 366
Checking level, Control system 366
Checking level, Dipstick 368
Consumption 366
Filler neck 369
Messages in the multifunction
display 366, 367, 458
Recommended engine oils and
filters 540
ESP® 102
Messages in the multifunction
display 441–442
Warning lamp 27, 425
ETD 82
Safety guidelines 76
Extending cargo compartment 301
Exterior rear view mirrors 48, 212
Power folding* 214
Synchronizing 214
F
Fastening the seat belts 51
Filler neck, Engine oil 369
First aid kit 472
Flat tire 497
Collapsible tire 475, 500, 534
Jacking up the vehicle 498
Lowering the vehicle 503
Mounting the spare wheel 500
Preparing the vehicle 498
Spare wheel 475, 500, 534
Floormats 343
Fluids
Automatic transmission fluid 370,
538
Brake fluid 362, 538, 541
Capacities 538
Engine coolant 362, 370, 539, 543
Engine oil 366, 538, 540
Power steering fluid 538
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system 372, 539
553
Index
Fog lamp, Front see Corner-illuminating
front fog lamps*
Fog lamp, Rear 150
Messages in the multifunction
display 466
Replacing bulbs 484
4-ETS 106
Front air bags 77
Front defroster 224, 239
Front lamps see Headlamps
Front passenger front
air bag 77, 88, 93, 431
Front passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp 31, 77, 88, 93, 431
Front seat head restraints see
Head restraints
Front towing eye 518
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) 407
Fuel 360, 539, 541
Additives 542
Capacities, Fuel tank 539
554
Consumption statistics 191
Filling the tank 360
Fuel filler flap and cap 360
Fuel gauge 29
Fuel reserve warning lamp 29, 430
Premium unleaded gasoline 360,
541, 542
Requirements, Octane rating 542
Fuel cap
Messages in the multifunction
display 460
Fuel filler flap 360
Locking/unlocking 360
Opening 360
Opening in an emergency 479
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 538
Fuses 520
Fuse box, Cargo compartment 521
Fuse box, Engine compartment 521
Fuse box, Passenger
compartment 522
Fuse chart 472, 520
Fuse extractor 472, 520
Replacing 520
Spare fuses 472, 520
G
Garage door opener* 337
Gasoline see Fuel
GAWR 401
Gear range
Automatic transmission 205
Limiting 205
Shifting into optimal 208
Gear selector lever 25, 54, 197
Gearshift pattern 54, 197
Message in the display 443
Messages in the multifunction
display 443
Position 200
Shifting procedure 200
Transmission position 201
Global locking/unlocking see
Key, SmartKey
Glove box 311
Good visibility 212
Index
Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
Gross Trailer Weight see GTW
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW
GTW 401
GVW 402
GVWR 402
H
Halogen headlamps see Headlamps
Hands-free microphone 33
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 417
Hazard warning flasher 152
Head restraints
Active head restraint 83, 137
Front seats 45
Rear seats 139, 140
Headlamp cleaning system* 212, 372
Reservoir capacity 539
Headlamp shut-off delay see Delayed
shut-off, Exterior lamps
Headlamps
Automatic headlamp mode 147
Bi-Xenon* 485
Cleaning lenses 413
Cleaning system* 212, 372
Halogen 485
Light sensor, Messages in the multifunction display 463
Manual headlamp mode 147
Messages in the multifunction
display 463–468
Replacing bulbs 484, 485
Switch 59, 146
Headliner, Cleaning 417
Heated seats see Seat heating*
Heated steering wheel* 326
High beam flasher 59, 150
High beam headlamps
Indicator lamp 29
Messages in the multifunction
display 464
Replacing 484
Switching on 59, 150
High mounted brake lamp 485
High-performance brake system (AMG vehicles only) 350
Hinged quarter windows* see Power windows
Hood 364
Messages in the multifunction
display 460
Opening 364
Hooks
Loading 300
Horn 25
HVAC see Climate control or Automatic climate control (3-zone)*
Hydroplaning 352
555
Index
I
Identification label see Labels
Identification labels
Certification label 527
Ignition 40, 54, 67
Immobilizer 107
Indicator lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
warning
Infant and child restraint systems see
Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure see Tires, Inflation
pressure
Information button see Tele Aid*
Infrared reflecting windshield* 344
Inside door handle 122
Instrument cluster 26, 156
Illumination brightness 157
Lamps 420
Messages in the multifunction
display 433–471
Multifunction display 159
Selecting language 179
556
Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster,
Illumination brightness
Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Interior lighting 153
Delayed switch-off 186
Interior rear view mirror 48
Antiglare position 212
Auto-dimming* 213
Interior storage spaces see Storage compartments
Intermittent wiping
Windshield wipers 61
J
Jack 472, 474
Jacking up the vehicle
Jump starting 514
498
K
Key, Mechanical 478
Key, SmartKey 112
Batteries 115, 483
Battery check lamp 112
Checking battery condition 115
Closing the power windows
Convenience closing feature) 256
Closing the tilt/sliding panel*
(Convenience closing feature) 256
Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(Convenience closing feature) 256
Closing, Power tailgate* 127
Factory settings 113
Locking/unlocking 38, 68, 112
Locking/unlocking, Global
setting 114
Loss of 115
Messages in the multifunction
display 461–462
Opening the power windows
(Summer opening feature) 254
Opening the tilt/sliding panel*
(Summer opening feature) 254
Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(Summer opening feature) 254
Index
Remote control 112
Replacing batteries 483
Selective settings 114
Starter switch positions 39
Starting the engine 54
Turning off the engine 67
Unlocking and opening, Power
tailgate* 115
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Batteries 120, 483
Battery check lamp 116
Checking battery condition 120
Closing the power windows
(Convenience closing feature) 256
Closing the tilt/sliding panel*
(Convenience closing feature) 256
Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(Convenience closing feature) 256
Closing/locking, Power
tailgate* 128
Factory settings 119
Important notes 117
Locking/unlocking 39, 68, 116
Locking/unlocking, Global
setting 119
Loss of 121
Messages in the multifunction
display 461–462
Opening the power windows
(Summer opening feature) 254
Opening the tilt/sliding panel*
(Summer opening feature) 254
Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*
(Summer opening feature) 254
Remote control 116
Replacing batteries 483
Selective settings 119
Start/stop button 41
Starter switch positions 39, 41
Starting the engine 55
Turning off engine 67
Unlocking and opening, Power
tailgate* 121
Kickdown 203
Kilopascal 402
L
Labels 526
Certification label 526
Emission control information 527
Engine number 527
Paint code 526
Vacuum line routing diagram 527
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) 527
Lamps, exterior 485
Front 485
Light sensor, Messages in the multifunction display 463
Messages in display 465
Messages in the multifunction
display 463–468
Rear 485
Lamps, Indicator and warning
ABS 27, 420
Brakes 27, 421
Center console 31, 431
CHECK ENGINE 29, 423, 424
Engine diagnostics 29, 423, 424
ESP® 27, 425
557
Index
Front fog lamps* 146
Front passenger front air bag off 78,
88, 92, 93, 431
Fuel reserve 29, 430
High beam headlamps 29
Instrument cluster 26, 420
Parktronic* 293, 294
Preglow indicator, Diesel engine 29
Rear fog lamp 146
Seat belt telltale 29, 79, 426
Seat heating* 142
SRS 29, 72, 82, 430
Turn signals 27
Lamps, indicator and warning
Distance warning lamp* 275
Instrument cluster 428
Seat ventilation* 143
Language, Setting 179
LATCH-type child seat anchors see
Children in the vehicle
Leather upholstery, Cleaning and
care of 418
License plate lamps 485
Messages in the multifunction
display 465
Replacing bulbs 485, 493
558
Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 416
Light sensor
Messages in the multifunction
display 463
Lighter see Cigarette lighter*
Lighting
Parking lamps 146
Lighting, Exterior and interior 146
Limp-home mode 211, 423, 424
Loading see Vehicle loading
Loading terminology 401
Locator lighting 149, 184
Lock buttons, KEYLESS-GO*
Outside door handle 69
Loss of keys, Mechanical key 115
Loss of keys, SmartKey 115
Loss of keys, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 121
Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 525
Low beam headlamps
Messages in the multifunction
display 463–468
Replacing bulbs 487
switching on 59, 146
Lubricants 538
M
Maintenance 12, 407
Calling up service indicator
display 409
Clearing service indicator
message 408
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) 407
Maintenance System (U.S.
vehicles) 407
Resetting service indicator 409
Service indicator message 407
Service term exceeded 408
Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps
Manual shift program
(R 63 AMG only) 209
Deactivating 211
Maximum cooling, MAX COOL* see
Automatic climate control (3-zone)*
Maximum inflation pressure, Tires 402
Maximum load rating, Tires 402
Maximum loaded vehicle weight,
Tires 402
Mechanical key 478
Memory function* 144
Menus see Control system menus
Messages in display see Multifunction
Index
display messages
Microphone, Hands-free 33
Mirrors
Adjusting 48
Auto-dimming* 213
Exterior rear view mirrors 49
Interior rear view mirror 48, 212
Mobile phone see Telephone*
MON 542
Multicontour seats* 136
Multifunction display 159
Changing settings see Control system
menus and Control system submenus
Selecting language 179
Standard display 163
Multifunction display
messages 433–471
ABS 435, 442
AIRMATIC* 470–471
Brake fluid 454
Brake pads 452
Coolant 455–457
Cruise control 436
Doors 460
EBP 453
Engine coolant 455–457
Engine oil 366, 367, 458
ESP® 436, 441, 442
Fog lamps, Front* 464
Fog lamps, Rear 466
Front passenger front air
bag 445–448
Fuel cap 460
Gear selector lever 443
Headlamps 463–468
Hood 460
Key, SmartKey 462
Key, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 461, 462
Lamps 465
Lamps, exterior 463
Low tire pressure 449
Parking brake 443, 453
Parking lamps 466
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 461
SRS 444
Tele Aid* 469
Telephone* 469
Windshield washer fluid 469
Multifunction steering wheel 30, 160
Button operation 160
N
Navigation system* 173
See separate COMAND system operating instructions
Net, Parcel 315
Net, Partition* 308
Neutral gear position, Automatic
transmission 197, 201
New vehicle, Break-in period 346
Night security illumination 149, 185
Normal occupant weight 402
Number, Vehicle Identification
(VIN) 526, 527
559
Index
O
Occupant Classification System see OCS
Occupant distribution 402
Occupant safety 72
Active head restraint 83
Air bags 74
Children and air bags 75, 86
Children in the vehicle 84
Fastening the seat belts 51
Front passenger front air bag of
indicator lamp 88, 92, 93
Infant and child restraint systems 85
LATCH-type child seat anchors 93
OCS 88
OCS, Messages in the multifunction
display 445–448
Seat belts 51, 76
OCS 88
Messages in the multifunction
display 445
Self-test 93
Odometer 157, 159
Oil level see Engine oil, Checking level
Oil see Engine oil
One-touch gearshifting 207
Operating safety 16
560
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 413
Outside temperature see Displays
Overdue maintenance service term 408
Overhead control panel 33
Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) 358
P
Paintwork code 526
Paintwork, Cleaning 411
Panic alarm 99
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel* 261
Cleaning 416
Convenience closing feature 256
Opening/closing 262
Roller sunblinds 261
Stopping 262
Summer opening feature 254
Synchronizing 264
Parcel nets 315
Parking 65, 351
Parking brake 57, 66
Lamps, Indicator and warning 421
Messages in the multifunction
display 453
Releasing 57
Parking lamps 485
Messages in the multifunction
display 466
Replacing bulbs 484
Parktronic* (Parking assist) 291
Cleaning system sensors 414
Minimum distance 292
Range 292
Sensor cover 414
Switching on/off 294
System malfunction 294
System sensors 291
Warning indicators 293
Partition net* 308
Parts service 524
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see
Front passenger front air bag of
indicator lamp
Passenger compartment 356
Fuse box 522
Interior lighting 153
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Pedals 347
Phone see Telephone*
Plastic and rubber parts, Cleaning 416
Index
Poly-V-belt drive
Layout 528
Positions (Memory function*) see
Seats 145
Power assistance 348
Power outlets 322
Power seats see Seats
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 258
Convenience closing feature 256
Opening/closing 258
Opening/closing in an
emergency 481
Stopping 256
Summer opening feature 254
Synchronizing 260
Power washer 411
Power windows
Cleaning 415
Convenience closing feature 256
Door windows 251
Hinged quarter windows* 253
Opening/closing 251
Rear door windows, Blocking
operation 97
Summer opening feature 254
Synchronizing, Door windows 254
Practical hints 419
Premium unleaded gasoline 541
Problems
While driving 63
With starting see Starting difficulties
With the vehicle 17
Product information 9
Production options weight 402
Program mode see Automatic
transmission, Automatic shift program
Program mode selector switch
Automatic shift program 206
PSI 402
Push-starting see Tow-starting
Q
Quarter windows see Power windows
R
RACETIMER see Control system menus,
AMG menu
Radio
AUDIO menu, Control system 171
Selecting station 171
Selecting stations (satellite*) 172
Radio transmitters 357
Range (distance to empty) 193
Reading lamp 154, 155
Rear automatic climate control* 245
Rear center console* 323
Rear climate control 229
Rear door window sunshade* 216
Rear door windows
Blocking operation 97
Rear fog lamp see Fog lamp, Rear
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear seat ashtray see Ashtrays* 319
Rear seat head restraints see Head
restraints 139
Rear towing eye 518
Rear view camera* 295
Cleaning 415
Lens, Cleaning 415
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear view mirrors, Automatic
antiglare* 213
Rear window defroster 217
Rear window wiper/washer 62
Rear windows see Power windows
Recommended tire inflation
pressure 402
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle
(Tele Aid*) 337
561
Index
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 540
Refueling 360
Regular checks 362
Reminder, Seat belt see Seat belts, Telltale
Remote control
SmartKey 112
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 116
Remote door unlock, Tele Aid* 336
Replacing bulbs 484
Backup lamps 484, 485, 491
Brake lamps 484, 485, 491
Corner-illuminating front fog
lamps* 484, 485, 487, 489
Fog lamp, Rear 484, 485, 491, 492
Headlamps 484, 485, 487
License plate lamps 484, 485, 491,
493
Low beam headlamps 484, 485, 487
Parking lamps 484, 485, 487, 489,
491, 492
Side marker lamps, Front 484, 491
Side marker lamps, Rear 484, 485,
491, 492
Standing lamps 484, 485, 487, 489,
491, 492
562
Tail lamps 484, 485, 491
Turn signal lamps 484, 485, 487,
489, 491
Reporting safety defects 18
Reset button, In instrument cluster 156
Reset tool
Active head restraints,
Depository 482
Residual heat utilization 245
Restraint system
See Children in the vehicle
See SRS
Restraint system see Infant and child restraint systems
Reverse gear position, Automatic
transmission 197, 201
Rims 403, 532
Roadside Assistance 12
Roadside Assistance button see Tele Aid*
Roller sunblinds, Panorama roof* 261
RON 542
Roof rack* 297
Rubber parts, Cleaning 416
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 383
S
Safety
Driving safety systems 100
Occupant safety 72
Reporting safety defects 18
Safety belts see Seat belts
Satellite radio* 172
Seat belt force limiter 82
Seat belt height adjustment 53
Seat belts 79
Children in the vehicle 84
Cleaning 417
Fastening 51
Height adjustment 53
Proper use of 53, 81
Safety guidelines 76
Telltale 29, 79, 426
Seat heating* see Seats 143
Seat ventilation* see Seats
Seating capacity 377
Index
Seats 132
Adjusting 43
Easy entry/exit feature 132
Heating* 142
Memory function* 144
Multicontour seat* 136
Ventilation* 143
Securing cargo 299
Selector lever see Gear selector lever
Self-test
Lamps in the instrument cluster 420
OCS 93
Tele Aid* 331
Service and warranty information 10
Service intervals see Maintenance, Service
indicator 409
Service life
Tires 374
Vehicle battery 506
Service, Parts 524
Service see Maintenance
Service system see FSS PLUS
(Canada vehicles) or
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)
Settings
AIRMATIC* 285
Clock 181
Comfort functions* 189
Control system menus 162, 164
Control system submenus 163, 165,
177
Date 181, 182
Distance warning function* 191
Factory, SmartKey 113
Factory, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 119
Individual, Vehicle 176
Instrument cluster 179
Language, multifunction display 180
Lighting 183
Memory function* 144
Resetting all, Control system 176
Selective, SmartKey 114
Selective, SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* 119
Time 181
Vehicle level control* 286
Shift program mode, Automatic
transmission 206
Shifting, Automatic transmission 197
Side impact air bags 78
Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses 413
Messages in the multifunction
display 466
Replacing bulbs 484, 485
Side windows see Power windows
Sidewall 403
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey 112
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* see Key,
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 116
Snow chains 406
Snow tires see Winter tires
Spare fuses 472
Spare wheel 475, 534
Inflating 501
Mounting 498
Wheel bolts 472, 500
Speed settings
Cruise control 270
Distronic* 277
Speedometer 27
Spinning see Tires, Direction of rotation
563
Index
SRS 81
Indicator lamp 430
Messages in the multifunction
display 444
Standing lamps
Replacing bulbs 484, 485
Standing water, Driving through 355
Starter switch 24, 39
Positions 39
Starting difficulties, Engine 57
Starting, Engine 54
Steering column 46, 47
Steering wheel
Adjusting, Electrically* 47
Adjusting, Manually 46
Buttons 160
Cleaning 417
Heating* 326
Steering wheel gearshift control
Automatic transmission 207
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 337
564
Storage compartments 34, 311
Armrest, Front 313
Armrest, Rear* 314
Cup holders 316
Door pockets 34
Front center console 312
Glove box 311
Parcel nets 315
Second-row seats, In front of 314
Third-row 315
Storing tires 375
Stranded vehicle 519
Submenus see Control system submenus
Sun visors 215
Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding
sunroof* 258
Sunshades*
Rear door windows 216
Symbols used in this Operator’s
Manual 15
T
Tachometer 29, 157
Overspeed range 157
Tail lamps 491
Cleaning lenses 413
Messages in the multifunction
display 463–468
Replacing bulbs 485
Tailgate
Closing 125
Closing from the inside
electrically* 125
Closing from the outside (vehicles
without KEYLESS-GO*) 127
Opening 123
Opening from the inside,
Electrically* 124
Opening from the inside,
Manually 123
Opening from the outside 123
Unlocking and opening with
KEYLESS-GO* 121
Unlocking with SmartKey 115
Tar stains 411
Index
Technical data 540
Air conditioning refrigerant 539
Brake fluid 539, 541
Coolant 539, 543
Dimensions, Vehicle 536
Electrical system 535
Engine 530
Engine oil 538, 540
Engine oil additives 540
Fuel requirements 542
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 538
Gasoline additives 542
Premium unleaded gasoline 541
Rims 532
Tires 532
Weights 537
Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning* system 539, 546
Tele Aid* 330
Call priority 336
Emergency calls 331
Hands-free microphone 33
Information 334
Initiating an emergency call
manually 332
Messages in the multifunction
display 469
Remote door unlock 336
Roadside Assistance 333
SOS button 332
Stolen Vehicle Recovery
services 337
System self-check 331
Telephone cradle
Changing 329
Telephone* 327
Answering/ending a call 194, 195
Changing mobile phone cradle 329
Dialing a number from the phone
book 195
Hands-free microphone 33
Inserting in cradle 328
Installing a different mobile phone
cradle 329
Messages in the multifunction
display 469
Operation 193
Phone book* 195
Redialing 196
Removing from cradle 329
Temperature
Coolant 166
Display mode, Status indicator 180
Interior temperature, setting see
Climate control or Automatic climate
control (3-zone)*
Outside temperature 167
Sensor, Interior temperature 235
Sensor, Outside temperature 158
Tether attachment points
Children in the vehicle 84
3-zone automatic climate control* 232
Ticket holder 317
Tie-down rings 299
Tightening torque, Wheel bolts 504
Tilt/sliding panel* see Panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel*
Tilt/sliding sunroof* see Power tilt/sliding
sunroof*
Time 181
TIN 396, 403
Tire and Loading Information
Placard 377
Terminology 401
Tire Identification Number see TIN
565
Index
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 382
Checking manually 383
Checking tire pressure electronically,
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS)*, (Canada
only) 388
Checking tire pressure electronically,
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), (USA only) 385
Recommended tire inflation
pressure 380
Tires 373, 532
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (Advanced TPMS)*, (Canada
only) 388
Air pressure 401
Care and maintenance 374
Cleaning 375
Collapsible tire, Spare wheel 534
Combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale, USA only 27
Direction of rotation, Spinning 375
Driving instructions 352
Hydroplaning 352
Important guidelines 373
566
Important notes, Tire inflation
pressure 381
Inflation pressure 380, 382
Inspection 374
Load rating 392, 393, 403
Loading terminology 401
Loading the vehicle 376
Low tire pressure telltale 27, 428
Ply composition and material
used 403
Retreads 373
Rims and tires 532
Rotating 404
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 383
Service life 374
Sizes 532
Snow chains 406
Spare wheel, Collapsible tire 534
Speed rating 353, 393, 403
Storing 375
Temperature 381, 400
Terminology 401
TIN 396, 403
Tire Identification Number see TIN
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)*, (USA only) 385
TPMS malfunction telltale (USA
only) 428
Traction 353, 399, 403
Tread depth 375, 405
Treadwear indicators 375
Vehicle maximum load on 403
Wear pattern 404
Winter tires 405
Tongue Weight Rating see TWR
Tools 472
Top tether
Children in the vehicle 84
Towing eye bolts 518
Towing the vehicle 517
Tow-starting 514, 517
TPMS (USA only) 385
Traction 403
4-ETS, Driving safety systems 100,
106
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Traveling abroad 356
Tread 403
Tread depth 375
Treadwear indicators 403
Trip computer 191
Trip odometer 157
Index
Turn signal lamps
Cleaning lenses 413
Messages in the multifunction
display 468
Replacing bulbs 484
Turn signals 60
Additional in mirrors 485
Bulbs 485
Cleaning lenses 413
Indicator lamps 26
Turning off the engine 67
TWR 403
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards 403
Units, Settings
Speedometer 179
Unlocking the vehicle see Key
Upholstery
Cleaning and care of 417
Useful features 311
V
Vacuum line routing diagram label 527
Vehicle
Battery 506
Break-in period 346
Care 410
Control systems, Settings menu 176
Dimensions 536
Locking/unlocking 38, 68, 112
Locking/unlocking in an
emergency 478
Modifications and alterations,
Operation safety 16
Proper use of 16
Towing 517
Washing 412
Weights 537
Vehicle care 410
Vehicle Identification Number see VIN
Vehicle jack 473, 474
Vehicle lighting 363
Vehicle loading 297
Cargo compartment cover
blind* 306
Cargo tie-down rings 299
Hooks 300
Loading instructions 298
Loading terminology 401
Parcel nets 315
Partition net* 308
Roof rack* 297
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
(Tele Aid*) 337
Vehicle status message memory
menu 174
Vehicle tool kit 472
Vehicle washing 412
VIN 527
403
567
Index
W
Warning indicators
Parktronic* 293
Warning lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function* 284
Distronic* 275
Exterior lamps 68
Parking brake 58
Parktronic system* 293
Seat belt telltale 82, 426, 427
Warranty coverage 10, 525
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washer reservoir level 372
Washing the vehicle 410
Wear pattern, Tires 404
Weights, Vehicle 537
Wheel
Bolts 500
Change 497
Removing 500
Spare 534
Tightening torque 504
568
Wheels
Sizes 532
Wheels, Tires and 373
Window curtain air bags 78
Windows see Power windows
Windshield
Cleaning 415
Defogging 225, 240
Infrared reflecting* 344
Washer fluid 546
Windshield washer fluid 372
Messages in the multifunction
display 469
Mixing ratio 546
Refilling 372
Reservoir level 372
Windshield washer system 372, 546
Windshield wipers 60
Cleaning wiper blades 415
Fast continuous wiping 61
Fast intermittent wiping 61
Rear window wiper/washer 62
Replacing wiper blades 494
Slow continuous wiping 61
Slow intermittent wiping 61
Winter driving
Snow chains 406
Tires 405
Winter driving instructions 354
Winter tires 405
Wiping and washing simultaneously 63
Wood trims, cleaning 418
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality service, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this
Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Press time March 27, 2006
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany